Apr 25, 2024  
College Catalog 2021-2022 
    
College Catalog 2021-2022 [ARCHIVED CATALOG]

Course Descriptions/Official Course Syllabi


  

 

Occupational Therapy Assistant

  
  • OTAS 1450 - Level 1 Fieldwork-First Placement

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1000 OTAS 1012 , OTAS 1110 , OTAS 1210 , OTAS 1230 , and OTAS 1235  all with grade C or better

    (formerly OTAS 1410)

    By providing supervised clinical experience, this course gives the beginning level-1 student experience in basic occupational therapy interventions, particularly those in the psychosocial domain, under the guidance of a qualified fieldwork educator.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate beginning ability to integrate academic learning with clinical practice, emphasis in the psychosocial domain and its relationship to occupational performance.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ability to gather an occupational profile through a client‐centered approach including medical chart review, interviews, and clinical observation of performance.
    2. Demonstrate beginning ability to interpret information gathered via observation of the client’s occupational performance to formulate appropriate occupational therapy treatment interventions.
    3. Implement intervention methods utilizing occupation‐based activities learned in class or those used at the fieldwork site, under the supervision of the fieldwork educator.
    4. Document the observation of the client’s performance utilizing the occupational therapy practice framework through application of the occupational therapist, body of knowledge and process.
    5. Demonstrate awareness of safety issues throughout the client’s occupational performance and intervene as needed.
    6. Identify roles and functions of other interprofessional team members working with clients.
    7. Demonstrate an understanding of health literacy to include education and training of the client, caregiver, family and others for health and wellness.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Didactic Portion
      1. Introduction
        1. Course sequence, requirements, student performance expectations & competencies
      2. Universal precautions
        1. Follow universal precautions while engaged in client care
          1. Handwashing techniques
          2. Air‐borne and blood‐borne pathogens
        2. Air‐borne and blood‐borne pathogens
        3. Hepatitis B vaccinations
      3. Observation techniques
        1. Behavioral vs. interpretive
        2. Documentation techniques
        3. Communication skills
          1. Utilize observation and communication skills while engaged in client intervention
      4. Professionalism
        1. Dress code
        2. Responding to constructive criticism
        3. Michigan Mental Health Code
        4. AOTA Code of Ethics
    2. Fieldwork Portion
      1. Observation: Refers to the act of seeing, but more importantly, seeing with attention to specific elements and details so that it becomes possible to make tentative statements about what has been seen. Students will receive some guidance as to what is to be observed.
      2. Participation: Implies a shared involvement in an activity. The student must take responsibility for their learning including communication and professional accountability.
      3. Affective Domain: Evaluation of the student in the affective domain is aimed at objectively assessing those personal traits and attitudes which are viewed as essential to the growth and development of the student, not only as a practitioner but as a well‐integrated person. Traits, habits and attitudes to be considered will include:
        1. General Appearance: appropriate attire each day, appropriate footwear, present self appropriately.
        2. Dependability: attends clinicals, arrives on time, carries out assignment, follows direction accurately, accepts responsibility within capabilities.
        3. Ability to accept supervision: accepts feedback objectively, profits from suggestions, can engage on collaborative relationships, not passive-dependent, accepts guidance and feedback.
        4. Attitude: positive, realistic, willingness to accept new and different ideas.
        5. Initiative: seeks out information, assumes responsibility for learning, does not need prodding, can assume responsibility for tasks within capacity, follows through on own where appropriate.
        6. Interpersonal relationship: comfortable with clients and staff, able to initiate conversation with clients, viewed positively by others, adjusts to situations.
        7. Ability to communicate: expresses self clearly both orally and in writing, spells correctly, uses terminology appropriately, speaks with assurance.

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2095 - Technology & Environmental Intervention-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 ,OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2410 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450  

    This course provides the student with working knowledge in the use of technology and environmental intervention methods to support and enhance client performance, participation and well‑being. Knowledge in issues of reimbursement for the prevailing healthcare environment will be addressed. Basic to complex technology will be accentuated, including the principles of orthotic planning, construction, and application.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. The use of technology and environmental intervention to enhance occupational performance and foster participation and well‐being of clients.
      1. Define methods of technology and environment intervention.
        1. Articulate the difference between basic and complex technology.
        2. Articulate interprofessional members and roles.
      2. Articulate the historical perspective and the impact of major legislation, including the Americans with Disabilities Act.
      3. Articulate the clients in need of intervention.
      4. Articulate client contexts and environments that impact intervention.
      5. Articulate the occupational performance areas associated with technology and environmental intervention.
      6. Articulate the need for, and use of, compensatory strategies when desired life tasks cannot be performed.
      7. Articulate knowledge for the funding of technology and environmental devices, systems and services.
    2. Application of the occupational therapy process to technology and environmental intervention.
      1. Articulate the role of the OTA in the use of intervention.
      2. Analyze the need for occupational therapy intervention utilizing technology and environment methods/strategies when desired life tasks cannot be performed.
      3. Articulate the principles of assessment and intervention.
      4. Analyze the use of the occupational profile and occupational assessment in determining the selection of intervention.
      5. Explain recommendations to the OT for need of referrals for additional evaluation and other disciplines.
    3. Application of the principles and strategies of intervention for technology and environment intervention, including electronic aids to daily living and seating and positioning systems, used to enhance occupational performance and foster participation and well‐being.
      1. Analyze and apply environmental adaptations and processes including barrier free design with areas of occupation.
      2. Analyze and apply ergonomic principles for enhancement of occupational performance.
      3. Apply training techniques and articulate issues with enhancement of community mobility.
      4. Apply teaching techniques with compensatory strategies.
    4. Application of basic skills and analysis in the assessment, fabrication, and application, fitting and training in orthotic devices used to enhance occupational performance and participation.
      1. Articulate the difference between static, dynamic and prefabricated/ constructed splints.
      2. Analyze and articulate the conditions that warrant orthotic intervention.
      3. Articulate the assessment and planning for the application of orthotic intervention.
      4. Demonstrate construction of an upper extremity static splint.
      5. Demonstrate the application of an upper extremity static splint.
      6. Demonstrate teaching, care and scheduling of an orthotic device.
      7. Articulate the principles of prosthetic devices, both upper and lower extremity.
      8. Articulate the interprofessional team and the role delineation involved with the intervention of a prosthetic device.
      9. Articulate the assessment and planning required of prosthetic intervention.
      10. J. Articulate the application, fitting, and role of OT in the use and care of prosthetic devices.
      11. K. Demonstrate teaching methods required in prosthetic device intervention for client and caregiver.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Course Introduction
      1. Defining technology and environmental intervention
        1. Basic technology
        2. Complex technology
      2. Interprofessional members and their roles
      3. Historical perspective with the use of technology and environmental Intervention
        1. Legislative impact
        2. Americans with Disability Act
      4. Funding sources for devices, systems and services
    2. Intervention Populations
      1. Types of clients
      2. Conditions and dysfunction
      3. Client factors
      4. Client contexts and environment
      5. Performance areas
      6. Need and use of compensatory strategies for desired life tasks
    3. Clinical Reasoning Application with Assistive Technology Application
      1. Role of the OT and OTA
      2. Principles of assistive technology assessment and intervention
      3. Identifying client needs for assistive technology intervention
        1. Occupation profile and context
        2. Occupational assessment
          1. Occupational performance areas
          2. Performance skills
          3. Client factors
          4. Performance patterns
          5. Activity demands
          6. Context and environment
      4. Recommending to the OT additional referrals for evaluation
      5. Referrals to other disciplines and team members
    4. Categories of Technology and Environmental Interventions and Compensatory Strategies
      1. Splints and orthotics
        1. Conditions that warrant orthotic intervention
        2. Purpose and principles
        3. Types
          1. Static
          2. Dynamic
          3. Prefabrication and constructed
        4. Assessment and planning
        5. Construction of upper extremity splint
        6. Demonstration of splint application
        7. Strategies to teach application, care and scheduling
        8. Examples and use of lower extremity orthotics
        9. Interprofessional members and roles
      2. Functional electronic equipment
        1. Bioness - upper and lower extremity
        2. Saebo device - upper extremity
        3. Other functional electronic equipment
      3. Prosthetics - Upper and Lower Extremity
        1. Upper extremity
          1. Terminal devices
          2. Myoelectric prosthesis
          3. Intervention applications
        2. Lower extremity
          1. Pylon
          2. Computerized systems
          3. Disarticulation prosthesis
          4. Transmetatarsal prosthesis
          5. Intervention applications
      4. Personal Computer and Modifications
        1. Basic components
        2. Basic principles of adaptation
        3. Internet access
        4. Intervention applications
      5. Seating and Positioning
        1. Wheelchair measurement
        2. Guidelines for postural control and pressure management
        3. Benefits of postural control and pressure management
        4. Types of seating and position equipment
          1. Features and benefits
          2. Principles of application
          3. Interprofessional team members and referrals
        5. Intervention applications
      6. Technology through Computers and Modifications
        1. Education
        2. Work
        3. Applications
        4. Personal computers and modifications
        5. Basic components
        6. Basic principles of adaptation
        7. Internet access
        8. Intervention applications
      7. Technologies to Enable Mobility
        1. Types of wheeled mobility systems
          1. Features and controls
          2. Evaluation
          3. Principles of applications and training
        2. Issues to enhance community mobility
          1. Public transportation
          2. Community access
          3. Driver rehabilitation
      8. Driver Aids, Technology and Training
        1. Evaluation for transportation and driving
          1. Driving simulators
        2. Modification for driving
        3. Vehicle access and selection
        4. Transportation of wheelchair riders
        5. Intervention applications
        6. Driving rehabilitation resources
          1. Carlift
          2. OT‐driver off road assessment
          3. Older driver safety awareness
      9. Barrier‐free and Universal Design
        1. Assessment
        2. Intervention applications
          1. Daily life skills
          2. Leisure and social participation
          3. Classroom
          4. Work
          5. Community
      10. Ergonomics Principles
        1. Settings
          1. Home
          2. Work
          3. School
        2. Assessment
        3. Intervention applications
      11. Environmental Controls
        1. Basic and complex technology devices
          1. General purpose devices
          2. Special purpose devices
        2. Special purpose aids and devices
          1. Feeders
          2. Page turners
        3. Aids to daily living
          1. Selection and control
          2. Training
        4. Robotic aids
        5. Application interventions
      12. Augmentative and Alternative Communication Systems
        1. Disabilities affecting speech and language
        2. Types of communication
        3. Conversational needs
        4. Graphic needs
        5. Characteristics of systems
        6. Intervention applications
      13. Sensory Aids for Visual and Auditory Impairment
        1. Approaches to intervention
        2. Visual aids
          1. Magnification aids
          2. Automatic reading devices
          3. Mobility and orientation aids
          4. Auditory sensors
          5. Special purpose aids
          6. Intervention applications
        3. Auditory aids
          1. Hearing aids
          2. Phone access
          3. Alternating devices
          4. Assistive listening devices
          5. Intervention applications
      14. Telehealth
        1. Digital technologies for delivery of medical services, education and public health services
    5. Application of Principles and Strategies to Daily Living and Life Skills
      1. Promoting motivation and engagement for well‐being
      2. Applying environmental adaptations supporting performance, participation and well‐being
        1. Daily life skills
          1. Feeding
          2. Bathing
          3. Dressing
          4. Home management
          5. Electric aids
          6. Context considerations
        2. Leisure, play and social skills
          1. Adapted games and sports equipment
          2. Manipulation, grip and reaching adaptations of leisure equipment
          3. Page turners
        3. Classroom/education
          1. Educational activities
            1. Reading
            2. Writing
            3. Music
          2. Workstation adaptations
          3. Use of robotics
          4. Adhering to educational regulations and considerations
          5. Context implications
        4. Work
          1. Ergonomic applications
          2. Robotic aids of manipulation
          3. Workstation adaptations
          4. Working with employers
      3. Teaching demonstration of compensatory strategies
        1. Approaches and methods
        2. Demonstration of skill

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2350 - Productive Aging-Lab Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2410 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450 

    This lab‑based course with a lecture component provides the student with application knowledge in the skills and special considerations required when working with aging clients. Physiological, cognitive, and psychosocial function will be covered with an emphasis on aging‑in‑place and productive aging. The role of occupational therapy in evidenced‑based intervention planning and follow through with discontinuation of services is analyzed. Clinical reasoning skills will be emphasized in planning intervention for dysfunction, and health promotion and wellness, while understanding the context and intervention needs of the aging population for occupational‑based performance.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2350 are communication, clinical reasoning and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Describe and analyze the physical, emotional, and social problems related to the aging process and the impact to occupational performance in the elderly.
      1. Relate the factors of environment, social and financial that influence performance and occupational roles of the aging population.
      2. Relate the challenges of the aging process and the impact to function.
      3. Relate and compare the considerations of aging in place and chronic conditions, including physical, psychosocial and cognitive function.
      4. Relate the relationship of ethnicity/culture, context and purposeful activity for geriatric intervention.
      5. Relate the impact of sensory changes and impairment to function with the elderly.
      6. Relate and describe signs and symptoms of elder abuse and neglect and the role of the OT practitioner.
      7. Compare and contrast the settings of OT intervention with aging populations.
    2. Analyze and apply occupational therapy intervention techniques and strategies for aging clients and their relationship to occupational performance and wellness/health promotion.
      1. Analyze data gathering and clinical reasoning with planning intervention for occupational performance areas.
      2. Formulate occupational goals and objectives appropriate for aging clients.
      3. Apply clinical reasoning to the intervention planning process and the relationship to functional tasks as it relates to aging clients.
      4. Distinguish and demonstrate instruction methods for aging clients, including those individuals with sensory and cognitive impairments.
      5. Analyze and demonstrate task breakdown for caregiver instruction and follow through for aging clients with cognitive dysfunction.
      6. Analyze and plan environmental modifications to address productive aging, sensory dysfunction and chronic conditions.
      7. Select, analyze and demonstrate appropriate activities to be used for the aging client that addresses context and areas of occupational performance.
      8. Organize and present community education outreach for aging populations.
      9. Discharge planning
    3. Apply basic skill competency with commonly used OT interventions that require consideration with aging clients.
      1. Apply planning and organizing skills to group activities to maximize health promotion and productive aging, engagement and participation with aged populations.
      2. Articulate and apply techniques to enhance community mobility.
        - Public transportation
        - Public access
        - Driver safety and rehabilitation
      3. Apply previous knowledge in the use of feeding techniques, swallowing difficulties, positioning, and the need for referral to other disciplines and the interprofessional team with aging clients.
      4. Apply learned principles and skill in organizing and documenting an interprofessional dining program to enable feeding/eating and training of caregivers in precautions and techniques.
      5. Develop and analyze methods for restraint reduction interventions, restraint free, or restraint reduced environments, and fall prevention.
      6. Relate clinical reasoning in application and integration of preparatory exercise and the relationship to function and wellness with aging clients.
      7. Describe, explain and apply where applicable specialized equipment and supportive medical devices that are utilized in a variety of treatment settings and with the aging population.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Factors that influence occupational performance, wellness and participation in occupational roles with the aging population
      1. Theories of aging
        1. Biological
        2. Social
      2. Aging process
        1. Changes
          1. Integumentary
          2. Neuromusculoskeletal
          3. Cardiopulmonary
          4. Immune
          5. Cognition
          6. Sensory
      3. Trends influencing aging
        1. Demographics
      4. Living arrangements and levels of care
        1. Intergenerational and generational cohorts
        2. Independent
        3. Levels of care
          1. Geropsychiatric unit
          2. Inpatient rehabilitation
          3. Adult foster home
          4. Skilled nursing facility
          5. Assisted living
          6. Home health care
          7. Hospice
          8. Adult day care
      5. Environment
        1. Assessment and interventions for environmental barriers
          1. Variety of living settings
      6. Context and culture
        1. Importance of context, family and social connections
        2. Application to intervention, instruction and therapeutic use of self
      7. Financial
        1. Impact to intervention and aging in place
        2. Limited access to healthcare, wants, needs and assistive devices
      8. Definitions and considerations with elder abuse and neglect
      9. Federal regulations and public policy affecting the aged population
        1. Payment and intervention
        2. Skilled and unskilled therapy
        3. Medicare and related regulations
        4. Minimum data set
        5. Prospective payment system
        6. Advocacy
        7. Keeping up with changes
    2. Aging and chronic conditions
      1. Stages of aging
      2. Developmental tasks
        1. Aging in place versus disengagement
      3. Aging process and sensory changes
        1. Impact to function and independence
        2. Environmental barriers
      4. Physical
        1. Chronic conditions
        2. Incontinence
          1. Assessment
          2. Intervention s and strategies
      5. Psychosocial and psychiatric conditions
        1. Assessment and intervention considerations
        2. Aspects of aging and myths
          1. Disengagement
          2. Isolation
          3. Grieving
          4. Social engagement
        3. Stressors, losses and emotions
        4. Social support
        5. Physical illness
        6. Learned helplessness
        7. Common mental health disorders in the aged population
          1. Depression
          2. Anxiety
          3. Suicide
          4. Dementia
          5. Substance abuse
            1. Alcohol
            2. Self-medication
          6. Aging with psychosis
          7. Mood disorders
      6. Cognitive
        1. Evaluation and assessment
          1. Normal aging process
          2. Dementia/Alzheimer’s
          3. Client context
        2. Interventions and strategies
          1. Environmental
          2. Client context
          3. Cuing
          4. Task breakdown
        3. Caregiver instruction and training
          1. Support
          2. Respite
          3. Resources
      7. Community mobility
        1. Pedestrian safety
        2. Alternative transportation
        3. Safe driving
          1. Evaluation
          2. Intervention
          3. Outcomes
          4. Resources and programs
      8. Sexuality
        1. Values
        2. Myths
        3. Homosexuality
        4. Age related changes
        5. Sexually transmitted diseases
        6. Health condition effects
          1. Cardiopulmonary
          2. Joint replacements
          3. Arthritis
        7. Role of the OTA
          1. Nursing facilities
          2. Education and counseling
    3. Intervention settings
      1. Level of Care
      2. In home
      3. Community care and organizations
      4. Wellness settings
      5. Comparisons
        1. Eden alternative
      6. Interprofessional and team collaboration
      7. Discharge planning
    4. Clinical reasoning and intervention planning
      1. Clinical reasoning application
        1. Models of practice
          1. OT practice frame work
          2. Characteristics of maturity
          3. Cognitive disabilities
          4. Model of human occupation
      2. Role of the OT and OTA
      3. Data gathering methods
        1. Screenings
        2. Assessments
          1. Vitals collect ion and application
          2. Case study application and competency skill
        3. Peer and interprofessional collaboration
      4. Formulating goals
      5. Selection of intervention methods and considerations
        1. Premorbid conditions
        2. Chronicity of conditions
        3. Wellness promotion
        4. Aging in place.
        5. Relationship to functional tasks
      6. Instruction methods for the aged, their families and caregivers
        1. Role of the OTA
        2. Considerations of instruction
          1. Changes in family roles
          2. Family resources
          3. Able and willing caregivers
            1. Caregiver stressors
        3. Effective communications
        4. Task breakdown techniques
        5. Instruction techniques for clients
        6. Instruction techniques for caregivers
    5. Intervention methods and strategies
      1. Concepts of health and wellness in OT practice with aging populations
        1. Prevention and health promotion
        2. Role of the OTA
      2. Selection of activities based on context and functional needs
      3. Environmental modifications
      4. Group application and organization
      5. Abuse and neglect of the aged client
        1. Types
        2. Signs and symptoms
        3. Able and willing caregivers
      6. Wellness promotion
        1. Eden alternative
          1. Principles
          2. Empowering clients and staff
        2. Feeding and eating needs
          1. Swallowing issues
          2. Assistive devices
          3. Interprofessional team and training others
          4. Precautions and contraindications
          5. Role of the OT and OTA
          6. Consult with other disciplines ie, speech, nursing, physicians, radiology
          7. Dining program
            1. Purpose and needs assessments
            2. Elements of programs
            3. Interprofessional team approach
      7. Restraint reduction methods and interventions for restraint free or reduced environments
        1. Omnibus Reconciliation Act
        2. Establishing a restrain reduction program
        3. Role of OT/OTA
        4. Interventions
          1. Environmental adaptations
          2. Psychosocial approaches
          3. Activity alternatives
        5. Communications and interprofessional approaches
      8. Fall prevention
        1. Risk factors
          1. Environmental
          2. Biological
          3. Cognitive and psychosocial
          4. Functional
        2. Evaluation and assessment
        3. Interventions
        4. Outcomes
      9. Exercise and the aged population
        1. Types
          1. Prescribed
          2. Tai chi
          3. Yoga
          4. Pilates
        2. Purpose
        3. Relationship to function
        4. Application to case study and competency skill
    6. The medical intervention environment
      1. Medications and function
        1. Polypharmacy
        2. Aging process
        3. Assessing self-medication
          1. Client factors
          2. Activity demands
        4. Strategies and assistive aids
      2. Specialized medical and supportive equipment
      3. Human patient simulator learning activity
      4. Role of the OT clinician

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2370 - Clinical Transition & Service Management

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2410 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450  

    This course assists the student in the transition from student to clinical practice and comprehending the context of service delivery as a credentialed, entry-level practitioner. Role delineation and professional responsibilities will be emphasized, including service advocacy, application of management principles and ethics, aspects of service provision to individuals, organizations, and communities in the current healthcare environment, evidence-based research and implementation, communications, reimbursement issues, and principles for managing and adapting to change.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2370 are communication, professional accountability and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    Outcome 1: Articulate knowledge of various contexts, including professional, social, cultural, political, economic, and ecological in which occupational therapy services are provided.

    Objectives:

    1. Articulate the contexts of health care, education, community, and social systems as they relate to the practice, management and delivery of occupational therapy services.
    2. Articulate the potential impact of current policy issues and the social, economic, political, geographic, or demographic factors on the practice of occupational therapy.
    3. Articulate the role and responsibility of the practitioner to advocate for changes in service delivery policies, to effect changes in the system, and to recognize opportunities in emerging practice areas.
    4. Articulate the importance of using statistics, tests and measurements for the purpose of delivering evidence based practice.

    Outcome 2: Articulate knowledge of assistance of management responsibilities, and national and state credentialing requirements for delivery of occupational therapy services.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and articulate the impact of contextual factors on the management and delivery of occupational therapy services.
    2. Identify and articulate the systems and structures that create federal and state legislation and regulations and their implications and effects on occupational therapy practice.
    3. Articulate knowledge of applicable national requirements for credentialing and requirements for licensure, certification, or registration under state laws.
    4. Articulate knowledge regarding the various reimbursement systems and documentation requirements that affect the practice of occupational therapy.
    5. Demonstrate application in documentation of ongoing processes for quality improvement and implementing program changes as needed to ensure quality of services.
    6. Articulate the rationale for continuous quality improvement and its importance to occupational therapy services.
    7. Articulate strategies for effective, competency-based legal and ethical supervision of nonprofessional personnel.
    8. Articulate the ongoing professional responsibility/accountability for providing fieldwork education and the criteria for becoming a fieldwork educator.

    Outcome 3: Articulate knowledge of professional ethics, values, and scholarship in the delivery of occupational therapy services and professional accountability.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate knowledge regarding the application of the profession’s Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate and promote the role of the professional through knowledge of and involvement in international, national, state, and local occupational therapy associations and related professional associations.
    3. Demonstrate the promotion of occupational therapy through education of other professionals, service providers, consumers, third-party payers, regulatory bodies, and the public.
    4. Formulate strategies for ongoing professional development to ensure practice is consistent with current and accepted standards and the AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency.
    5. Recognize how to develop management competencies that are consistent with current and acceptable standards.
    6. Articulate core principles of conflict resolution and the application to the occupational therapy workplace.
    7. Articulate strategies for analyzing issues and making decisions to resolve personal and organizational ethical conflicts.
    8. Identify informal and formal systems for resolving ethical disputes that have jurisdiction over occupational therapy services.
    9. Articulate the importance of how scholarly activities and literature contribute to the development of the profession.
    10. Apply skill in effectively locating and understanding information, including the quality of the source of information.
    11. Articulate how scholarly activities can be used to evaluate professional practice, service delivery, and professional issues.
    12. Demonstrate the skills to read and understand a scholarly report and apply to evidence-based practice.
    13. Articulate the role of the OTA in evidence-based research.

    Outcome 4: Articulate knowledge and application of professional responsibilities of clinical management in the delivery of occupational therapy services.

    Objectives:

    1. Articulate professional responsibilities related to liability issues under current models of service provision/strategies.
    2. Articulate personal and professional abilities and competencies as relate to job responsibilities and the AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency.
    3. Articulate the variety of roles of the occupational therapy assistant practitioner, educator, and research assistant.
    4. Articulate and describe the need for supervisory roles, responsibilities, and collaborative professional relationships between the OT and the OTA.
    5. Articulate the professional responsibilities and issues when providing service on a contractual basis.
    6. Articulate strategies to assist consumers in gaining access to occupation therapy services.
    7. Articulate the role of the OTA in care coordination, case management with transition services in both traditional and emerging practice.

    Outcome 5: Determine skills and materials required for transition from graduate to entry-level practitioner.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate skill with career interview skills.
    2. Demonstrate skill with a professional portfolio.
    3. Demonstrate skill with a written resume.
    4. Demonstrate knowledge of NBCOT exam application and process

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction
      1. Healthcare trends and contexts
        1. Understanding the impact of the prevailing healthcare environment and current legislation
          1. Contexts of service delivery
            1. Professional
            2. Social systems
            3. Political
            4. Economic environment
            5. Ecological considerations
          2. Implications for healthcare professions
      2. The context and the impact of delivery of occupation therapy services
        1. Health care
        2. Education
        3. Community
        4. Social systems
        5. Impact of current legislation and reimbursement
    2. Potential impact of the current political climate to the practice and service delivery of occupational therapy
      1. Current policy issues
        1. Systems and structures that create federal and state legislation and regulations
        2. Impact to OT service delivery
      2. Social implications
      3. Economic implications
      4. Geographic considerations
      5. Demographic considerations
      6. Advocating change for changes in service delivery
        1. OT clinician’s role and responsibilities
        2. Effecting change in the system
        3. Recognizing opportunities in emerging areas of practice
    3. Impact of contextual factors on the management and delivery of occupational therapy services
      1. Reimbursement systems
      2. Documentation requirements
        1. Identifying providers and guidelines
      3. The ongoing process of quality improvement
        1. Providing evidence
        2. Scholarly activities and literature contributions
        3. Effectively locating and understanding the information
          1. Quality of the source
        4. Use of scholarly activities to evaluate professional practice, service delivery, and professional issues
        5. Applying the evidence to practice
      4. Implementing changes for quality improvement
        1. Meeting facility and accreditation standards
        2. Roles of the OTA
      5. Legal and ethical supervision
        1. Guidelines for supervision
          1. Competencies
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
          3. Nonprofessional personnel and supervision
      6. Providing fieldwork education
        1. Responsibilities
        2. Criteria required of fieldwork educators
        3. Transitioning students from academics to clinical practice
      7. Management responsibilities
        1. Defining management responsibilities
        2. Role delineation with OTR/OTA
          1. Articulate the need for supervisory roles
          2. Responsibilities
          3. Collaborative relationships
      8. Liability issues in current and changing models of providing service
      9. Providing services on a contractual basis
      10. Prompting and providing evidence-based practice
        1. Research resources
        2. Creating research
        3. Role of the OTA
    4. National and state credentialing requirements
      1. National requirements for credentialing
        1. NBCOT certification exam
        2. Obtaining certification
        3. Maintaining certification
          1. Ongoing professional development
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
      2. State requirements for licensure, certification or registration
        1. State laws
        2. Obtaining licensure in the State of Michigan
        3. Maintaining licensure in the State of Michigan
      3. Ongoing professional development
        1. Staying current and consistent
          1. Relationship of personal and professional abilities/competencies with job responsibilities
          2. AOTA Standards of Continuing Competency
        2. Accepted standards of practice
    5. The application of professional practice elements
      1. Ethics of practice and application to management
        1. The OT Code of Ethics - review
        2. Systems for making decisions regarding personal and organizational ethical conflicts
        3. Jurisdiction over occupational therapy services
          1. Strategies for resolution in the workplace
      2. Involvement in professional organizations
        1. International
        2. National
        3. State
        4. Local
      3. Promoting the profession
        1. Education of:
          1. Other disciplines and interprofessional team members
          2. Service providers
          3. Consumers
          4. Third-party payers
          5. Regulatory bodies
          6. The public
        2. Assisting consumers in gaining access to OT services
    6. Roles of the OTA
      1. Practitioner
      2. Educator
      3. Research assistant
      4. Entrepreneur
      5. Emerging areas of practice
    7. Preparing for seeking positions
      1. Finding the right fit
      2. Interview skills and presenting yourself
      3. Professional portfolios
      4. Resumes
      5. Seeking a position
        1. Technology resource

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2402 - Skills for Occupational Therapy Documentation II

    Credit Hours: 1.50
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2410 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450  

    Building upon the skills and knowledge acquired in OTAS 1401 - Skills for Occupational Therapy Documentation I, this lab-based course instructs the student in further development of competency-based application of documentation principles and skills. Adherence to AOTA guidelines, state licensure law and public health code, third-party reimbursement guidelines, regulations, appeals, confidentiality and the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA), screening and evaluation, intervention plans, long- and short-term goals/objectives, intervention notes, and discontinuation summaries will be applied to actual client intervention sessions. The emphasis of this course focuses on the application of observation, clinical reasoning, and demonstration of skilled competency in documentation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Competent analysis and application of documentation guidelines and formats.
      1. Analyze and demonstrate competency in documentation content.
      2. Apply knowledge of the legal implications of documentation.
      3. Apply knowledge of third-party payer guidelines and state regulations.
      4. Apply knowledge of medical record formats.
      5. Apply knowledge of approved abbreviations and professional terminology.
      6. Apply confidentiality/HIPAA regulations and demonstrate the consequences of breaching the guidelines and principles.
      7. Identify and demonstrate documentation formats into electronic medical records.
      8. Apply knowledge of skilled OT service criteria with documentation of intervention.
    2. A competent basic analysis and application in OT documentation and formats.
      1. Apply observation to OT documentation.
      2. Apply clinical reasoning to OT documentation, utilizing the OT practice framework.
      3. Apply competency in basic interpretation of OT evaluation results to establish functional problem statements with intervention planning, progress notes and discontinuation summaries.
      4. Apply the use of approved abbreviations and accepted and legal professional terminology in documentation.
      5. Apply methods of correcting documentation.
      6. Relate the components of OT evaluations and commonly used assessment tools in documentation.
      7. Relate knowledge in the application of the components of OT intervention plans.
      8. Relate knowledge in the application of the components of long-term goals writing.
      9. Relate knowledge and apply the components of short-term goals or objective writing.
      10. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of SOAP notes writing.
      11. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of narrative notes writing.
      12. Relate knowledge and correctly apply the components of discontinuation summary writing.
      13. Relate knowledge in the analyzing and application of the role of the OT/OTA in OT documentation.
    3. Competent adherence to reimbursement guidelines and regulations for reimbursement of OT services.
      1. Demonstrate correct application in the documentation of skilled OT services, adhering to reimbursement guidelines.
      2. Demonstrate knowledge and competency with the Medicare review process, the appeals and reconsideration process and the implications to OT practice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Review of the Basics
      1. Documentation
        1. Types of documentation and its purpose
      2. Legal document implications
        1. Descriptive vs interpretive statements
        2. Documenting for court
      3. Acceptable way to correct errors in a legal document
      4. Confidentiality with medical records and information
        1. HIPAA
        2. State licensure law and public health code
        3. Facility
        4. Departmental and inter-professional team
      5. Documenting the distinct value of OT intervention
        1. Skilled versus unskilled intervention
    2. Review of OT/OTA Responsibilities
      1. Roles of OT/OTA with documentation
      2. AOTA guidelines regarding documentation for OT/OTA
      3. Requirements and guidelines of third-party payers
      4. Credentials and signatures in documentation
      5. Variety of settings and responsibilities
    3. Analyzing use of Professional Terminology
      1. Professional terminology and accepted abbreviations when completing documentation assignments
      2. Applying the OT practice framework terminology and its distinct application to skilled OT services in documentation
      3. Identifying, formulating and applying occupational therapy problems
        1. Application of the OTPF and correct terminology
    4. Problem Oriented Medical Record (POMR)
      1. SOAP format
      2. Narrative format
      3. Application of clinical reasoning
    5. Application of Activity Analysis and Observation Skills into OT Documentation
      1. Gathering and utilizing client information from the medical record and the OT evaluation to establish functional problem statements, goals and document client performance
      2. Applying observation skills in accurate documentation of performance in objective terms
      3. Applying activity analysis to synthesis intervention and performance data to intervention documentation
      4. Applying clinical reasoning skills to substantiate medical necessity through professional assessment and documentation
      5. Documentation of skilled services versus non-skilled services
        1. Professional assessment
        2. Substantiation of services
        3. Reasonable and medically necessary intervention
    6. Application of Functional OT Goals/Performance Objectives
      1. Application and documentation of functional long and short-term occupational therapy goals
      2. Application and documentation of performance objectives which includes the instructional variable, observable behavior, measurement and proficiency.
    7. Developing, Documenting and Interpreting an Intervention Plan
      1. Documenting intervention plans with focus on function and OTPF
      2. De-emphasizing the methods and modalities
        1. Applying function to the intervention and documentation of the client’s response to intervention
    8. Documentation in Narrative Format
      1. Progress and discharge note using the narrative format
      2. Applying clinical reasoning, client response and professional assessment
    9. Documenting in SOAP Format
      1. Progress and discharge note using the SOAP format
      2. Applying clinical reasoning, client response and professional assessment
    10. Reconsideration and Appeals Process
      1. Denial/appeals process
      2. Implications to reimbursement
      3. Types of appeal letters
    11. Identifying and Applying Required Documentation Content to a Variety of Documentation Formats
    12. Electronic Medical Records and Documentation / Incorporating Documentation Content into the EMR

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2410 - Advanced Physical Rehabilitation Lecture

    Credit Hours: 3.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450 

    This course provides the student with knowledge in the theories, protocols and procedures, and application of intervention for clients referred to physical dysfunction in a variety of occupational therapy settings. The course material emphasizes evaluation and screening, intervention applications, and skill building appropriate for the occupational therapy assistant. The course will examine practice models, frame of reference application, and evidenced‑based approaches for occupational performance and participation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. The application and analysis of occupational therapy process and frame of references for intervention methods for clients with physical dysfunction.
      1. Utilize the occupational therapy process with physical dysfunction clients.
      2. Occupational therapy screening and evaluation, and intervention with physical dysfunction clients.
      3. The use of occupational therapy practice models utilized with physical dysfunction intervention.
      4. The application of frame of references with physical dysfunction intervention.
      5. Evidence-based practice methods relating clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      6. The roles and responsibilities of the OTA and OT.
    2. Analysis and application of occupational therapy screening and evaluation utilized with clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Apply the screening and evaluation process for ADL assessments, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      2. Apply the screening and evaluation process for range of motion assessments, and its application to evidence-based practice.
        1. a. Active range of motion
        2. b. Passive range of motion
        3. c. Functional range of motion
      3. Apply the screening and evaluation process for functional muscle testing, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      4. Apply the screening and evaluation process of muscle tone, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      5. Apply the screening and evaluation process of activity tolerance, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      6. Apply the screening and evaluation process of balance, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      7. Apply the screening and evaluation process of gross and fine motor coordination, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      8. Apply the screening and evaluation process for sensation, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      9. Apply the screening and evaluation process for cognition, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      10. Apply the screening and evaluation process for perception, and its application to evidence-based practice.
      11. Apply the screening and evaluation process of Instrumental Activities of Daily Living (IADL), and its application to evidence-based practice.
      12. Apply the screening and evaluation process for evaluation of work, leisure, and social participation, and its application to evidence-based practice.
    3. Application of occupational therapy intervention utilized with a variety of clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Articulate and apply the purpose and protocols for ADL intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
      2. Articulate and apply the purpose of range of motion intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for range of motion activities.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      3. Articulate and apply the purpose of muscle strengthening interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for muscle strengthening activities.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      4. Articulate and apply the purpose of motor control interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
      5. Articulate and apply the purpose of activity tolerance intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for activity tolerance.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      6. Articulate and apply the purpose of balance interventions and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention for balance.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply and demonstrate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      7. Articulate and apply the purpose of gross and fine motor coordination and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based activities for gross and fine motor coordination.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      8. Articulate and apply the purpose of sensation retraining and compensatory techniques and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based activities for sensation retraining and compensatory techniques.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      9. Articulate and apply the purpose of cognition retraining and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention methods for cognitive retraining.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      10. Articulate and apply the purpose of perception intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate and demonstrate the relationships and differences in preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention methods for perceptual training.
        2. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and expected outcomes of an activity.
        3. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      11. Articulate and apply the purpose of IADL intervention and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Articulate the analysis of a given intervention for grading, application, modification and outcomes of an activity.
        2. Apply knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      12. Articulate and apply the purposes of work, leisure, and social participation and its application to occupational performance and participation.
        1. Analyze a given intervention for grading, application, modification and outcomes of an activity.
        2. Articulate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
    4. Articulating, analyzing, and demonstrating intervention application with a given diagnosis providing evidence and rationale to support selected interventions.
      1. Articulate the analysis of a given intervention for grading, application, modification, and outcomes of an activity.
      2. Articulate knowledge of possible contraindications and precautions of intervention approaches.
      3. Articulate evidence-based practice to support rationale for intervention selection.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Occupational Therapy Process
      1. Evaluation
        1. Occupational profile
        2. Occupational analysis
      2. Intervention
        1. Planning
        2. Implementation
        3. Re-evaluation
      3. Outcomes
    2. Frame of Reference
      1. Model of Human Occupation
      2. Biomechanical
      3. Occupation adaptation
      4. Person-Environment-Occupation Model
      5. Rehabilitation Model
    3. Models of Practice
      1. Biomechanical approach
      2. Sensorimotor approach
      3. Rehabilitation approach
    4. Practice Considerations in Physical Dysfunction and Clinical Application
      1. Vitals
        1. Blood pressure
        2. Pulse
        3. Respiration
        4. Pulse oximetry
      2. Medical complications
      3. Safety issues
      4. Contraindications and medical precautions
      5. Lab values
      6. Intravenous lines
      7. Oxygen use/nasal cannula
      8. Pressure ulcers
      9. Fall risk
      10. Isolation precautions
      11. Seizure
      12. Indwelling catheters
      13. OSHA and health care employees
      14. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
    5. Acute Care
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
    6. Inpatient Rehabilitation (IPR)
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
      5. Functional Independence Measure (FIM)
    7. Sub-acute Rehabilitation
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Discharge planning
      4. Current practice trends
      5.  Minimum data set and resource utilization groups
    8. Outpatient
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Current trends
    9. Home Health Care
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Intervention
      3. Current trends
    10. Methods of Screening and Evaluation, Assessment Tools, and Protocols
      1. ADL
      2. Range of motion
      3. Muscle strength
        1. Functional muscle testing
        2. Manual muscle testing (muscle groups)
      4. Motor control
        1. Neurodevelopmental approach (NDT/Bobath)
        2. Rood approach
        3. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation (PNF)
        4. Constraint-Induced Movement Therapy
        5. Brunnstrom approach
      5. Activity tolerance
      6. Balance
        1. Standing
          1. Static and dynamic
        2. Sitting
          1. Static and dynamic
      7. Coordination
      8. Sensation
      9. Cognition
      10. Perception
      11. IADL
      12. Work
      13. Leisure
      14. Social participation
    11. Delineation and Application of Activities and Interventions Methods
      1. Occupational based activities
      2. Purposeful activities
      3. Preparatory activities
      4. Analysis
      5. Grading
      6. Modification
      7. Outcomes
    12. OT Process and Intervention Application in Clinical Practice
      1. Application to a given client diagnosis
      2. Analysis for gradation, application, modification and expected outcomes
      3. Evidence-based support for selected interventions
      4. Contraindications and precautions with intervention approaches
      5. Discharge planning and outcomes

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2425 - Advanced Physical Rehabilitation-Lab

    Credit Hours: 2.00
    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2410 , and OTAS 2450 

    This course teaches the screening and evaluation protocols and the application of various intervention techniques, methods and skills utilized with individuals referred to a physical dysfunction occupational therapy setting. Emphasis is placed on skill acquisition and demonstration of the occupational therapy process, utilizing the administration of screening and assessment tools, and a variety of interventions, appropriate for the role of the occupational therapy assistant. This course focuses on competency based learning and clinical reasoning.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate acquired competency through:

    1. Clinical reasoning analysis and competent application of occupational therapy screening and assessment tools for the purpose of delivering evidence-based practice.
      1. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of ADL screening and evaluation.
      2. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of screening and evaluation of feeding/eating.
      3. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of functional range of motion screening.
      4. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of range of motion screening and evaluation, utilizing goniometric measurement tools.
      5. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of manual muscle testing and functional muscle testing.
      6. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application of evaluating grip and pinch strength, utilizing pinch gauge and dynamometer as assessment measurement tools.
      7. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of muscle tone.
      8. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of activity tolerance.
      9. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of balance, utilizing a variety of evaluation methods.
      10. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for the screening and evaluation of coordination.
      11. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of sensation.
      12. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of cognition.
      13. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of perception.
      14. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of IADL, and the use of assistive devices and adaptive methods.
      15. Explain the purpose and demonstrate competent application for screening and evaluation of work, leisure, and social participation.
      16. Describe the role of the OT and OTA in occupational therapy screening and evaluation, along with the importance of, and the rationale for supervision and collaborative work with physical dysfunction clients.
    2. Clinical reasoning, analysis and appreciation of skill, planning and safe selection of preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based interventions with adult clients in physical dysfunction settings.
      1. Apply skill in the application of the OT process, frames of reference and clinical reasoning to various interventions.
      2. Apply competent skill, planning, and the selection of diagnostic specific methods for bed positioning and mobility.
      3. Apply competent skill in ADL intervention, including the utilization of assistive devices and adaptive techniques, for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      4. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection for range of motion interventions for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      5. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection for muscle strengthening interventions for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      6. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of muscle re-education techniques for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      7. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of activity tolerance for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      8. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of balance intervention to promote outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      9. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of fine and gross motor coordination for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      10. Apply competent skill, planning, and selection of activities for remediation and compensation of sensory deficits for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      11. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of cognitive retraining and intervention for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      12. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection of perceptual deficits for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      13. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in IADL performance, utilizing assistive devices and adaptive techniques for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      14. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in work performance for outcome results and the promotion of health and wellness.
      15. Apply competent skill, planning, and activity selection in leisure and social participation performance for outcomes and the promotion of health and wellness.
      16. Model the role of the OTA in a collaborative partnership with the OT in physical dysfunction interventions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Occupation Therapy Process
      1. Evaluation
        1. Occupational profile
        2. Occupational analysis
      2. Intervention
        1. Planning
        2. Implementation
        3. Re-evaluation
      3. Outcomes
    2. Application of OT Practice Framework
      1. Areas of occupation
      2. Client factors
      3. Activity demands
      4. Performance skills
      5. Performance patterns
      6. Context
    3. Application of Models of Practice
      1. Biomechanical approach
      2. Sensorimotor approach
      3. Rehabilitative approach
    4. Safety
      1. Environment
      2. Medical complications and precautions
      3. Diagnosis specific considerations
        1. Orthopedic diagnoses
          1. Attention to incision site
          2. Attention to hip precautions
          3. Attention to weight bearing status
          4. Attention to pain tolerance
          5. Attention to braces
        2. Neurological diagnoses
          1. Attention to indwelling catheter
          2. Attention to safety precautions
          3. Attention to pain tolerance
          4. Attention to orthostatic hypotension
          5. Attention to visual neglect/hemianopsia
          6. Attention to cognitive deficits
    5. Screening and Evaluation Methods (Standardized and Non-Standardized)
      1. Activities of daily living (ADL)
      2. Range of motion
      3. Manual muscle testing and functional muscle testing
      4. Motor control
      5. Activity tolerance
      6. Balance
      7. Coordination
      8. Sensation
      9. Cognition
      10. Perception
      11. Instrumental activities of daily living (IADL)
      12. Work
      13. Leisure
      14. Social participation
      15. Re-evaluation utilizing OTA and OT collaboration
      16. Discharge planning applying outcome-based interventions and criteria utilized for appropriate termination of occupational therapy services
    6. Evaluation and Activity Selection in Positioning and Bed Mobility
      1. Positioning techniques to prevent deformities, contractures, and pressure ulcers
      2. Bed mobility and positioning
      3. Application to occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    7. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Activities of Daily Living (ADL) Intervention
      1. ADL adaptive techniques
        1. Application of one-handed dressing techniques
        2. Adaptive self-care techniques interventions
      2. Assistive devices
        1. Dressing
        2. Bathing
        3. Grooming
        4. Feeding
          1. Swallowing problems
          2. Assistive devices, compensatory techniques, facilitation/ inhibition techniques
          3. Precautions and contraindications
          4. Interprofessional/caregiver instruction
          5. Role of OT/OTA
      3. Expected clinical outcomes
    8. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Range of Motion Intervention
      1. Evaluation utilizing a variety of goniometers
      2. Functional screening
      3. Active range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      4. Passive range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      5. Active assist range of motion techniques from bedside, wheelchair, and mat
      6. Self-range of motion techniques from bed, wheelchair, and mat
      7. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      8. Expected clinical outcomes
    9. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Muscle Strengthening Intervention
      1. Use of muscle grades
      2. Grading resistive activities and exercises
      3. Types of exercise
        1. Isotonic
        2. Isometric
      4. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention utilizing interpretation of muscle grade measurement
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    10. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Neuromuscular Re-education Intervention Approaches
      1. Neurodevelopmental approach (NDT)
      2. Rood approach
      3. Proprioceptive neuromuscular facilitation (PNF)
      4. Constraint-induced movement therapy
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    11. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Activity Tolerance Intervention
      1. Screening
      2. Grades of activity tolerance
    12. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Balance Intervention
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Protocols and procedure application of assessment tools
      3. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    13. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Gross and Fine Motor Coordination Intervention
      1. Screening and evaluation
        1. Gross motor
        2. Fine motor
      2. Protocols and procedure application with standardized assessment tools
      3. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      4. Expected clinical outcomes
    14. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Sensory Deficits
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Sensory retraining activities
      3. Compensatory strategies
      4. Application to preparatory, purposeful, and occupation-based intervention
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    15. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Cognitive Deficits
      1. Retraining techniques
      2. Compensatory strategies
      3. Expected clinical outcomes
    16. Evaluation and Activity Selection for Perceptual Deficits
      1. Visual acuity
      2. Visual conditions
      3. Retraining techniques
      4. Compensatory strategies
      5. Expected clinical outcomes
    17. Evaluation and Activity Selection for IADL Interventions
      1. Screening and evaluation
      2. Interventions utilizing assistive devices and adaptive techniques
      3. Expected clinical outcomes

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088
  
  • OTAS 2450 - Level 1 Fieldwork-Second Placement

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 1300 , OTAS 1351 , OTAS 1361 , OTAS 1370 , OTAS 1401 , OTAS 1420 , and OTAS 1450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , and OTAS 2402 

    (formerly OTAS 2420)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience to give the beginning level 1 student an opportunity for continued practice of basic occupational therapy interventions under the guidance of a qualified fieldwork educator.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Curricular Threads: The OTA program curriculum is driven by the emphasis of a growing intensity of objective and outcomes for student success. The curriculum threads or themes are interwoven throughout the occupational therapy assistant program education. Each course syllabus identifies for the student those threads emphasized in a particular course. The threads emphasized in OTAS 2450 are communication, clinical reasoning, professional accountability and best practice methods.

    Outcomes and Objectives: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to:

    1. Demonstrate beginning ability to integrate academic learning with clinical practice and its relationship to occupational performance.
    2. Demonstrate ability to gather an occupational profile through a client-centered approach including medical chart review, interviews and clinical observation of performance.
    3. Demonstrate beginning ability to interpret information gathered via observation of the client’s occupational performance to formulate appropriate occupational therapy treatment interventions.
    4. Demonstrate implementation of intervention treatment techniques utilizing occupation-based activities learned in class, or those used at the fieldwork site, under the supervision of the fieldwork educator and in collaboration with the client, caregiver and family
    5. Document the client’s performance utilizing the occupational therapy practice framework.
    6. Demonstrate awareness and intervention of safety issues throughout the client’s occupational performance.
    7. Demonstrate knowledge of roles and functions of other related team members working with clients.
    8. Demonstrate effective beginning intervention through written, oral/non-verbal communication with clients, families, peers, supervision and other health providers in a professional manner.
    9. Demonstrate beginning skills of collaboration with occupation therapist and other interprofessional team members.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction
      1. Course sequence, requirements, expectations of student performance and competencies.
    2. Didactic Portion
      1. Universal Precautions
        1. Follow universal precautions while engaged in patient care
          1. Hand washing techniques
          2. Air-borne and blood-borne pathogens
        2. Hepatitis B vaccinations or waiver
      2. Observation Techniques
        1. Behavioral vs. interpretive
        2. Documentation techniques
        3. Communication skills
          1. Utilize observation and communication skills while engaging the client in occupation-based interventions
      3. Professionalism
        1. Dress code
        2. Responding to constructive criticism
        3. AOTA Code of Ethics
    3. Fieldwork Portion
      1. Observation: Refers to the act of seeing, but more importantly, seeing with attention to specific elements and details so that it becomes possible to make tentative statements about what has been seen. Students will receive some guidance as to what is to be observed.
      2. Participation: Implies a shared involvement in occupation-based interventions. The student must take responsibility for their learning, including professional accountability and communication.
      3. Affective domain: Evaluation of the student in the affective domain is aimed at objectively assessing those personal traits and attitudes which are viewed as essential to the growth and development of the student, not only as a practitioner but as a well-integrated person. Traits and attitudes to be considered will include:
        1. General appearance: appropriate attire each day, appropriate footwear, presents self appropriately.
        2. Dependability: attends clinicals, arrives on time, carries out assignment, follows direction accurately, accepts responsibility within capabilities.
        3. Ability to accept supervision: accepts feedback objectively, profits from suggestions, can engage on collaborative relationships, not passive-dependent, accepts guidance and feedback.
        4. Attitude: positive, realistic, willingness to accept new and different ideas.
        5. Initiative: seeks out information, assumes responsibility for learning, does not need prodding, can assume responsibility for tasks within capacity, follows through on own where appropriate.
        6. Interpersonal relationship: comfortable with client and staff, able to initiate conversation with client, viewed positively by others, adjusts to situations.
        7. Ability to communicate: expresses self clearly both orally and in writing, spells correctly, uses terminology appropriately, speaks with assurance.

    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2580 - Level 2 Fieldwork-First Placement

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program; OTAS 2095 , OTAS 2350 , OTAS 2370 , OTAS 2402 , OTAS 2410 , OTAS 2425 , and OTAS 2450  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: OTAS 2590 

    (formerly OTAS 2480)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience for the advanced student who will apply therapeutic techniques and practice competent entry‑level clinical applications under the supervision of a qualified clinician.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Fundamental of Practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice in adherence to the Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice in adherence of safety regulations and use of sound judgment in regard to safety of others.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Basic Tenets of Occupational Therapy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the value and beliefs of occupational therapy.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the roles of occupational therapy personnel.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice in the use of informed decisions based on relevant resources.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Evaluation and Screening.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to collect data.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to administer assessments.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to interpret assessments.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to report assessment findings accurately.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to establish intervention goals.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Treatment Interventions.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to plan interventions.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to select and sequence relevant interventions.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to implement occupation-based interventions effectively.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to analyze and grade treatment interventions.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of therapeutic use of self to facilitate intervention goals.
    6. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to modify intervention plan as indicated by the client.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Communication Skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective verbal and nonverbal communications.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective written communications.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Professional Behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of self-responsibility in attaining professional competence.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of positive response to constructive feedback.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of consistent work behavior including, initiative, preparedness, dependability, cooperation, flexibility, tact, empathy, time management and work site maintenance.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of respect for cultural diversity factors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Refer AOTA Evaluation Form & to site-specific objectives.

    Student will focus on all stages of the OT process in collaboration with the supervising OTR or COTA. Focus of this experience will vary, depending on the location of the fieldwork experience. Application of OT theory, treatment approaches, frames of reference, documentation skills and communication skills will be covered.


    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • OTAS 2590 - Level 2 Fieldwork-Second Placement

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Occupational Therapy Assistant Program

    Corequisites: OTAS 2580 

    (formerly OTAS 2490)

    This course provides supervised clinical experience for the advanced student to continue to apply therapeutic techniques and practice competent entry‑level clinical applications under the supervision of a qualified clinician.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Fundamental of Practice.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate adherence to the Code of Ethics.
    2. Demonstrate adherence of safety regulations and use of sound judgment in regard to safety of others.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in the Basic Tenets of Occupational Therapy.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the value and beliefs of occupational therapy.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of clear communications of the roles of occupational therapy personnel.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice in the use of informed decisions based on relevant resources.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Evaluation and Screening.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to collect data.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to administer assessments.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to interpret assessments.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to report assessment findings accurately.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to establish intervention goals.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Treatment Interventions.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to plan interventions.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to select and sequence relevant interventions.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to implement occupation-based interventions effectively.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to analyze and grade treatment interventions.
    5. Demonstrate ongoing practice of therapeutic use of self to facilitate intervention goals.
    6. Demonstrate ongoing practice of the ability to modify intervention plan as indicated by the client.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Communication Skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective verbal and nonverbal communications.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of effective written communications.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify all essential functions expected of an entry-level OTA in Professional Behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate ongoing practice of self-responsibility in attaining professional competence.
    2. Demonstrate ongoing practice of positive response to constructive feedback.
    3. Demonstrate ongoing practice of consistent work behavior including initiative, preparedness, dependability, cooperation, flexibility, tact, empathy, time management and work site maintenance.
    4. Demonstrate ongoing practice of respect for cultural diversity factors.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Refer to AOTA Fieldwork Evaluation Form & site-specific objectives.

    Student will focus on all stages of the OT process in collaboration with the supervising OT or OTA. Focus of this experience will vary, depending on the location of the fieldwork experience. Application of OT theory, treatment approaches, frames of reference, documentation skills and communication skills will be covered.


    Primary Faculty
    Seefried, Mariea
    Secondary Faculty
    Wysocki, Pennie
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Philosophy

  
  • PHIL 2010 - Introduction to Philosophy

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Designed to show the relevance of philosophical problems to the student himself. The student is challenged to develop a consistent response to such problems as: free will versus determinism, the limits of knowledge, the basis of good and evil, personal conscience versus legal obligation, etc. Traditional and modern philosophers are read for discussion and critical evaluation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify various philosophical positions.
    2. Identify various philosophical problems
    3. Identify various philosophical arguments.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate a facility with the vocabulary of philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of philosophy.
    2. Define the vocabulary of philosophy.
    3. Apply the vocabulary of philosophy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to philosophy.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify premises inherent in philosophical arguments.
    2. Identify the assumptions inherent in philosophical arguments.
    3. Analyze the implications of philosophical arguments.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. An introduction to various philosophies
    2. An examination of various philosophical arguments and terms
    3. An examination of some major philosophers
    4. An investigation of some major areas of philosophy, e.g. metaphysics and epistemology

    Primary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Secondary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHIL 2100 - Introduction to Ethics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    A critical examination of the foundation of various ethical systems. Specific ethical problems are posed especially those which relate to the student’s situation and possible solutions are discussed. Students will be challenged to define and defend their ethical position against alternative systems.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify various ethical positions.
    2. Identify various ethical problems.
    3. Identify various ethical arguments.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a facility with the vocabulary of ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of ethics.
    2. Define the vocabulary of ethics.
    3. Apply the vocabulary of ethics.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply critical thinking skills to ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify premises inherent in ethical arguments/theories.
    2. Identify the assumptions inherent in ethical arguments/theories.
    3. Analyze the implications of ethical arguments/theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. An introduction to various ethical theories
    2. An examination of various ethical arguments and terms
    3. An examination of some major ethical thinkers
    4. An investigation of some contemporary ethical issues

    Primary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Secondary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHIL 2120 - Professional Ethics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ENGL 1220  or ENGL 1190  or transfer equivalency

    PHIL 2120 examines some of the significant moral concepts and issues that arise in professional environments. Topics include significant moral theories, professional codes of conduct, paternalism and informed consent, privacy and confidentiality, discrimination, loyalty, whistle‑blowing, individual standards, and corporate social responsibility. This course is designed for students planning to pursue advanced professional degrees. It is not recommended for students in the allied health professions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the elements of a professional code of ethics.

    Objectives:

    1. Define the concept of a profession.
    2. Identify a code of ethics specific for a specific profession.
    3. Articulate the details of the actions prescribed and prohibited by this particular code.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to articulate the tenets of various moral theories.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the main historical ethical theories.
    2. Define the terms specific to each theory.
    3. State some strengths and weaknesses of each theory.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify a professional moral issue, analyze its complex components, and offer a reasoned solution.

    Objectives:

    1. Clarify the difference between professional moral issues and moral or immoral actions.
    2. Articulate a precise moral issue.
    3. Detail the specific components of the issue.
    4. Identify the professional code of ethics that pertains to the issue.
    5. Suggest a solution to the issue in accord with the appropriate code of ethics.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss various moral problems faced by professionals.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss specific issues raised in readings.
    2. Identify the complexity of an issue related to specific cultural beliefs or practices as noted in the readings.
    3. Offer an analysis of the issue and the solutions prescribed in the reading.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction: Syllabus and Course Overview
      What is a Professional?
      The Role of a Professional
      Private and Corporate Codes of Behavior
    2. Major Ethical Theories
      Virtue (Plato, Aristotle)
      Deontological (Kant)
    3. Major Ethical Theories
      Utilitarian (Bentham and Mill), Communitarian (Habermas)
      Moral Sense (Hume, Smith)
    4. Major Ethical Theories
      Existentialist (Nietzsche)
      Key Terminology
      Agency and Paternalism
      Reflective Equilibrium
    5. Codes of Ethics
      Professional Conduct
      Ideal Codes and Actual Behaviors
    6. Codes of Ethics
      How to Define Ethical Issues
      Issue/Action Delineation
    7. Professional/Client Relationship
      Privacy and Confidentiality
      Autonomy
    8. Professional/Client Relationship
      Deceptive Advertising
      Informed Consent and Information Sharing
    9. Professional Responsibility
      Corporate Moral Agency
      Collective Responsibility
    10. Professional Responsibility
      Social Responsibility
      Bribery/International Operations
    11. Professional Responsibility
      Loyalty
      Dissent/Whistle Blowing
    12. Professional Responsibility
      Distributive Justice
      Compensatory Justice
    13. Regulation, Training, and Behavior
      Due Diligence
      Sexual Harassment
    14. Issues of Difference
      International Considerations
      Recognition of, and Respect for, Diverse Social/Religious Customs
    15. Moral Creativity
      Formulating Solutions
      Effective Leadership
      Avoiding Disasters
    16. What is a Professional? - Revisited
      Success-What is it? Can it be Measured?

    Primary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Secondary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHIL 2200 - Introduction to Logic

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An introduction to methods of distinguishing good reasoning from bad reasoning. Modern deductive logic is used to test the validity of arguments and to construct formal proofs. Some time may be devoted to classical Aristotelian logic and informal fallacies.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of logic.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify different types of logical reasoning.
    2. Identify various logical rules for arguments.
    3. Identify various logical principles.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of informal fallacies.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize various informal fallacies.
    2. Define various informal fallacies.
    3. Explain various informal fallacies.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a facility with the vocabulary of logic.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of logic
    2. Define the vocabulary of logic
    3. Apply the vocabulary of logic

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Each section will include:

    1. An introduction to basic modes of logical reasoning, e.g. deductive and inductive
    2. An examination of fallacies (formal and/or informal).
    3. An examination of Aristotelian and/or propositional logic.

    Primary Faculty
    Graham, Robert
    Secondary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHIL 2400 - Philosophy of Religion

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly PHIL 2911)

    This course surveys a number of philosophical perspectives in regard to the relationship between faith and reason. Topics include the various proofs for God’s existence and objections to them, the origin of religious beliefs, the tenets of atheism, mysticism, the notion of evil, the concept of free will, the role of religion in society, and the relationship between faith and meaning.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the subject matter of philosophy of religion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify various philosophical positions in regard to the faith/reason debate.
    2. Identify various philosophical problems which arise in this debate.
    3. Identify various philosophical arguments proffered in this debate.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the vocabulary specific to the philosophy of religion.

    Objectives:

    1. Recognize the vocabulary of philosophy of religion.
    2. Define the vocabulary of philosophy of religion.
    3. Apply the vocabulary of philosophy of religion.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of certain topics central to Philosophy of Religion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the arguments for God’s existence and the objections to them.
    2. Identify the some of the claims thinkers have made regarding the origin of religion.
    3. Identify the implications of philosophical these arguments and claims.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Each section will include:

    1. An explanation and analysis of the proofs for God’s existence.
    2. An examination of the faith/reason debate.
    3. An examination of the claims about the origins of religious beliefs.
    4. An investigation of some of the other major ideas in the area of philosophy of religion, such as free will, mysticism, and the problem of evil.

    Primary Faculty
    Catalano-Reinhardt, Theresa
    Secondary Faculty
    Morosoff, Dorothy
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Physical Science

  
  • PHSA 1050 - Physical Science

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    No credit after NSC 118 or PHS 101. An overview of the physical sciences, to illustrate the underlying physical concepts of modern technological society. These concepts are investigated through selected laboratory experiences and classroom work designed to improve a general understanding of the physical sciences.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Course Outcome:

    Apply the scientific process to a variety of physical situations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the laws, models, or theories that are applicable.
    2. Describe the physical laws, models, and theories.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models and theories.
    4. Assess the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop research questions.
    6. Develop appropriate physical hypotheses.
    7. Identify dependent, independent, and constant variables.
    8. Test valid hypotheses.
    9. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of physical hypotheses.
    10. Question observations.
    11. Follow/Apply written lab instructions.
    12. Peer Review Process.

    Course Outcome:

    Be familiar with scientific usage of specialized, scientific vocabulary.

    Objectives:

    1. Define terminology.
    2. Recall terminology.
    3. Employ terminology.

    Course Outcome:

    Explore preconceptions concerning physical interactions, and develop conceptual changes to reflect basic physics concepts relating to the physical sciences.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between intuitive expectations and established scientific principles through classroom discussion and laboratory exercises.
    2. Through lab experiments students will compare experimental results with preconceived notions.

    Course Outcome:

    Using the scientific method, take accurate data, organize and analyze experimental data

    Objectives:

    1. Collect data through experimentation and observation.
    2. Utilize various measuring instruments to collect data.
    3. Analyze (using mathematics) and interpret data to arrive at a conclusion.
    4. Reproduce results that are commonly accepted.
    5. Based upon current theoretical models make predictions about experimental outcomes.
    6. Compare experimental conclusions to theoretical predictions.
    7. Organize results and conclusions to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Course Outcome:

    Gain a historical perspective of the development of science and scientific laws relating to the sciences.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the historical laws, models, and theories.
    2. Describe the historical laws, models, and theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course Content

    1. Introduction to the Use of Computers
      1. Graphing
      2. Current Macomb Community College LMS
      3. Other (Simulations, videos, google searches, etc…)
    2. Measurement
      1. Terminology: Measurement, density, deci, centi, milli, kilo, gram, liter, meter, time, average, error, percent error, meniscus, volume, mass, temperature, metric system
      2. Measurement Rule
      3. Unit conversions (metric to English and vice versa)
      4. Measure mass, volume, weight, temperature, time, length, etc… . using various instruments
      5. Calculate derived quantities
      6. Calculate average, error, and percent error.
    3. Experimental Models
      1. Terminology: Observation, law, hypothesis, theory, scientific method, research question, independent variable, dependent variable, constants, period, mass, amplitude, vibration, oscillation, pendulum, prediction
      2. Pendulum
      3. Graphing and analysis
    4. The Structure Of Matter
      1. Terminology: Acid, atomic number, atomic weight, atoms, base, compounds, covalent bond, dissociation, electrolyte, electrons, elements, gas, groups, heterogeneous, homogeneous, indicator, inorganic, ion, ionic bond, isotopes, liquid, litmus, matter, mixtures, molecules, neutrons, non-pure substance, organic, period, phenolphthalein, pHydrion, protons, pure substance, shells or orbits, solid
      2. Atomic Theory
      3. Periodic Table
      4. Covalent and ionic bonds
      5. Elements and molecules
      6. States of Matter
      7. Properties of metals and non-metals
      8. Law of Definite Proportions
      9. Acids and Bases
      10. Graphing and Analysis
    5. Motion
      1. Terminology: Speed, velocity, acceleration, mass, constant, acceleration, time, linear motion, momentum, impact, inertia, kinetic energy, impulse
      2. Speed
      3. Acceleration
      4. Momentum
      5. Kinetic Energy
      6. Graphing and Analysis
    6. Forces and Simple Machines
      1. Terminology: Actual Mechanical Advantage, Effort, Ideal Mechanical Advantage, lever, inclined plane, pulley, wedge, screw, wheel and axle, resistance, effort, fulcrum, Ideal Effort, Actual Effort, Newton’s Laws of Motion, Force, Newton, weight
      2. Forces
      3. Newton’s Three Laws of Motion
      4. Simple Machines
      5. Mechanical Advantage
      6. Graphing and Analysis
    7. Energy
      1. Terminology: Acceleration, chemical, electrical, energy, energy conversion, force, heat, horsepower, joule, kinetic energy, light, mechanical, nuclear, potential energy, power, sound, speed, watt, work
      2. Forms of Energy
      3. Energy Conversions
      4. Work - Energy Theorem
      5. Conservation of Energy
      6. Work for Simple Machines
      7. Power
      8. Graphing and Analysis
    8. Heat
      1. Terminology: Calorimeter, specific heat capacity, temperature, mass, heat, calorie, equilibrium, Conservation of Energy, Kelvin, Fahrenheit, thermal expansion, thermal transfer, conduction, convection, radiation
      2. Temperature and Kinetic Energy
      3. Temperature Scales and Absolute Zero
      4. Calorimetry
      5. Conservation of energy
      6. Graphing and Analysis
    9. Sound
      1. Terminology: Sound, longitudinal waves, vibration, amplitude, wavelength, period, frequency, loudness, intensity, wave form, wavelength, tone, decibel, resonance, interference, Doppler effect, pitch, beats
      2. Sound Models
      3. Inverse Square Law
      4. Temperature dependence of speed of sound
      5. Frequency, Wavelength, Amplitude, speed
      6. Reflecting surfaces
      7. Graphing and analysis
    10. Electricity
      1. Terminology: Ohm, ampere, volt, direct current, fuse, alternating current, static electricity, nonconductors, insulators, conductors, current electricity
      2. Electrostatics
      3. Parallel and series circuits
      4. Ohm’s Law
      5. Power
      6. Analysis
    11. Magnetism
      1. Terminology: Magnet, magnetism, insulators, conductors, commutator, magnetic field, north pole, south pole, ferromagnetic, dipoles, domains, magnetic field, magnetic declination, inverse square law, electromagnet, generator, armature, hertz, frequency
      2. Magnetic and Non Magnetic materials
      3. Motors and Generators
      4. Magnetic Fields
      5. Inverse Square Law (special case)
      6. Graphing and Analysis
    12. Light
      1. Terminology: Radiant energy, electromagnetic waves, electromagnetic radiation, light, optical medium, refraction, transparent, translucent, opaque, convex lens, principal focus, concave lens, focal lengths, reflection, diffusion.
      2. Electromagnetic spectrum
      3. Law of Reflection
      4. Laws of Refraction
      5. Inverse Square Law
      6. Graphing and Analysis
    13. Color
      1. Terminology: color addition, color subtraction, complementary colors, constructive and destructive interference, cyan, diffraction grating, light, magenta, primary colors of light, prism, secondary colors of light, spectroscope, spectrum
      2. Spectrums
      3. Color Addition
      4. Color Subtraction
      5. Analysis

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Physical Therapist Assistant

  
  • PTAS 1020 - Physical Therapy Procedures 1-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; BIOL 2710  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: HHSC 1020  and PTAS 1031  

    PTAS 1020 introduces the fundamentals of patient care as applied to physical therapy. The course teaches the principles of patient management and the formation of a strong foundation for clinical decision‑making skills based on physiological principles and introduces the use of selected modalities, gait training, transfers, and body mechanics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Fall Semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the patient management process and the PT/PTA scope of practice.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe models of disablement as an approach to patient management.
    2. Describe steps of the patient management process.
    3. Discuss treatment implementation as it relates to short term goals and functional outcomes.
    4. Discuss the roles of the PT and PTA in patient management.
    5. Discuss the history of medical documentation.
    6. Describe various methods of documentation common to Physical Therapy.
    7. Compare and contrast selected documentation methods.
    8. Identify and describe components of an initial evaluation including plan of care.
    9. Identify and describe components of a SOAP note.
    10. Discuss the Health Care Insurance Portability Act and its implications for the PTA.
    11. Describe the role of data collection in the progression of treatment within the plan of care.
    12. Identify and describe data collection and intervention activities that are outside of the scope of practice for PTA.
    13. Describe values based behaviors for PTA in the provision of care under the supervision of the physical therapist
    14. Briefly describe the relationship between provision of care and third-party reimbursement

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of universal precautions, isolation techniques, and sterile technique in physical therapy settings.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the history of related procedures in health care.
    2. List situations in which sterilization is required.
    3. Describe methods of sterilization.
    4. Describe sterile technique.
    5. Compare and contrast medical asepsis and surgical asepsis.
    6. Describe the role of hand washing in physical therapy.
    7. Describe types of patient isolation relating each to common patient diagnoses.
    8. Define universal precautions.
    9. Describe procedures related to universal precautions in patient care settings including the use of protective equipment.
    10. Describe procedures used by PTAs in isolation settings.
    11. Discuss the role of health care workers in the transmission of antibiotic‐ resistant infections, HIV, hepatitis, and tuberculosis.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of body mechanics in physical therapy settings to conserve energy, reduce fatigue, reduce incidence of injury, promote safety and wellness.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe basic anatomy related to body mechanics.
    2. Describe principles of body mechanics related to given activities including lifting, pushing, pulling, and reaching.
    3. Understand the relationship between body mechanics and safety for patients and clinicians.
    4. Discuss methods of teaching related to body mechanics that may be effective for patients, families, and other members of the health care team.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss vital signs as indicators of patient condition and the role of the PTA in measuring vital signs.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define pulse, respiration, blood pressure, and pulse oximetry.
    2. State normal ranges for pulse respiration, blood pressure, temperature and PO2.
    3. Identify common measurement techniques for vital signs.
    4. Describe peripheral pulses and their significance in patient health.
    5. Recognize abnormal and normal variations in vital signs and common causations.
    6. Discuss the importance of measuring vital signs and using data to assess a patient’s response to treatment.
    7. Recognize when vital signs may be related to emergencies and describe appropriate PTA response.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss techniques related to basic patient care including mobility and transfers.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe methods used to transfer and position patients including: assisted stand pivot, dependent stand pivot, two man lift, pneumatic lift, and sliding board.
    2. Compare and contrast methods of transfer and relate attributes to selected patients.
    3. Identify common hazards in transfers and safety precautions necessary to avoid hazards.
    4. List and define descriptions of functional ability related to transfers and methods of documenting functional ability in transfers.
    5. Describe necessary patient and environmental preparation necessary to perform safe and efficient transfers.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss theories of pain.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify nervous system structures related to pain perception.
    2. Describe pathways related to pain perception.
    3. Describe theories related to pain perception and modulation and the role of PT in managing pain.
    4. Compare and contrast acute, chronic, and referred pain.
    5. Describe the pain/spasm cycle and the role of physical agents in its interruption.
    6. Describe methods used to collect data related to pain.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of physical agents in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List thermal and athermal agents.
    2. Discuss the physiological effects of heat and cold.
    3. Discuss the potential patient response to treatment with thermal agents.
    4. Compare and contrast the physiological effects of heat and cold.
    5. Describe physical mechanisms of heat exchange.
    6. Discuss the role of the PTA in clinical decision making related to thermal agents.
    7. Discuss the modification of treatment with physical agents in relationship to the physiological response of the patient.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of superficial heating and of cryotherapy modalities in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List superficial heating modalities.
    2. List cryotherapy agents.
    3. Describe the attributes of hot packs, paraffin, fluidotherapy, and light and relate these to common conditions.
    4. Describe the attributes of ice massage, cold packs, and cold baths and relate these to common conditions.
    5. Discuss indications and contraindications for the use of superficial heat and cryotherapy.
    6. Describe the use of superficial heat and cryotherapy in combination with other treatment approaches.
    7. Describe the role of the PTA in applying superficial heat and cryotherapy interventions.
    8. Discuss safety precautions in the use of superficial heating and cryotherapy modalities.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of short wave diathermy in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List the effects of short wave diathermy (SWD).
    2. Describe electrical field and magnetic field methods of application of SWD.
    3. Identify tissues most likely to be impacted by SWD.
    4. Describe safety reactions necessary for SWD and indications and contraindications for use.
    5. Describe limitations of use in common practice.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of therapeutic ultrasound in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the physical principles of ultrasound.
    2. Discuss the theory and rationale for the application of ultrasound in the management of selected conditions.
    3. Discuss thermal vs. non‐thermal ultrasound.
    4. Describe the clinical applications of ultrasound and parameters of treatment related to clinical decision making.
    5. Discuss safety precautions for the use of ultrasound including indications and contraindications.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the role of physical therapy and the PTA in wound care.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the stages of wounds.
    2. Recognize the characteristics of viable skin tissue.
    3. Discuss common causes and appearance of non‐healing wounds.
    4. Relate principles of deconditioning, mobility, and patient care to wound prevention and management.
    5. Identify common wound care products.
    6. Describe methods of wound management including debridement, pulsatile lavage, and the selection of wound care products.
    7. Describe the role of the PTA in application, removal, and disposal of dressings.
    8. Describe the team approach to wound management and the role of PT and the PTA.

    Outcome 12: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of hydrotherapy in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the physical principles of water.
    2. Discuss the therapeutic benefits of hydrotherapy.
    3. Discuss the methods of application and equipment used to provide hydrotherapy.
    4. Discuss the role of hydrotherapy in wound management.
    5. Discuss the indications and contraindications for hydrotherapy including potential for infection.
    6. Discuss safety concerns unique to hydrotherapy.

    Outcome 13: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the use of therapeutic massage in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define therapeutic vs. recreational massage.
    2. Describe the physiological effects of massage.
    3. Describe type of massage and massage strokes commonly used in PT.
    4. Discuss the rationale for selection of massage strokes.
    5. Discuss special considerations for the use of massage including draping, therapeutic environment, lubricants.
    6. Identify indications and contraindications to the use of massage.

    Outcome 14: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe edema management and the use of external compression in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe common causes of local edema and of lymph system failure.
    2. Describe the components of complete decongestive physical therapy.
    3. Describe the indications and contraindications for use of external compression.
    4. Relate the uses of a compression pump to pathological conditions.
    5. Discuss the safety considerations for the use of external compression.
    6. Describe the equipment used for external compression.
    7. Describe the monitoring of edema by girth and volumetric measurements.

    Outcome 15: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the principle of gait and gait training in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Name and describe the phases of normal gait.
    2. List and define common weight bearing status indications.
    3. Describe the role of assistive devices in a gait training program.
    4. Describe common pre‐gait activities used in physical therapy.
    5. Describe various assistive devices and compare and contrast their attributes.
    6. Identify information necessary to select an appropriate assistive device.
    7. Describe safety precautions necessary for gait training.
    8. Describe the role of PTA in gait training.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Clinical Decision Making
      1. Patient management model and clinical decision making
      2. Collection of subjective and objective data
      3. Identification of impairments and functional limitations
      4. Long and short term goal setting
      5. Treatment implementation
      6. Reassessment and functional outcomes
      7. Discharge planning and the PTA
      8. Identify and describe data collection and interventions that are beyond the scope of practice for the PTA
    2. Principles of Body Mechanics
      1. Basic spinal anatomy
      2. Gravity and body stability
      3. Basic principles of levers
      4. Friction
    3. Vital Signs
      1. Introduction to vital signs
      2. Body temperature
      3. Pulse
      4. Pulse
      5. Respiration
      6. Documentation
      7. Emergency care: Responding to emergency situations
    4. Documentation
      1. SOAP notes
      2. Electronic Medical Records
      3. Documentation for skill and necessity
      4. Documentation as it relates to reimbursement
      5. Role of documentation in quality improvement activities
    5. Transfer and Moving Techniques
      1. Principle of transfers and moving techniques
      2. Functional assessment grading scale
      3. Body mechanics
      4. Types of transfers
    6. Gait and Ambulation
      1. Assessment prior to gait training
      2. Selection of assistive device
      3. Progression of gait training program
        1. Preparation for standing ‐ preambulation mat program
        2. Parallel bars progression
        3. Assistive device progression
        4. Level surfaces to unlevel surfaces
        5. Stair climbing
    7. Massage
      1. Principles of massage
      2. Types of techniques
        1. Effleurage
        2. Pétrissage
        3. Friction
        4. Tapotement
      3. Physiological response
      4. Indications and contraindications
    8. Pain Management
      1. Classification of sensory system
      2. Transmission of sensory signals
        1. Non‐noxious
        2. Noxious
      3. Theories of pain modulation
        1. Gate theory
        2. Central pain modulation
      4. Types of pain and characteristics
        1. Acute
        2. Chronic
        3. Referred
      5. Assessment of pain
      6. Pain ‐ spasm cycle
      7. Role of thermal agents in the management of pain and inflammation
    9. Cryotherapy
      1. Cold agents
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Physical principles
        1. Conduction
        2. Evaporation
      4. Physiological effects
        1. Hemodynamic
        2. Tissue temperature
        3. Cellular ‐ edema and inflammation
        4. Neuromotor ‐ peripheral nerves and muscle
    10. Superficial Heat Agents
      1. General principles of heat
      2. Superficial versus deep heat agent
      3. Physiological principles
      4. Mild versus vigorous heating
      5. Indications and contraindications
      6. Clinical decision making
    11. Hydrotherapy
      1. Physical properties
      2. Mode of heat transfer
      3. Precautions
      4. Physiological effects
      5. Mechanical effects
      6. Indications and contraindications
      7. Wound care and hydrotherapy
        1. Debridement
        2. Pulsatile lavage
        3. Selection of wound care products
    12. Surgical Asepsis and Isolation Techniques
      1. Asepsis ‐ medical and surgical
      2. Isolation categories
        1. Strict isolation
        2. Contact isolation
        3. Respiratory isolation
        4. Reverse isolation ‐ protective measures
      3. Universal blood and body fluid precautions
        1. History of CDC recommendation
        2. Role in physical therapy
      4. Sterile technique
    13. Therapeutic Ultrasound
      1. Superficial versus deep heat
      2. Physical principles
      3. Pulsed versus continuous ultrasound
      4. Intensity and dosage
      5. Generation of ultrasound
      6. Biophysical effects
        1. Thermal
        2. Non‐thermal
      7. Indications, contraindications, and precautions
      8. Phonophoresis
      9. Role of PTA
    14. Diathermy
      1. Types of diathermy
        1. Shortwave/pulsed electromagnetic energy
      2. Induction and capacitance applications of SWD
      3. Biophysical effects
      4. Physiological effects
      5. Indications, precautions, and contraindications
    15. Edema Management and External Compression
      1. General principles of the use of external compression
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Complete decongestive physical therapy
      4. Techniques of application
        1. Compression appliance
          1. Upper extremity
          2. Lower extremity
        2. Bandaging techniques
      5. Patient application
        1. Problems and precautions related to patient compliance

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1031 - Physical Therapy Procedures 1-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; BIOL 2710  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: HHSC 1020  and PTAS 1070  

    (formerly PTAS 1030)

    PTAS 1031 provides the PTA student with practical experiences in the fundamentals of patient care and selected interventions. It focuses on the development of psychomotor and decision‑making skills associated with the application of physical therapy skills and techniques.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate appropriate patient preparation and handling.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate effective draping and positioning technique for comfort and integument protection.
    2. Demonstrate the ability to identify indicated interventions in the established plan of care.
    3. Demonstrate safe patient transport including the management of special equipment.
    4. Demonstrate use of the patient record to assist in safe and effective treatment.
    5. Demonstrate effective management, utilization, and organization of equipment and supplies necessary for patient treatment.
    6. Demonstrate effective verbal communication skills for patient and family preparation for treatment.
    7. Describe appropriate delegation and supervision in the provision of physical therapy interventions.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge and performance of safety precautions necessary for the patient and PTA.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate effective body mechanics and lifting techniques in all procedures and techniques.
    2. Verbalize knowledge of safe equipment and environmental management.
    3. Utilize universal precautions as appropriate in all treatment sessions.
    4. Demonstrate safe handling, supervision, and guarding techniques consistent with patient’s age, disability, and linguistic and cognitive ability.
    5. Recognize when interventions of patient complexity are beyond the scope of practice for the PTA.
    6. Identify indications and contraindications and special precautions for selected physical therapy interventions.
    7. Recognize the existence of an emergency and describe appropriate responses based on institutional policy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate data collection skills necessary to implement and adjust the plan of care as designated by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Measure vital signs including pulse, respiration, and blood pressure an P02 recognizing reportable findings.
    2. Recognize signs of diminished neurovascular response and superficial sensation that may require adjustment in treatment.
    3. Palpate and describe peripheral pulses.
    4. Administer pain questionnaires appropriate to patient age, language and cognitive ability.
    5. Describe the use of data collection in patient progression and outcome attainment.
    6. Describe changes in mentation and cognition that may require changes to the PT plan of care.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the safe application of selected procedural interventions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate safe and effective application of superficial heat including hot packs and paraffin.
    2. Demonstrate the safe and effective application of cryotherapy including icepacks, ice massage, cold immersion.
    3. Demonstrate the safe and effective application of thermal and athermal ultrasound.
    4. Demonstrate safe and effective fitting and adjustment of assistive devices and guarding techniques appropriate to a given patient scenario.
    5. Demonstrate effective hydrotherapy techniques including cleaning and preparation of equipment and special safety precautions.
    6. Demonstrate understanding of advantages and disadvantages of pulsatile lavage in wound management.
    7. Demonstrate the ability to apply, remove, and dispose of dressings and bandages considering special precautions.
    8. Recognize viable and nonviable tissue in the management of wounds.
    9. Demonstrate the ability to perform basic therapeutic massage techniques for the neck, back, and extremities.
    10. Demonstrate understanding the use of diathermy as physical therapy modalities.
    11. Demonstrate the application of pneumatic compression for the upper and lower extremity.
    12. Explain the role of the PTA in complete decongestive physical therapy.
    13. Demonstrate the ability to establish a sterile field.
    14. Demonstrate the selection and performance of patient transfers appropriate to a case scenario.
    15. Demonstrate how individual differences, preferences, and values might alter the application of procedural interventions.
    16. Describe anticipated responses to treatment and possible adverse responses to selected interventions.
    17. Demonstrate the ability to perform and instruct other in effective interventions related to self care including: gait training on various surfaces, transfers to chair, toilet, tub and in bed mobility.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate written, oral, and non‐verbal communication that is effective, appropriate, and confidential.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Utilize medical terminology appropriately in verbal and written communication with patients, families, health care providers, and others.
    2. Recognize the need for culturally and linguistically appropriate care and describe standards for delivery related to PT.
    3. Describe the impact of culture, age, disability, gender, and socioeconomic issues on communication and treatment.
    4. Document a treatment session using the SOAP format.
    5. Recognize how documentation requirements may vary depending on practice setting.
    6. Recognize the relationship between accurate documentation and reimbursement.
    7. Discuss HIPPA standards and describe compliance in various PT settings.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Preparation for Patient Care
      1. Introduction to patient care
      2. Preparation of treatment area
      3. Body mechanics
      4. Patient preparation
        1. Assisting/handling
        2. Draping
        3. Positioning
      5. Chart review
        1. Plan of care
        2. Identification of indications/contraindications
      6. Universal precautions
      7. Safety precautions
    2. Vital Signs and Emergency Care
      1. Vital signs
        1. Pulse
        2. Respiration
        3. Blood pressure
      2. Documentation
      3. Emergency care
        1. Priority assessment
        2. Patient assessment
        3. Fainting
        4. Seizure
        5. Chest pain
        6. Diabetic reactions
        7. Heat stroke and exhaustion
    3. Turning and Positioning
      1. Purposes of positioning and turning
      2. Positioning aides for comfort and skin protection
      3. Proper positioning: supine, side‐lying, prone and sitting
      4. Turning of the patient: supine to side‐lying, supine to prone, moving up and sideways, log rolling, supine to sitting
    4. Transfers
      1. Intravenous and catheter care as it related to PT
      2. Stretcher and wheelchair parts
      3. Patient preparation, equipment, safety
      4. Transfers
      5. Special conditions/considerations
    5. Wheelchair Mobility
      1. Stretcher and wheelchair safety
      2. Cart and wheelchair mobility activities
    6. Gait Training
      1. Patient and family instruction ‐ tips on teaching
      2. Types of assistive devices and choosing an assistive device
        1. Walkers
        2. Axillary and forearm crutches
        3. Canes
      3. Gait patterns and choosing a gait pattern
      4. Patient preparation, equipment check
      5. Adjusting and fitting assistive devices
      6. Guarding and safety techniques
      7. Using assistive devices on levels and stairs
      8. Weight bearing status
    7. Therapeutic Massage
      1. Principles of massage
      2. Types of therapeutic massage techniques
      3. Application of therapeutic massage to:
        1. Back
        2. Extremities
        3. Face
    8. Introduction to Physical Agents Interventions
      1. General considerations of treatment
      2. Objectives of treatment
      3. Prior to treatment assessments
        1. Sensory tests ‐ light touch, hot and cold, sharp and dull
        2. Inspection and palpation
      4. Treatment procedures
        1. Preparation of PTA
        2. Preparation of patient
        3. Changes in physiological status ‐ normal and abnormal
        4. Patient observations
      5. Care, use, and maintenance of equipment
      6. Safety factors
      7. Role of the PTA in physical agent interventions
    9. Cryotherapy
      1. Principles of cold
      2. Contraindications and indications
      3. Equipment and supplies
      4. Techniques of application
      5. Patient application
      6. Unique problems and precautions in the use of:
        1. Cold packs ‐ wet and dry
        2. Ice massage
    10. Superficial Heat Agents
      1. Principles
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Equipment and supplies
      4. Techniques of application
      5. Patient application
      6. Unique problems and precautions related to the following superficial agents:
        1. Hydrocollator
        2. Hot packs
        3. Paraffin
        4. Contrast baths
        5. Fluidotherapy
    11. Hydrotherapy
      1. Principles of application
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Equipment and supplies
      4. Whirlpool management
      5. Patient application
      6. Unique problems and precautions related to hydrotherapy
      7. Documentation
    12. Sterile Technique, Wound Care and Bandaging
      1. Principles of sterile technique
      2. Sterile procedure
        1. Medical and surgical asepsis
        2. Sterile field
        3. Opening a sterile pack
        4. Adding objects to sterile field
        5. Sterile gown and gloves
      3. Isolation techniques and procedures
      4. Wound care
        1. Observing and describing the wound
        2. Types of dressing materials
        3. Superficial debridement and the role of the PTA
        4. Pulsative lavage and vacuum assisted wound closure
      5. Procedure for changing sterile dressing
      6. Bandaging techniques
        1. Circular
        2. Spiral
        3. Reverse spiral
        4. Figure of 8
        5. Safety and effectiveness of bandaging
      7. Documentation
    13. Therapeutic Ultrasound
      1. Principles of ultrasound
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Equipment and supplies
      4. Selection of treatment parameters
      5. Techniques of application
        1. Contact technique
        2. Underwater techniques
      6. Patient application
      7. Unique problems
      8. Precautions
      9. Documentation
    14. Diathermy
      1. Principles of diathermy
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Techniques of application
      4. Patient application
      5. Unique problems and precautions in the use of short‐wave diathermy
    15. External Compression
      1. Principles of use
      2. Indications and contraindications
      3. Equipment and supplies
      4. Techniques of application
      5. Unique problems and precautions related to this modality
      6. Documentation
    16. Emergency Situations
      1. Emergencies related to trauma, diabetes, cardiovascular and heat
      2. Correct response for patient and personal safety
      3. Appropriate documentation and report emergencies

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1070 - Joint Structure & Function-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; BIOL 2710  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: HHSC 1020  and PTAS 1081  

    PTAS 1070 provides the academic framework for the understanding of functional anatomy as related to PTA techniques and skills. Subjects include a study of the major muscle groups, innervations, skeletal anatomy, joint structure, and the relationship of these structures to exercise and functional activity. In addition, the course presents measurement techniques of goniometry and anthropometrics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe anatomical and movement terminology.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and describe the anatomical position and functional position of the body.
    2. Name the planes/axes of movement available at each body segment.
    3. Identify and define the terms of anatomical reference as they relate to comparing one body part to another and the body in space.
    4. Define and describe the terms of body movements.
    5. Spell all anatomical terms correctly.
    6. Define and describe osteokinematics.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and describe types of connective tissue, joint classifications, nervous system plexus and muscle type.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define connective tissue and describe its function.
    2. Describe specifically  types of fibrous tissue including collagen, reticular, and elastin.
    3. Describe general structure and function of bone.
    4. Define anatomical terms specific to the skeletal system.
    5. Define and identify each of the varieties of cartilage including fibrocartilage, hyaline cartilage, costal cartilage.
    6. Describe the process of joint nutrition and lubrication.
    7. List and define different classifications of joints.
    8. Name and list peripheral joint examples for synarthrodial, amphiarhtrodial, and diarthrodial joints.
    9. Describe the difference between loose‐packed and closed‐packed position of a joint.
    10. Describe the difference between an open and closed kinematic chain.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the structure and functional components of the human musculoskeletal system.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Classify each major joint in the body.
    2. Discuss the function of joints.
    3. Describe kinematic changes that occur in the joint.
    4. Discuss arthrokinematics vs. osteokinematics.
    5. Describe muscle structure.
    6. Define origin, insertion, tendon, fascia, synergist, fixator, accessory, agonist, antagonist.
    7. Define and describe a motor unit.
    8. Describe different types of muscle.
    9. List and describe different arrangements of skeletal muscle.
    10. Describe different types of muscle contractions.
    11. Describe isolated joint motion vs. multi‐joint motions.
    12. Discuss active insufficiency vs. passive insufficiency.
    13. Outline the steps involved in muscle contraction.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate the principles of anthropometrics and goniometric measurements.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Relate principles of normal joint motion to restrictions of joint motions.
    2. Identify normal ranges of joint motion for the trunk and extremities.
    3. Identify instruments used for anthropometric and goniometric measurements.
    4. Describe the role of goniometry and patient examination
    5. Describe methods of accurately recording measurements
    6. Describe the indications for the use of antropometrics measurements including: height, weight, length, and girth.
    7. Describe the role of the PTA in measurement and data collection.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define and describe major body segments.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the difference between axial skeleton and the appendicular skeleton.
    2. Name and locate specific structures of the skeleton for: spine, shoulder complex, elbow‐forearm complex, wrist‐hand complex, hip‐pelvis complex, knee and ankle‐foot complex.
    3.  List peripheral joint examples of all types of diarhtrodial joints.
    4. List and descrobe all structures of each axial or peripheral joint.
    5. Define and list examples of osteokinematics at each diarthrodal joint
    6. Name and list important ligaments of each joint.
    7. List and describe primary actions for all major muscle groups of the extremities and trunk.
    8. Identify peripheral nerve innervation for all major muscle groups of the extremities and trunk.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to access information related to musculoskeletal pathology via Internet or paper-based media resources.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Through abstract presentation define and describe basic structural pathologies of the trunk.
    2. Through abstract presentation define and describe basic structural pathologies of the extremities.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction to Anatomical Terms
      1. Anatomical position
      2. Anatomical planes and axes
      3. Anatomical terms of reference
      4. Osteokinematics
      5. Anatomical terminology for joint position
    2. Joint Structure and Function
      1. Connective tissue
        1. Cells
        2. Matrix
        3. Classification
      2. Osteology
        1. General features and functions of bone
        2. Mechanical properties of bone
        3. General features of cartilage
    3. Joint Classifications and Selected Joint Movements
      1. Types of joints
      2. Role of synovial fluid, cartilage, etc in joints
      3. Definition of arthrokinematics and osteokinematics
      4. Blood supply to joints and synovial fluid
    4. Muscle Structure and Function (Myology)
      1. Introduction to movement
      2. Characteristics of muscle
      3. Structure of muscle
      4. Types of muscle
      5. Classification of muscles by arrangement of fibers
      6. Actions, origins, insertions and innervations of muscle
      7. Physiological mechanism of muscle contraction
    5. Goniometric and Anthropometric Measurements
    6. Identify the Role of the PTA as Related to Measurement Techniques and Documentation
      1. Segmental length
      2. Lower extremity limb length
      3. Upper extremity limb length
      4. Volume of extremities
      5. Girth measurements
      6. Goniometry
    7. General Pathologies
      1. Genu varum/valgum
      2. Coxa valga/vara
      3. Scoliosis
      4. Retroversion/anteversion
      5. Postural abnormalities
      6. Nervous system pathologies (general)
    8. Topographical Discussion of Major Body Segments
      1. Shoulder joint
        1. Motions
        2. Skeletal anatomy
        3. Capsule, ligaments and bursa
        4. Major muscles and innervations
        5. Brachial plexus
        6. Axiliary triangle
      2. Shoulder girdle
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Major muscles and innervations
      3. Elbow complex
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
        6. Bursa
      4. Wrist and hand
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
      5. Thorax and spine
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
      6. Pelvis/ hip
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
        6. Bursa
        7. Femoral triangle
      7. Knee
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
        6. Popliteal fossa
        7. Bursae
      8. Ankle/foot
        1. Joints
        2. Motions
        3. Skeletal anatomy
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscles and innervations
        6. Bursa

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1081 - Joint Structure & Function-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; BIOL 2710  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: HHSC 1020  and PTAS 1091  

    (formerly PTAS 1080)

    PTAS 1081 uses practical laboratory experiences to correlate musculoskeletal and functional anatomy to physical therapy skills. Measurement techniques are included.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2.5

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, on a partner, structural features and bony‐anatomical landmarks on the surface of the body using appropriate observation and palpation skills.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the role of palpation in patient examination.
    2. Demonstrate palpation techniques.
    3. Discuss the use of inspection/observation.
    4. Identify and palpate bony landmarks on the body surface.
    5. Identify major joints of the human body.
    6. Name and locate specific parts of the axial skeleton and appendicular skeletal.
    7. Recognize common skeletal variations.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and describe movements of the human body at selected joints of the extremities and spine.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate and demonstrate anatomical position.
    2. Identify cardinal planes of motion.
    3. Identify the axis of motion for a given movement.
    4. Describe the relationship of axes to planes of motion.
    5. Demonstrate and describe all diarthrodial joint osteokinematic movements of the upper extremity, thorax and spine, and lower extremity.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe primary actions for selected major muscle groups of the extremities and trunk.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify origin and insertion of major muscle groups of extremities and trunk.
    2. Demonstrate concentric, eccentric and isometric contractions of the trunk and extremities.
    3. Demonstrate primary muscle actions for all the major muscle groups of the extremities and trunk.
    4. Palpate muscle groups of the extremities and trunk.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate data collection techniques related to anthropometric and goniometric measurements appropriate to the role of the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate proper alignment of a goniometer for a given joint movement.
    2. Demonstrate ability to accurately measure joint ROM.
    3. Recognize normal vs. limited range of motion.
    4. Demonstrate technique for measurement of girth and length and volume of an extremity.
    5. Demonstrate measurement of anthropometrical characteristics
    6. Describe the role of data collection in the establishment, modification and progression of the established plan of care.
    7. Discuss the role of the PTA in collecting, recording and using patient‐related data within the plan of care.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify selected postural abnormalities using a plumb line.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify normal postural features using a plumb line.
    2. Identify postural abnormalities using a plumb line.
    3. Describe the biomechanics of static and dynamic posture.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Anatomical Terms and Human Movement
      1. Methodology: how to analyze movement
      2. Anatomical position
      3. Terms of joint motion
        1. Spine
        2. Upper extremity
        3. Lower extremity
      4. Planes and axis for joint motion
    2. Palpation/Inspection Concepts and Techniques
      1. Palpation
      2. Sensitive parts of hand
      3. Skin system and anatomical structures beneath skin
      4. Common errors
      5. Inspection/observation
    3. Anatomical Bony Landmarks (Osteology)
      1. Cervical spine and thorax: anatomical structures
      2. Upper extremity: anatomical structures
        1. Shoulder and scapula
        2. Elbow and forearm
        3. Wrist and hand
      3. Lumbar spine and pelvis: anatomical structures
      4. Lower extremity: anatomical structures
        1. Hip and upper leg
        2. Knee and lower leg
        3. Ankle and foot
    4. Topographical Study of Major Body Segments
      1. Shoulder girdle and shoulder
        1. Arthrology
        2. Osteokinematic movements
        3. Muscle actions
        4. Goniometric measurements
      2. Elbow, forearm, wrist and hand
        1. Arthrology
        2. Osteokinematic movements
        3. Muscle actions
        4. Goniometric measurements
      3. Selected anthropometric measurements of the upper extremity
        1. Scapula level
        2. Upper extremity circumference
        3. Upper extremity length
      4. Thorax and spine
        1. Arthrology
        2. Osteokinematic movements
        3. Muscle actions
        4. Goniometric measurements
      5. Pelvis and hip
        1. Arthrology
        2. Osteokinematic movements
        3. Muscle actions
        4. Goniometric measurements
      6. Knee, ankle and foot
        1. Arthrology
        2. Osteokinematic movements
        3. Muscle actions
        4. Goniometric measurements
      7. Selected anthropometric measurements
        1. Pelvic level
        2. Lower extremity circumference
        3. Lower extremity length
    5. Posture
      1. Head/neck
      2. Shoulders
      3. Spine
      4. Knees
      5. Ankles

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1091 - Clinical Medicine for the Physical Therapist Assistant

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; BIOL 2710  with grade C or better

    Corequisites: HHSC 1020  and PTAS 1020  

    (formerly PTAS 1090)

    PTAS 1091 introduces selected concepts of clinical medicine relevant to the provision of physical therapy by the physical therapist assistant. Topics include a discussion of etiology and medical/surgical management of pathologies commonly treated in various physical therapy settings and an overview of common diagnostic tools.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to define terminology and concepts commonly used in the discussion of health and wellness.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Define: homeostasis, etiology, iatrogenic pre‐disposing factor, epidemiology, symptom, manifestation, exacerbation, remission.
    2. Describe environmental, occupational, and stress issues related to health and wellness.
    3. Describe the impact of cultural/gender health disparities on health and wellness.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss the principles and concepts of inflammation and repair as a foundation for clinical decision making in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. List and describe each stage of the inflammation and repair process.
    2. Discuss factors that may delay or compromise healing.
    3. Discuss the role of physical therapy in the management of inflammation.
    4. Discuss the medical management of inflammation.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and describe various pathogens.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Compare attributes of virus, bacterium, and fungus.
    2. Describe the local and systemic signs of infection.
    3. Discuss the diagnosis of infection.
    4. Recognize select antimicrobial pharmacological agents.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss multi‐system pathologies.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Discuss the pathology of immobilization on various body systems.
    2. Discuss the pathologies associated with aging on select body systems.
    3. Discuss physical therapy interventions for the critically ill patient.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify and describe select neoplasms.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Distinguish between benign and malignant tumors by their characteristics and nomenclature.
    2. List the signs and symptoms of malignant disease.
    3. Describe common diagnostic tests used in the management of cancer.
    4. Discuss the spread of malignant tumors.
    5. Discuss the possible treatment methods for various cancers including, surgery, radiation, and chemotherapy.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss pathologies of the musculoskeketal system.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe etiology, pathology, and medical/surgical management of trauma and fractures.
    2. Describe the etiology, pathology, and medical/surgical management of chronic disease of the musculoskeletal system.
    3. Describe the etiology, pathology, and medical/surgical management of infections and neoplasms of the musculoskeletal system.
    4. Describe common diagnostic procedures for pathologies of the musculoskeletal system.

    Outcome 7: Upon the completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss pathologies of the neuromuscular system.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe the general effects of neurological dysfunction.
    2. Describe the etiology, pathology, and medical/surgical management of acute disorders of the nervous system.
    3. Describe common diagnostic procedures for pathologies of the nervous system.
    4. Describe the etiology, pathology, and medical/surgical management of chronic disorders of the nervous system.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss pathologies of the cardiopulmonary, integumentary, and endocrine systems.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Discuss the general effects of cardiopulmonary dysfunction.
    2. Discuss risk factors for cardiopulmonary disease.
    3. Describe the etiology, pathology, clinical course, and medical management of endocrine disorders.
    4. Compare and contrast type 1 and type 2 diabetes mellitus.
    5. Describe the general effects of integumentary disorders.
    6. Discuss the etiology, pathology, clinical course, and medical management of integumentary disorders.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss mental health disorders.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify disorders of mood and personality.
    2. Discuss the impact of psychiatric disorders on physical therapy interventions.
    3. Recognize common pharmacologic agents used in the treatment of mental health disorders.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to discuss the impact of select medical conditions on the physical therapy plan of care.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify those pathologies that may result in special precautions for physical therapy including positioning for gastric reflux.
    2. Recognize when the medical complexity of a patient is beyond the scope of practice for the PTA.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. The Study of Pathophysiology
      1. Terminology
      2. Cellular changes
      3. New developments in the study of pathology
    2. Immunity and Immune Response
      1. Auto immune disorders
      2. Immunodeficiency
    3. Stress
      1. Effects of prolonged stress response
    4. Environmental Hazards
      1. Chemical agents
      2. Physical agents
    5. Inflammation and Healing
      1. Definition of inflammation
      2. Causes of inflammation
      3. Treatment of inflammation
        1. Physical therapy management
        2. Medical management
        3. Chronic inflammation
      4. The healing process
        1. Stages of healing
        2. Factors affecting healing
        3. Delayed healing
    6. Infection
      1. Types of pathogens
        1. Virus
        2. Bacteria
        3. Fungus
      2. Transmission of infection
        1. Host resistance
        2. Control of transmission
      3. Diagnosis of infection
      4. Clinical signs and symptoms of infection
      5. Clinical course of infection
      6. Management of infections
      7. Impact of infection of the physical therapy plan of care
    7. Multisystem Pathologies
      1. Impact of aging on health and wellness
      2. Impact of immobility on body systems
        1. Cardiopulmonary
        2. Musculoskeletal
        3. Integumentary
      3. Multi‐system pathology and the crucially ill patient
        1. Hospice and palliative care
      4. Impact of physical therapy on patients with multisystem pathology
        1. Physical therapy in the acute care setting and ICU
    8. Neoplasm
      1. Benign and malignant tumors
      2. Nomenclature
      3. Diagnosis
        1. Imaging
        2. Biopsy and staging
      4. Clinical signs and symptoms
      5. Treatment of common cancers including: breast, brain, bone, and leukemia
        1. Surgery
        2. Chemotherapy
        3. Radiation
        4. Advanced procedures
    9. Musculoskeletal Pathology
      1. Fracture types
      2. Fracture management
      3. Soft tissue pathologies
        1. Tendonitis
        2. Bursitis
      4. Rheumatoid arthritis
      5. Osteoarthritis
      6. Osteoporosis
      7. Ankylosing spondylitis
      8. Osteomyelitis
      9. Osteogenic sarcoma
      10. Diagnosis of musculoskeletal pathologies
      11. Medical management/pharmacology
        1. Anti‐inflammatory
        2. DMARD
        3. Biologies
        4. Analgesic/narcotic
    10. Neuromuscular Pathology
      1. Upper motor neuron vs lower motor neuron lesions
      2. Acute neuromuscular pathology
        1. TBI
        2. SCI
      3. Brain tumors
      4. CVA/TIA
      5. Diagnostics: EEG, EMG, NCV
      6. Chronic disorders of the neuromuscular system
        1. Demyelization/MS
        2. Movement disorders/PD
        3. Dementias and Alzheimer’s disease
        4. Rare CNS disorders
          1. Huntington’s Disease
          2. ALS
          3. Myasthenia Gravis
      7. Neuropharmacology
    11. Cardiopulmonary Pathology
      1. Risk factors
      2. Impact of cardiopulmonary pathology
    12. Endocrine Pathology
      1. Type 1 diabetes
      2. Type 2 diabetes
      3. Medical management of diabetes
        1. Oral medication
        2. Insulin
    13. Mental Health
      1. Mood disorders
      2. Personality disorders
    14. Integumentary Pathology
      1. Scleroderma
      2. Burns
      3. Wounds
    15. The Medically Complex Patient and the PTA

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1140 - Life Span Development for PTA

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; HHSC 1020 , PTAS 1020 , PTAS 1031 , PTAS 1070 , PTAS 1081 , and PTAS 1091  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 1150  

    PTAS 1140 covers the life‑long development of human movement and function. It includes the physical, social, emotional, and cognitive changes that occur with normal maturation. The course teaches observational skills and developmentally‑appropriate patient/client interaction skills.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss normal motor development and psychological development from birth through old age.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. State, in general, theories of development.
    2. Identify in writing factors that affect development of normal movement.
    3. Discuss, in general, physiological and anatomical growth with maturation.
    4. Discuss normal changes in biological systems with aging in the older adult.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss how functional abilities change across the human lifespan using developmental perspectives.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss, in general, normal changes in performing levels with aging in the older adult.
    2. Describe normal developmental changes that occur through the lifespan and discuss their implications on function activities.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify normal developmental milestones from birth through old age.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify primitive reflexes, righting reactions, protective reactions and equilibrium reactions.
    2. Define the basic concept of motor developmental milestones.
    3. Discuss, in general, the stages of development or normal movement and function in pediatrics.
    4. Identify central nervous system control mechanisms associated with motor control.
    5. Discuss, in general, psychosocial influence on development with maturation.
    6. Discuss the psychosocial process associated with aging.
    7. Discuss the economic and stereotypes associated with aging.
    8. Discuss how information processing changes from child to adult.
    9. Discuss effects of aging on memory and mental capacity across the lifespan.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss sexuality from adolescent through old age.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss changes in sexuality occurring with maturation in the adolescent.
    2. Discuss how sexuality changes throughout adulthood.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate the impact of illness, disability, death, and dying on the patient, family, and significant others from birth through old age.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss death and the stages of dying.
    2. Discuss interactions with patients and their families during end of life care.
    3. Discuss supportive interactions of between health care providers when working with terminally ill patients.
    4. Recognize personal feelings about death & dying.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate positive interaction skills based on the stages of normal development.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify effective positive interaction skills to utilize when working with the patients throughout the life span based on their developmental level.
    2. Demonstrate in writing and/or orally the use of verbal and nonverbal communications that provide the desired psychological support.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe anatomical and physiological changes that occur from birth through old age.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Relate, in general, visual, kinesthetic, and auditory development of perceptual motor development.
    2. Discuss integration of sensory system from childhood to adulthood.
    3. Identify the various body systems that effect development.
    4. Describe how the body systems change during the course of development.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss overall prenatal development emphasizing development of CNS occurring from conception to birth.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe in general the development of a fetus from conception to birth.
    2. Describe the development of the CNS.
    3. Discuss the concept of critical periods during gestation.
    4. Identify common teratogens that may affect the developing fetus.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss demographics, theories of aging, types of aging, and functional implications of the aging process.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Relate own feeling to illness, disability, and health.
    2. Discuss the impact of illness and physical disability through personal experiences.
    3. Discuss the relevance of patient’s value system to physical therapy.
    4. Compare and contrast active life expectancy vs. dependent life expectancy.
    5. Discuss the different theories and types of aging.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate information presented in class to observations of infant, preschool‐age child, middle and older adult.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Relate in writing and/or orally developmental reflexes that are evident and their role in motor development.
    2. Observe motor milestone skills in an infant under 1 year of age.
    3. Identify rate of motor development in an infant by comparison to normative scale.
    4. Relate in writing and/or orally normal growth and development of a preschool child.
    5. Observe motor development in early childhood.
    6. Use a criterion‐referenced scale for identifying motor development.
    7. Relate in writing and/or orally normal effects of aging in the older adult.
    8. Observe the flexibility of an older adult.
    9. Relate the extent of flexibility to physical activity.
    10. Relate in writing and/or orally the impact of illness and physical disease.
    11. Relate own feeling to illness, disability, and health.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss changes that occur in health and fitness across the life span.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define illness, wellness, health, disability, geriatrics, and gerontology.
    2. Discuss the variations in exercise precautions likely to occur across the lifespan.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction and Systems Review
      1. Why learn human development
      2. What is development
      3. What is lifespan development
      4. Terminology important in normal development
      5. Systems that influence development
      6. Motor development and control
      7. Motor learning
      8. Psychological development
      9. Systems review
        1. Nervous system
        2. Skeletal system
        3. Muscular system
        4. Cardiovascular system
        5. Sensory system
        6. Vital functions
    2. Infant Development: Systems
      1. Development of systems through infancy
        1. Nervous system
        2. Skeletal system
        3. Muscular system
        4. Cardiovascular system
        5. Sensory system
        6. Vital functions
    3. Infant Development: Reflexes, Righting and Equilibrium Reactions
      1. Reflexes defined
      2. Control of reflexes
      3. Terminology
      4. Primitive reflexes
      5. Righting reactions
      6. Equilibrium reactions
    4. Infant Development: Motor Development
      1. Development and motor milestones in supine
      2. Development and motor milestones in prone
      3. Development and motor milestones in sitting
      4. Development and motor milestones in stance and gait
    5. Childhood Through Adolescence
      1. Development of systems through childhood and adolescence
        1. Nervous system
        2. Skeletal system
        3. Muscular system
        4. Cardiovascular system
        5. Sensory system
        6. Vital functions
      2. Motor development: Childhood through adolescence
        1. Posture
        2. Transitions
        3. Gait
        4. Gross motor skills
    6. Theories of Development
      1. What is a theory
      2. Common developmental theories
        1. Nature vs. nurture
        2. Behaviorism
        3. Stage theories
        4. Ecological theories
        5. Systems theories
      3. How does development progress
      4. Jean Piaget
      5. Erik Erikson
      6. Other issues related to adolescence
    7. Prenatal Development
      1. Periods of pregnancy
        1. Zygote
        2. Embryo
        3. Fetus
      2. Control of development
      3. Critical periods in prenatal development
      4. Congenital malformations
    8. Adult and Aging
      1. Demographic information on aging
      2. Active vs. dependent life expectancy
      3. Types of aging
      4. Factors related to aging and confused with aging
      5. Changes in body systems with aging
        1. Nervous system
        2. Skeletal system
        3. Muscular system
        4. Cardiovascular system
        5. Sensory system
        6. Vital functions
      6. Functional implications
      7. Cognitive development
      8. Memory
      9. Lifespan changes in memory
      10. Posture
      11. Transitions
      12. Locomotor skills
      13. Issues related to adulthood
    9. Death and Dying
      1. Why learn about death and dying
      2. Settings with more frequent episodes of death
      3. Death
      4. 5 stages of death
      5. Dealing with terminal patients
      6. Grieving
      7. Stages of grieving in adulthood
      8. Loss of a child
      9. Child grieving
    10. Health and Fitness
      1. Health
      2. Fitness
      3. Physiological fitness
      4. Components of fitness
      5. Factors that influence fitness
      6. Benefits of fitness
      7. Definitions related to fitness
      8. Systems involved in fitness
      9. Body system changes in health and fitness across the lifespan
      10. Exercise considerations in childhood
      11. Exercise considerations in the older adult

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1150 - Kinesiology-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; HHSC 1020 , PTAS 1020 , PTAS 1031 , PTAS 1070 , PTAS 1081 , and PTAS 1091  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 1160  

    This course provides the study of functional human musculoskeletal movement and its interrelationship to the neuromuscular system as a foundation to the basic understanding of normal and abnormal movements. It includes analysis of basic principles and biomechanics in functional activity.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast osteokinematics and arthrokinematics of each diarthrodial joint.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe accessory joint movement necessary for normal joint function for the synovial joints of the spine and extremities.
    2. Describe the concept of convex/concave articulatory movement.
    3. Describe joint motion using appropriate terminology for the joints of the spine and extremity.
    4. Identify joint classification (i.e., ball and socket, plane synovial gliding joint, etc.) to each of the joints of the spine and extremities.
    5. Identify plane of motion dominance for the joints of the extremities and spine.
    6. Differentiatiate between various types of jiont structure and their unique functions

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe biomechanical principles as they relate to human body motion and stability.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the 3 classes of lever systems and apply them to human movement.
    2. Describe the law of acceleration and its application to human movement.
    3. Identify the three planes of motion and axes of motion.
    4. Identify the three planes of motion and axis of motion.
    5. Differentiate open and closed‐kinematic chain activities of the extremities.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and identify types of muscle contractions and their role in human motion.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define 3 types of muscle contraction (concentric, eccentric and isometric).
    2. Describe each type of muscle contraction with exercise.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss isolated joint motions vs. functional multiple joint motions in the extremities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate isolated joint motion for the joints of the spine and extremities.
    2. Demonstrate functional motions of the spine and extremities in both open and closed kinematic chain scenarios.
    3. Differentiate between isolated joint motion and functional motion in pictures and when analyzing activities.
    4. Describe the impact of biomechanical deficits on human movement

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify prime muscle action and innervations of major muscles of the extremities and spine.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify concentric and eccentric actions of major muscles of the spine and extremities.
    2. Describe primary muscle actins required for a designated movement/activity
    3. Describe primary muscle actions required for a designated movement/activity.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the components of normal and abnormal body mechanics and gait.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the determinants of gait.
    2. Define key terminology as it relates to the gait cycle.
    3. Describe kinematic joint motions that occur a the hip, knee and ankle with closed‐chain pronation and supination during gait.
    4. Identify major muscle group actions at various phases during the gait cycle.
    5. Identify arm and trunk contributions to gait.
    6. Explain rationale of contralateral use of cane or crutch.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Kinematics
      1. Introduction to the basic concepts of joint motion.
        Objective ‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. Identify the planes and axes and their relationship to joint motion
        2. Identify the motions which occur in each plane
        3. Use proper anatomical terms of reference
        4. Describe the difference between open and closed kinematic chains
        5. Describe degrees of freedom and how it related to joint motion
        6. List and describe diarthrodial joints and their characteristics
        7. Define and describe osteokinematics vs. arthrokinematics
        8. Describe convex/concave relationship in arthrokinematics
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Kinesiology - definition
        2. Kinematics
          1. Osteokinematics
          2. Arthrokinematics
        3. Planar classification of position and motion
        4. Kinematic chains - open and closed Kinematic chains - open and closed
        5. Convex/concave relationship in arthrokinematics vs osteokinematics
        6. Classification of joint movement Classification of joint movement
        7. Joint nutrition and lubrication
        8. Pathology and clinical considerations
    2. Kinetics - Biomechanics
      1. Introduction to the forces that produce human motion.
        Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Identify and describe the classes of levers and their function in the human body
        2. Describe forces as vectors and how they affect motion/muscle torque in the human body
        3. Define muscle torque and describe how it creates human joint motion
        4. Define movement arms and their clinical relevance
        5. Describe and identify center of gravity of the body and the effects of gravity on the body
        6. Discuss biomechanical principles of force systems to body equilibrium
        7. Describe the leer system and discuss its application to the musculoskeletal system
        8. Define principles of stability and describe the relationship of gravity to base of support
        9. Relate functional body mechanics to human movement and problem prevention.
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Static biomechanics: basic principles
          1. Axes of rotation
          2. Force
          3. Center of gravity
          4. Lever arm and muscle attachments
          5. Movement arm
          6. Torque
        2. Dynamic motion
          1. Lever systems
          2. Effects of lever lengths
          3. Torque and angle of pull
        3. Gravity
          1. Center of gravity - human body (posture)
          2. Principles of stability
          3. Body mechanics and effects of lever lengths
          4. Center of gravity as it related to changing body positions
        4. Forces occurring between articular surfaces
        5. Effects of faulty body alignment
    3. Muscle Function
      1. Objective ‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Define the origin and insertion of a muscle, tendon, ligament, and joint capsule
        2. List the characteristics of skeletal muscle
        3. List muscle fiber arrangements and describe how it related to function
        4. Identify and describe three types of muscle contractions
        5. Define and identify agonist and antagonist
        6. Briefly discuss muscle excitation and contraction
        7. Briefly discuss muscle excitation and contraction
        8. Discuss the length‐tension relationships of muscle and how active/passive insufficiency is utilized for normal movement
        9. Relate the principles of manual muscle testing to muscle function
        10. Identify the role and function of the PTA in manual muscle testing.
      2. Specific tasks covered:
        1. Characteristics of muscle
        2. Structure of muscleb. Structure of muscle
        3. Muscle fiber arrangement and function
        4. Actions/function of muscle
        5. Physiological mechanism of muscle contraction
        6. Principles of manual muscle testing
    4. Face and Head
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Identify the major muscles of facial expression and their nerve innervation
        2. Identify the muscles of mastication and their innervations
        3. Identify and describe the anatomical structure of the temporomandibular joint
        4. Identify and describe the normal arthrokinematic joint vs. osteokinematic motion of the temporomandibular joint.
        5. Identify the muscles utilized during normal opening and closing of the jaw.
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Temporomandibular joint
          1. Osteokinematics
          2. Anatomy - skeletal and disc
          3. Capsule and ligaments
          4. Muscles
          5. Arthrokinematics
          6. Muscle group action
        2. Facial muscles and action
        3. Facial muscles and action
        4. Cranial nerve III and VII
    5. Shoulder Girdle and Shoulder
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Identify and describe the four joints which comprise the shoulder and shoulder girdle
        2. Identify the skeletal structures and ligaments that make‐up the shoulder and shoulder girdle
        3. Identify the muscles which comprise the rotator cuff; describe their function
        4. Describe scapulohumeral rhythm and muscles which produce this motion
        5. Define and give an example of a force couple
        6. List the normal ROM and motions which occur at the shoulder and shoulder girdle
        7. Describe the normal arthrokinematics that occur at the shoulder
        8. Identify prime muscle actions of all muscles of shoulder and shoulder girdle
        9. List prime moves for each joint motion
        10. Analyze functional movements involving the shoulder, shoulder girdle, and scapula
        11. Explain how passive and active insufficiency affect shoulder motion
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Shoulder complex - composition
        2. Glenohumeral joint
          1. Motions
          2. Skeletal anatomy, ligaments and capsule
          3. Muscles
          4. Joint stabilization
          5. Muscular force couple
        3. Sternoclavicular joint
        4. Acromioclavicular joint
        5. Scapulothoracic joint
          1. Motions
          2. Skeletal anatomy
          3. Muscles
          4. Force couple
          5. Scapulohumeral rhythm
        6. Shoulder motion relationship to multi‐joint muscles of elbow
    6. Elbow, Wrist and Hand
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Identify the joints of the elbow, forearm, wrist and hand
        2. Identify the skeletal anatomy that comprise the elbow, forearm, wrist, and hand joints
        3. List and describe the ligaments that are found at the elbow, forearm, writs and hand joints
        4. List the normal ROM and motions which occur at the elbow, forearm, wrist and hand joints
        5. Identify the muscle actions and nerve innervations of all muscles discussed
        6. List the prime movers for each joint motion
        7. Analyze functional movements of the elbow, forearm, wrist and hand
        8. Describe the brachial plexus and its relationships to upper extremity function
        9. Discuss isolated joint motion vs multi‐joint motion
        10. Identify positions of active and passive insufficiency; explain how it affects elbow and wrist motion.
        11. Describe normal arthrokinematics of the elbow, forearm, wrist, and hand vs. osteokinematics
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Elbow joint
          1. Skeletal anatomy
          2. Ligaments
          3. Motions and muscles
          4. Arthrokinematics
        2. Forearms
          1. Skeletal anatomy
          2. Ligaments
          3. Actions and muscles
          4. Arthrokinematics
        3. Relationships of multi‐joint muscles to elbow and wrist Relationships of multi‐joint muscles to elbow and wrist
        4. Wrist complex
          1. Skeletal anatomy
          2. Joints and ROM
          3. Ligaments
          4. Actions and muscles
          5. Arthrokinematics
        5. Hand complex
          1. Joints
          2. Skeletal anatomy
          3. Ligaments
          4. Motion and ROM
          5. Arthrokinematics
          6. Muscles and actions
          7. Relationship of active and passive insufficiency to wrist motion
        6. Brachial plexus and nerve innervation to upper extremity muscles
    7. Thorax
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Describe the skeletal framework of the thorax
        2. Identify and define the thoracic inlet and outlet
        3. Describe the movements of the thorax
        4. Describe muscle function and attachments of the thorax and nerve innervation
        5. Describe basic biomechanical anatomical relationships of respiration
        6. Describe the anatomical relationship of the brachial plexus to the thorax
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Anatomical skeletal framework of thorax
        2. Joints
        3. Movements
        4. Muscle actions
        5. Respiration
          1. Anatomical relationship
          2. Muscle actions
        6. Thoracic inlet and outlet
    8. Spine and Trunk
      1. Objective ‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. Identify and describe normal curves of the spine and their functions
        2. Identify and list abnormal curves of the spine
        3. Describe normal trunk and cervical spine motions and their normal ROM
        4. Identify and describe the muscles of the cervical, thoracic, and lumbar spine; identify their nerve innervation
        5. Identify the prime movers of the neck and trunk motions
        6. Identify normal basic arthrokinematics of spine motion
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Vertebral column - regions and curves
          1. Regions and curves
          2. Skeletal structure and disc
          3. Joints and motion
        2. Ligaments
        3. Joint biomechanics
        4. Regional structure and function
        5. Muscle and actions
    9. Pelvic Girdle and Hip
      1. Objective ‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. Identify the skeletal anatomy that comprise the pelvis and hip
        2. Identify the joints of the pelvis and hip
        3. Identify and list major stabilizing ligaments of the pelvis and hip
        4. Describe movements and prime movers for each joint motion
        5. List the normal ROM for the hip
        6. Identify muscle actions of the hip/pelvis and their nerve innervations
        7. Identify normal arthrokinematic motions of the hip
        8. List examples of one‐joint vs two‐joint muscles; isolate selected muscle groups through active insufficiency
        9. Identify abnormal postures of the pelvis and hip
        10. Describe the lumbosacral plexus and its relationships to the lower extremity muscles
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Hip joint - structure and function
        2. Anatomical structure
          1. Pelvis
          2. Hip joint
        3. Abnormal angulation of femur
        4. Ligaments
        5. Muscle, action and function
        6. Pelvic and femoral motions
        7. Arthrokinematics
        8. Lumbo‐sacral plexus
    10. Knee, Ankle and Foot
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. Identify the skeletal anatomy that comprise the knee, ankle, and foot joints
        2. Identify the joints of the knee, ankle and foot
        3. Identify and list the major stabilizing ligaments of the knee, ankle, and foot
        4. Describe the movements and prime movers for each joint motion
        5. List the normal ROM for knee, talocrural and subtalar joints
        6. Identify the prime muscle action of musculature of the knee, ankle, and foot; their nerve innervation
        7. Identify normal arthrokinematic motions of the knee, ankle, and foot
        8. List examples of one‐joint vs two‐joints muscles and isolate selected muscle groups through active insufficiency
        9. Identify abnormal postures of the knee, ankle and foot
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Knee
          1. Joints - skeletal anatomy and meniscus
          2. Ligaments
          3. Motions, muscle and function
          4. Arthrokinematics
          5. Abnormal postures
        2. Talocrural joint
          1. Skeletal anatomy
          2. Ligaments
          3. Motions and muscles
          4. Arthrokinematics
          5. Abnormal postures
        3. Subtalar
          1. Joints
          2. Skeletal anatomy
          3. Ligaments
          4. Motions and muscles
          5. Arthrokinematics
          6. Abnormal postures
    11. Gait
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. Describe the relationships of the center of gravity to normal gait
        2. Describe the normal gait cycle and define the terms used to describe normal gait
        3. Describe the basic phases of gait
        4. Identify and describe the joint movements (critical events) necessary for normal gait to occur
        5. Identify critical muscle activity that occurs during normal gait
        6. Identify movements in selected functional activities: running, stair climbing
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Basic concepts of gait
        2. Center of gravity
        3. Gait cycle and phases
        4. Basic determinants of gait
        5. Critical events
        6. Critical muscle activity

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1160 - Kinesiology-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; HHSC 1020 , PTAS 1020 , PTAS 1031 , PTAS 1070 , PTAS 1081 , and PTAS 1091  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 1170 

    This course covers correlated laboratory practice in kinesiology, basic biomechanics and gait for the development of related physical therapist assistant techniques and skills. It includes functional movement analysis and the development of function specific activity.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and palpate surface anatomical structures that relate to musculoskeletal anatomy and human movement.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify major anatomical structures on laboratory models of the spine and extremities.
    2. Palpate anatomical structures including tendons, muscle bellies and skeletal landmarks on a classmate
      1. recognize the presence of appropriate muscle mass
    3. Demonstrate proper positioning for palpation.
    4. Identify innervations of muscles tagged on anatomical models.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and describe muscle activity at the major joints of the spine and extremities as it relates to function.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate exercises occurring in all 3 planes of motion.
    2. Describe compound and isolated exercises using appropriate terminology.
    3. Identify concentric and eccentric phases of functional activities while actively performing then, while observing performance and through still pictures.
    4. Identify muscle activity occurring at major joints of the spine and extremities while actively performing, observing performance or viewing still pictures.
    5. Describe planes of motion occurring during an activity while actively performing or viewing still pictures.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify biomechanical principles of normal body alignment and functional body mechanics.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate proper mechanics for pushing, pulling and lifting.
    2. Recognize and describe postural symmetry in standing.
    3. Identify abnormal postures with associated muscle imbalances.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the components of normal gait and of selected gait abnormalities.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize and evaluate normal gait patterns.
    2. Describe gait compensation due to muscle weakness.
    3. Demonstrate gait variations used for a biomechanical assessment and explain significance of each gait pattern.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate principles of biomechanics to management of physical therapy patients.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Understand potential injury patterns that may occur at the major joints of the spine and extremities with abnormal biomechanics.
    2. Demonstrate correct use of concentric and eccentric exercises within an established plan of care.
    3. Describe positions of stretch and shortening for major muscles of the spine and extremity.
    4. Analyze human movement through video and still pictures and identify muscle contractions occurring.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction - Practical Aspects of Human Movement
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. analyze human movement through observation of movements, palpation, demonstration of joint movement and demonstration of muscle actions
        2. identify and palpate bony landmarks on the body surface
        3. identify the major joints of the human body
        4. demonstrate joint movements
        5. demonstrate the three types of muscle contractions
        6. explain the basic methods of in analyzing human movements
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Analysis of human movement - how to analyze movement
          1. Observations
          2. Palpation
          3. Demonstration of joint movement
          4. Demonstration of muscle actions
        2. Review of surface anatomy and identification of joints
        3. Kinesiological aspects of joint movement
    2. Stability and Posture
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. locate the center of gravity and the line of gravity
        2. demonstrate the relationship of the center of gravity to the base of support for stability
        3. analyze the base of support and line of gravity during functional activities
        4. identify muscle actions forth maintaining of normal erect posture
        5. analyze the biomechanical aspects of the body at rest and during functional movements
        6. identify the location of line of gravity for normal stable erect posture
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Principles of stability
          1. Base of support
          2. Center of gravity
        2. Analysis of equilibrium (body at rest)
        3. Body alignment and its relationship to stability
        4. Analysis of body in motion
          1. Center of gravity as it related to changing body positions
          2. Muscle action
    3. Face and Head
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate structures
        2. demonstrate the movements
        3. demonstrate and identify the muscle action and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscles for selected movement
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and structure
        2. Muscle actions and movements
        3. Functional analysis
    4. Shoulder and Shoulder Girdle
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate the joint movements
        3. demonstrate the muscle actions and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscle for selected movements and identify its actions
        5. identify the plane and axis of the movement
        6. identify gross manual muscle testing procedures
        7. analyze functional movement s
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscles
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Functional analysis
    5. Elbow, Forearm, Wrist, and Hand
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate the joint movements
        3. demonstrate the muscle actions and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscle for selected movements and identify its actions
        5. identify the plane and axis of the movement
        6. analyze functional movement s
      2. Selected topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscle
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Functional analysis
    6. Thorax
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate thoracic movements and biomechanical aspects of thoracic movements as it relates to respiration.
        3. demonstrate the biomechanical aspects of abdominal movement as it related to respiration
        4. demonstrate the muscle actions
        5. demonstrates the biomechanical aspects of thoracic and abdominal movements in force and stressful respirations.
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscles
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Biomechanics of respiration
        5. Anatomical - physiological relationship
    7. Spine and Trunk
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate the joint movements
        3. demonstrate the muscle actions and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscle for selected movements and identify its actions
        5. identify the plane and axis of the movement
        6. analyze functional movements
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscles
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Functional analysis
    8. Pelvic Girdle and Hip
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate the joint movements
        3. demonstrate the muscle actions and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscle for selected movements and identify its actions
        5. identify the plane and axis of the movement
        6. identify gross manual muscle testing procedures
        7. analyze functional movements
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscle
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Functional analysis
    9. Knee, Ankle, and Foot
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. identify, palpate and/or mark the appropriate skeletal structures
        2. demonstrate the joint movements
        3. demonstrate the muscle actions and palpate the appropriate muscle
        4. identify the location of muscle for selected movements and identify its actions
        5. identify the plane and axis of the movement
        6. analyze functional movements
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Surface anatomy and skeletal structures
        2. Location and outline of muscle
        3. Movements and muscle actions
        4. Gross manual muscle tests
        5. Functional analysis
    10. Gait
      1. Objectives the student will be able to:
        1. locate the center of gravity and line of gravity
        2. demonstrate the relationship of the center of gravity at normal gait
        3. demonstrate and explain the gait cycle
        4. demonstrate and explain the basic phases of gait
        5. demonstrate the appropriate joint movements
        6. demonstrate and explain the muscle actions during normal gait
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Center of gravity and base of support
        2. Gait cycle and phases of gait
        3. Joint movement in gait
          1. Head and neck
          2. Trunk
          3. Pelvis
          4. Extremities
        4. Muscle actions
        5. Functional analysis

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1170 - Physical Therapy Procedures 2-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; HHSC 1020 , PTAS 1020 , PTAS 1031 , PTAS 1070 , PTAS 1081 , and PTAS 1091  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 1180  

    This course presents the kinesthetic and mechanical principles of therapeutic exercise and the use of mechanical traction. It emphasizes advancing patient management skills, including communication and documentation using various practical conditions as models.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss kinesthetic and physiological principles of therapeutic exercise.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define/discuss the role of gravity, length-tension, and posture in therapeutic exercise.
    2. Define/discuss aerobic and aerobic energy systems muscle fiber types.
    3. Define/discuss the role of muscle spurt and GTOs in exercise programs.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the role of therapeutic exercise related to the prevention and treatment of pathology and the achievement of patient outcomes in selected conditions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe and discuss the PT patient management model.
    2. Describe the ICF model of disablement and its role in patient management
    3. Discuss the role of their exercise in wellness.
    4. Describe the role of therapeutic exercise in the geriatric and medically complex patient.
    5. Describe the role of therapeutic exercise for post-surgical patients including THA, TKA, TSA and ORIF and the phases of postoperative rehabilitation.
    6. Describe the role of therapeutic exercise for patients with acute and chronic impairments of the spine.
    7. Describe the role of therapeutic exercise for patients with balance and coordination impairments.
    8. Identify impairments amendable to PT treatments.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe identified therapeutic exercise techniques and discuss rationale for their use.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define/discuss passive and active and self-stretching techniques.
    2. Define/Discuss stress/strain curves as it related to therapeutic exercise.
    3. Define/describe passive/active assisted and active ROM programs.
    4. Define/describe resistive exercise programs.
    5. Describe the process of establishing a therapeutic exercise program including PRE, isokinetics, closed and open chain exercise program.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the principles, goals and rationale for the use of mechanical traction.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify impairments amenable to treatment with mechanical traction.
    2. Discuss the physiological effects of mechanical traction.
    3. Identify indications and contraindications to the use of mechanical traction.
    4. Monitor the patient record for changes in patient status that may impact PT interventions
    5. Use data to compare patient status to previously documented status.
    6. Describe the relationship between data collection and patient progression.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the PTA in the implementation and progression of a comprehensive therapy treatment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the role of the PTA in patient data collection.
    2. Discuss the rationale for and method of progressing an exercise program within a plan of care.
    3. Identify the contraindications and precautions for implementation of an exercise program.
    4. Use current knowledge and clinical judgement while considering individual patient needs based on the PT plan of care established by the physical therapist

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to develop comprehensive documentation (SOAP format) and home exercise program for therapeutic exercise/treatment session.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Document an exercise program in a daily progress note using the SOAP format.
    2. Design, teach and illustrate an outcome based home exercise program as part of an intervention plan developed by PT.
    3. Demonstrate written communication skills appropriate for patients, third-party payors and others that reflects respects individual learning needs

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to relate principles of manual muscle testing and identify role of the physical therapist assistant in manual muscle testing.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the history and purpose of manual muscle testing.
    2. List and describe manual muscle testing grades.
    3. Describe the role of manual muscle testing in clinical decision-making.
    4. Relate manual muscle testing grades to functional activity.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of evidence based practice in PT.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define evidence based practice.
    2. Describe components of a research based journal article.
    3. Read and critique a researched based article accessed via electronic database.
    4. Describe statistical methods related to research in physical therapy
    5. Describe the relationship between current evidence in PT and clinical decision making
    6. Describe methods for obtaining current evidence in physical therapy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. The Guide to PT Practice and the Patient Management Model
      1. Nagi Disablement Model
      2. Exercise and function
    2. Concepts of Therapeutic Exercise
      1. Strength
      2. ROM
      3. Endurance
      4. Wellness
      5. Balance/Coordination
    3. ROM
      1. Passive, Active Assisted, Active
      2. Benefits. Limitations, Precautions
      3. End-feels
      4. Contractures
      5. Protocols - indications/continuity
    4. Strength
      1. Hypertrophy
      2. Work, Power, Strength
      3. Gravity & Resistance
      4. Protocols - indications/continuity
    5. Stretching
      1. Passive stretch
      2. Active stretch
      3. Physiological principles
      4. Indications/contraindications
    6. Post-Surgical Patients
      1. THA, ORIF of Hip
      2. TKA
      3. Soft tissue repair
      4. Maximum protection, subacute, return to function phases of rehabilitation
    7. Balance and Coordination
      1. Etiology of balance disorder
      2. Etiology of coordination deficits
      3. Therapeutic exercise programs frequently used in the management of balance/coordination deficits
    8. Posture and Spine
      1. Acute spinal pain
      2. Chronic spinal pain
      3. Biomechanical and postural deficits
      4. Exercise indications including spinal stabilization
    9. Evidence-based Practice
      1. Reading professional literature
      2. Basic research methods and statistics
      3. Using evidence effectively
      4. Sources of evidence
    10. Geriatric and Medically Complex Patients
      1. Age related changes
      2. Special precautions in therapeutic exercise for senior adults
      3. Safety for patients with multiple comorbidities

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 1180 - Physical Therapy Procedures 2-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; HHSC 1020 , PTAS 1020 , PTAS 1031 , PTAS 1070 , PTAS 1081 , PTAS 1091  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 1140 

    This course provides correlated practical experiences that help students acquire manual skills related to basic exercise, functional activities, and the use of appropriate equipment in a therapeutic exercise program. It includes the practical application of mechanical, cervical, and lumbar traction.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to the ability to select specific exercises based on kinesthetic, functional, and physiological goals identified in the plan of care developed by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the relationship between exercise, short term goals and functional outcomes.
    2. Identify muscle contraction during specific exercise as eccentric, concentric or isometric.
    3. Relate the role of gravity to exercise selection.
    4. Relate specific exercises to short and long term goals.
    5. Describe the role of the PTA in selecting exercise.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to the ability to implement an effective therapeutic exercise program as indicated in the plan of care developed by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe and demonstrate effective teaching techniques considering learning style and barriers to learning.
    2. Recognize the role of individual differences, preferences, and values in the implementation of therapeutic exercise programs in the implementation of exercise programs.
    3. Recognize correct and incorrect performance of selected therapeutic exercises.
    4. Recognize and report adverse response to therapeutic exercise programs and reports these to the physical therapist.
    5. Use the medical record to identify pre‐treatment status
    6. Recognize indications and contraindications to therapeutic exercise

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to the ability to perform and instruct in a therapeutic exercise program as indicated in the established PT plan of care.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform and instruct in passive range of motion.
    2. Perform and instruct in active assisted range of motion and active range of motion.
    3. Perform and instruct in resistive exercise.
    4. Perform and instruct in exercise programs to improve aerobic and muscular endurance.
    5. Perform and instruct in protocols for post‐surgical patients including total hip and total knee arthroplasty.
    6. Perform and instruct in the safe and effective use of equipment for exercise enhancement and resistance.
    7. Perform and instruct in exercise for posture and trunk stability.
    8. Perform and instruct in passive and active stretching techniques.
    9. Perform and instruct in exercise for balance, coordination and relaxation.
    10. Document an interim progress note related to exercise using the SOAP format.
    11. Recognize and respond to safety concerns and possible emergencies related to exercise programs.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to collect data as necessary to implement and progress an exercise program as indicated in the plan of care developed by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform and record manual muscle tests.
    2. Relate manual muscle test grades to functional outcomes.
    3. Use data collected from manual muscle tests to select and progress exercise within the established plan of care.
    4. Administer functional screening test related to balance and report data accurately

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to the ability to progress an exercise program based on the patient’s response to the established plan of care.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe methods of advancing an exercise program.
    2. Describe the relationship between manual muscle testing and exercise progression toward functional outcomes.
    3. Identify indications of effective and ineffective exercise progression.
    4. Describe physiological indicators related to safe and effective exercise progression.
    5. Describe the role of the PTA in progressing an exercise program within the plan of care developed by the PT
    6. Describe the role of the PTA in discontinuing an episode of care and the provision of a home exercise program

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to the ability to apply mechanical traction as indicated by the plan of care established by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform set up for lumbar traction recognizing positional variation indicated in the plan of care.
    2. Perform set‐up for cervical traction.
    3. Recognize and instruct patient regarding expected and adverse response to mechanical traction.
    4. Recognize indications and contraindications to mechanical traction.
    5. Report contraindications and/or adverse response to the physical therapist.
    6. Demonstrate awareness of safety precautions for patient and PTA related to the use of mechanical traction.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Skills in Communicaĕon
      1. Objective – the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate written, verbal, and nonverbal communication skills wich are productive
        2. contrast negative and positive behaviors
        3. descrive appropriate interactions with pateint and family
        4. demonstrate in writing appropriate technques for recording (SOAP)
        5. demostrate/discuss interactions of PT and PTA for treatment planning and implementation
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. communication skills
          1. Verbal
          2. Nonverbal
          3. Client/patient interactions
          4. Patient teaching skills
        2. Written communications: SOAP notes
        3. PT and PTA roles in therapeutic exercise
    2. Range of Motion Therapeutic Techniques
      1. Passive ROM
      2. Active assistive ROM
      3. Active ROM
      4. Specific topics covered:
        1. ROM protocals and regimes for spine and extremities
          1. passive ROM
          2. active assistive ROM
          3. active ROM
    3. Stretching Techniques: Exercise to Increase joint ROM
      1. Objective-the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate passive stretch
        2. demonstrate active stretch techniques
          1. Contract ‐ relax
          2. Reciprocal Inhibition
        3. demonstrates stretching techniques utilizing equipment
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. parameters of active and passive stretch
        2. specific techniques to spine and extremities
          1. passive
          2. contract‐relax
          3. reciprocal inhibition
        3. pendulum exercises and use of equipment
        4. Case studies and problem solving
    4. Resistive Exercise Techniques: Exercise for Strength
      1. Objective the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate isometric exercises for the extremities and spine
        2. demonstrate manual resistive exercises of the extremities and spine
        3. demonstrate appropriate resistive exercise technique to include: proper stabilization, appropriate resistance, appropriate patient position and appropriate direction of resistance
        4. demonstrate appropriate utilization of exercise equipment including, but not limited to: t-band, cuff weights, dumbbells, weight bars, nustep, rebounder, fitter, airex, BAPS board.
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. manual resistance
          1. Definition
          2. Principles of application
          3. Techniques ‐ extremities
        2. General principles of strength training
        3. Types of resistive exercises
          1. Isometric protocols
          2. Isotonic protocols
          3. Isokinetic protocols
        4. Choice of training protocols/methods
        5. Use of strength‐training protocols
          1. PRE programs
          2. Use of weights
          3. Use of other equipment for strength
        6. Case studies and problem solving
    5. Relaxation Techniques
      1. Objective ‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate relaxation techniques
        2. demonstrate appropriate utilization of relaxation techniques as part of a therapeutic exercise program.
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Relaxation protocols/methods
        2. Use of environmental controls, role of PTA in promoting relaxation through voice, touch
    6. Treatment of the Post surgical patient
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate appropriate application of adaptive, assistive, and supportive devices.
        2. demonstrate appropriate application of treatment programs and therapeutic exercise programs
        3. demonstrate proper transfer techniques and bed mobility techniques
      2. Specific topics including hip, knee and shoulder replacement
        1. Precautions
        2. Exercise programs
        3. Assistive devices, supportive devices
        4. Exercise equipment
        5. Transfers, bed mobility, and gait training
    7. Balance/Coordination
      1. Objective ‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. implement an exercise program for the management of balance and coordination impairments as indicated in the PT POC.
        2. use data collected to advance a balance and coordination program as indicated by the PT POC
        3. utilize special safety precautions for patients with balance impairments
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Frenkle’s exercise and other coordination exercises
        2. Developmental positions
        3. Equipment ‐ balls, balance beams, rocker boards, etc
        4. Case studies and problem solving
    8. Posture/Spine Exercises
      1. Objective the student will be able to:
        1. analyze deviations of normal postural alignment
        2. demonstrate ability to instruct patient in proper postural and body mechanics
        3. demonstrate exercises to improve kinesthetic awareness regarding posture
        4. implement and progress a patient through an established scoliosis/postural exercise program under the supervision of a PT
        5. identify precautions and contraindications to postural/scoliosis exercises
        6. recognized and utilize exercise equipment with a postural program
        7. demonstrate the ability to instruct a patient in spinal stabilization activities.
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Exercise techniques for trunk
          1. Active ROM
          2. Techniques to increase ROM
          3. Techniques to restore muscle imbalance
        2. Posture programs
        3. Case studies and problem solving
    9. Mechanical Traction
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate techniques for
          1. preparation for PTA
          2. treatment area
          3. equipment
          4. patient
        2. demonstrate techniques of application in use of cervical and pelvic mechanical traction
          1. position selection
        3. instruct patient and family
        4. identify and respond to changes in physiological state
        5. demonstrate appropriate techniques for
          1. care, use and maintenance of equipment
          2. correct safety measures for PTA and patient
          3. terminating the treatment
        6. record adequate and precise information
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. General principles
        2. Indications and contraindications
        3. Equipment and supplies
        4. Techniques of application
        5. Patient application
        6. Unique problems and precautions
    10. Manual Muscle Testing
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. choose the appropriate position for performing manual muscle test
        2. recognize patient response to manual muscle test
        3. record result of manual muscle test
        4. verbalize the role for the PTA in performing data collection
        5. verbalize the role of manual muscle testing in the clinical decision making progress
        6. describe manual muscle test grades
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Patient positioning
        2. Applying resistance
        3. Recording data
        4. Performing muscle test to:
          1. Head/neck
          2. Shoulder girdle
          3. Elbow/forearm
          4. Hand/wrist
          5. Trunk
          6. Hip
          7. Knee
          8. Ankle/foot
        5. Recording data and insuring accuracy of data

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2110 - Neuromuscular Physical Therapy-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2120  

    This course is designed to provide a theoretical basis for the utilization of various neuromuscular approaches to therapeutic exercise. Discussion includes advanced management techniques for the neurologically impaired patient.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate basic knowledge of neuroanatomy and neurophysiology as it relates to neuromuscular techniques.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Explain the general structure and divisions of the nervous system.
    2. Describe the structure and function of the brain and spinal cord
    3. Describe the structures of the peripheral nerve
    4. Describe a reflex arc.
    5. Describe the process of nerve innervation related to skeletal movement and sensory perception.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the relationship of developmental concepts to elements/principles of various neuromuscular approaches (PNF, Rood, Brunnstrom, Bobath, and Sensory Integration).

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify normal and abnormal reflexes.
    2. Identify the stages of developmental sequence.
    3. Relate stages of motor development to common neurological approaches
    4. Describe common abnormal movement patterns.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the basic principles of each neuromuscular technique including:

    1. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation (PNF).
    2. Brunnstrom.
    3. Neurodevelopmental Techniques (NDT).
    4. Sensory Integration (SI).
    5. Rood.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify the basic principles and theory of NDT childhood.
    2. Identify the purpose of NDT approach.
    3. Given a treatment plan, design NDT treatment techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.
    4. Identify/discuss the basic principles and theory of SI.
    5. Identify the purpose of the SI approach.
    6. Given a treatment plan, design SI treatment techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.
    7. Identify/discuss the basic principles of Rood.
    8. Identify the goals/purpose of Rood approach.
    9. Given a treatment plan, design Rood treatment techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.
    10. Identify/discuss the basic principles of PNF.
    11. Identify the goals/purpose of PNF approach.
    12. Given a treatment plan, design PNF treatment techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.
    13. Identify/discuss the basic principles and theory of Brunnstrom.
    14. Identify the goals/purpose of Brunnstrom approach.
    15. Given a treatment plan, design Brunnstrom treatment techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to given a treatment plan, identify and describe the applications of various neurological techniques for selected neurological disorders citing rationale.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Compare and contrast the basic principles of each neurological approach.
    2. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of each neurological technique.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the etiology, clinical manifestations and treatment of selected neurological conditions.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe the etiology and clinical manifestations of central nervous system lesions.
    2. Describe spasticity and pathological reflexes as it relates to neurological conditions.
    3. Describe emergency and medical management of patients with acute neurological conditions.
    4. Describe continuing medical and pharmacologcial management of patients with acute and progressive neuromuscular impairments
    5. Discuss the purpose and value of the neurological examinations as performed by the physical therapist
    6. Describe levels of arousal, mentation and common cognitive deficits in neurologically impaired patients.
    7. Describe neurological examinations commonly performed by a physician for neurologically impaired patients.
    8. Describe the physical therapy management of patients with commonly seen neuromuscular conditions including, but not limited to: CVA, acquired brain injury, spinal cord injury, Parkinson’s disease, multiple sclerosis, polyneuropathy, peripheral nerve injury.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the role of the PTA in treating the neurologically impaired patient.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss/identify the role of the PTA in treatment of neurologically impaired patients.
    2. Discuss the role of the PTA in the application of techniques of neurological treatments.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the role of the PTA in discharge planning and follow up care for patients with neurological disorders.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss/identify the role of the PTA in discharge planning for patients with neurological disorders.
    2. Discuss/identify the role of the PTA in follow up care for patients with neurological disorders.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the psychosocial aspects of neurological disorders and their impact on physical therapy treatment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the psychosocial aspects of neurological disorders and their impact on physical therapy treatment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction to class
      1. Neuro mind set
    2. Cerebral Vascular Accidents
      1. Definition
      2. Demographics
      3. Risk Factors of Stroke
      4. Prevention of Stroke
      5. Etiology
      6. Transient Ischemic Attack
      7. CVA / Medical Intervention
      8. Recovery from Stroke
      9. Stroke Syndromes
      10. Clinical Findings
      11. Complications of Stroke
    3. Facilitation / Inhibition Techniques
      1. Proprioceptive Facilitation
      2. Exteroceptive Stimulation Techniques
      3. Vestibular Stimulation Techniques
      4. Other facilitatory techniques
    4. Brunnstroms Movement Therapy in Hemiplegia
      1. Signe Brunnstrom
      2. Basic tenets of Brunnstrom’s Theory
      3. Brunnstrom’s stages of recovery
      4. Treatment principles using Brunnstrom approach
    5. Motor Development a Motor Control
      1. Motor Control
      2. Stages of Motor Control
      3. Directional concepts of development
      4. Gross motor milestones
      5. Fine motor milestones
      6. Motor development, chronologically speaking
      7. Motor development necessary for Neuro?
      8. Review of primitive reflexes
      9. Review of Righting Reactions
      10. Review of Equilibrium Reactions
    6. Motor Control and Motor Learning
      1. Review of motor control
      2. Postural control
      3. Development of postural control
      4. Righting reactions
      5. Protective reactions
      6. Equilibrium reactions
      7. Postural Control
      8. Nashner’s Model of Postural Control
      9. Motor learning
      10. Open vs. Closed tasks
      11. Effects of practice
    7. Neurodevelopmental Treatment (NDT)
      1. Berta and Karl Bobath
      2. About NDT
      3. 4 objectives of NDT for the child with cerebral palsy
      4. Goal of physical therapy treatment with NDT
      5. NDT approach
      6. Key points of control
      7. Dynamic Trunk
      8. Principles of Handling
      9. Reflex inhibiting postures
    8. Neuro Anatomy
      1. Overview of nervous system
      2. Foundation of nervous system
      3. Structures and functions of the central nervous system
      4. Deep structures of cerebral cortex
      5. Cerebellum
      6. Brain stem
      7. Spinal Cord
      8. Components of the spinal cord
      9. Peripheral nervous system
      10. Cranial Nerves
      11. Spinal Nerves
      12. Muscle spindle
      13. Golgi Tendon Organ
      14. Autonomic Nervous System
      15. Cerebral Circulation
      16. Reaction to Injury
    9. Cerebral Palsy
      1. Definition
      2. Incidence
      3. Etiology
      4. Prenatal causes
      5. Perinatal causes
      6. Post natal causes
      7. Classification
      8. Diagnosis
      9. Impairments associated with cerebral palsy
      10. Treatment of cerebral palsy
    10. TBI
      1. Statistics
      2. Causes
      3. Classification of brain injuries
      4. Secondary problems associated with traumatic brain injuries
      5. Evaluation
      6. Glasgow Coma Scale
      7. Patient problem areas
      8. PT intervention
      9. Rancho scales of cognitive function
      10. PT during inpatient rehabilitation
      11. Treatment strategies
      12. Discharge strategies
    11. Proprioceptive Neuromuscular Facilitation (PNF)
      1. Definition
      2. PNF in general
      3. Principles of PNF
      4. Contraindications to PNF
      5. Basic procedures for facilitation
      6. PNF techniques
      7. PNF techniques used to achieve a particular goal
      8. Patterns of facilitation
    12. Multiple Sclerosis
      1. Definition
      2. Statistics
      3. Etiology
      4. Pathophysiology
      5. Clinical symptoms of MS
      6. Patterns of symptoms
      7. Clinical manifestations
      8. Types of MS
      9. Exacerbating factors
      10. Diagnosis
      11. Prognosis
      12. Medical management
      13. Physical therapy management
    13. Parkinson’s Disease
      1. Definition
      2. Statistics
      3. Etiology
      4. Primary Parkinson’s
      5. Secondary Parkinson’s
      6. Post infectious Parkinson’s
      7. Toxic Parkinson’s
      8. Pharmaceutical Parkinson’s
      9. Metabolic causes
      10. Parkinsonian Syndrome
      11. Pathophysiology
      12. Clinical manifestations
      13. Functional manifestations
      14. Direct impairments
      15. Diagnosis
      16. Disease course
      17. Medical management
      18. Surgical management
      19. Rehabilitative management
    14. Spinal Cord Injury (SCI)
      1. Statistics
      2. Causes of SCI
      3. Life expectancy
      4. Spinal anatomy review
      5. Areas of spinal cord most commonly injured
      6. Naming the level of injury
      7. Classification of injury
      8. Neurological level
      9. Mechanism of injury
      10. Medical intervention
      11. Recovery
      12. Pathological changes following SCI
      13. Types of lesions
      14. Signs and symptoms of spinal cord injury
      15. Complications of SCI
      16. Functional potential in SCI
    15. Sensory Integration Therapy (SI)
      1. Definition
      2. Application to adults
      3. Adaptive response
      4. SI therapy
      5. Purposes of SI system
      6. Sensory system and problems associated with them
      7. Characteristics of SI dysfunction
    16. Neuroevaluation
      1. Role of PTA in neuroevaluation: Data collection
      2. Vital signs
      3. Sensory
      4. ROM
      5. Strength
      6. Righting reactions
      7. Balance
      8. Gait
      9. Functional skills
      10. Tips for data collection

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2120 - Neuromuscular Physical Therapy-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2130  

    This course is designed to correlate the principles of neuromuscular approaches with clinical application of neuromuscular techniques. Emphasis will be placed on “hands on” practical experiences with more complex exercise techniques and procedures for neurological conditions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate neuromuscular techniques for facilitating and inhibiting abnormal tone.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe normal and abnormal tone including spasticity, flaccidity, and rigidity.
    2. Describe and demonstrate methods of identifying and describing abnormal tone.
    3. Identify components present and missing in various movement patterns.
    4. Demonstrate techniques commonly used to inhibit and facilitate including Rood, Brunnstrom, and PNF.
    5. Relate the development of normal movement patterns to functional outcomes and coordination.
    6. Recognize and describe appropriate and inappropriate response to inhibition and facilitation techniques.
    7. Utilize hand placement and verbal cues to obtain desired movement pattern.
    8. Describe and discuss typical movement patterns in the patient with adult hemiplegia and the stages of recovery from abnormal movement patterns.
    9. Describe the role of weight‐bearing activities in improving tone/weight‐bearing activities in the patient with adult hemiplegia.
    10. Identify compensatory motor responses in abnormal movement patterns.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate activities related to the developmental sequence.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the developmental stages.
    2. Identify key features of each phase of the developmental sequence.
    3. Relate developmental sequencing to stages of recovery in the patient with a neurological impairment.
    4. Select and perform patient appropriate activities within each phase of the developmental sequence for selected diagnoses.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will implement components of a treatment plan under the supervision of a physical therapist using problem solving when provided with a selected treatment plan for a patient with neuromuscular impairment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe, discuss, and perform neuromuscular techniques appropriate for the patient’s diagnosis and impairments utilizing “mock” patient.
    2. Discuss and describe indications, contraindications and precautions and safety risks for the patient with neuromuscular impairment including cues requiring termination of treatment.
    3. Discuss the role of functional training and adaptive equipment for the patient with a neuromuscular impairment.
    4. Demonstrate safe effective patient handling, draping and positioning for the patient with neuromuscular impairment.
    5. Describe the role of family and caregiver in the management and education of the patient with neuromuscular impairment.
    6. Write a daily progress note and home exercise for patient with neuromuscular impairment.
    7. Discuss and describe how to modify a treatment program based on a patients symptoms and responses to treatment within the plan of care.
    8. Describe appropriate PTA response to inappropriate behaviors commonly noted when treating a patient with a neurological impairment.
    9. Demonstrate safe and effective motor function interventions for the neurologically impaired patient including gait and balance activities.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate and describe the appropriate role of the PTA in the management of the patient with neuromuscular impairment.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform data collection skills appropriate for the neurologically impaired patient that are necessary to implement and continue the plan of care, including balance, coordination, sensation and level of arousal, mentation and cognition
    2. Describe participation in discharge planning appropriate to the PTA scope of practice.
    3. Identify occurrences requiring consultation with a supervising physical therapist prior to implementing or continuing the plan of care.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to integrate issues of gender, culture, life span, and socioeconomic status into the treatment approach to the neurologically impaired patient.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe how a patient’s age, gender, culture, or socioeconomic status may alter the treatment of a patient with neurological impairment.
    2. Describe methods to reduce the impact of cultural barriers on goal attainment.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to access research information regarding neuromuscular physical therapy via the Internet and paper based library resources.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Develop and complete an oral presentation on an assigned topic.
    2. Provide a bibliography demonstrating use of library resources.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Normal Movement Lab
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. identify components of normal movement during functional activities
        2. identify what omponent is missing during abnormal movement
        3. demonstrate and describe any abnormal compensatory responses when an essential component of normal movement is missing
      2. Special Topics covered:
        1. Motor control analysis
        2. Observation of normal/abnormal movements
          1. Sitting
          2. Supine to sit
          3. Sit to stand
          4. Standing
    2. Abnormal Movement
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. observe neurological clients performing functional skills on a videotape and identify gross abnormal movement patterns being utilized by the neurological client
        2. experience a simulation of how a client with abnormal movement patterns may feel during functional activities
        3. accurately describe the patterns of hypertonicity
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Videotapes of neurological clients with abnormal tone
        2. Simulation of pathological reflex patterns and abnormal tone
        3. Typical abnormal tone in adult hemiplegia
    3. Positioning and Bed Mobility
      1. Objective‐ the student will be able to:
        1. discuss goals of positioning in acute stages and its impact on potential recovery
        2. identify the appropriate postures for the neurological client when supine, side‐lying, and sitting in a chair
        3. describe the position of dynamic alignment in sitting
        4. using correct technique, demonstrate positioning the neurological client in supine, side‐lying or sitting position
        5. demonstrate techniques for bed mobility activities
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Typical abnormal posture in adult hemiplegia
        2. Dynamic alignment in sitting
        3. Positioning of neurologic client
          1. Goals of positioning
          2. Supine
          3. Side‐lying
          4. Sitting
        4. Bed mobility
          1. Bridging activities
          2. Rolling to side‐lying, supine
          3. Moving up in bed
          4. Lying to sitting
    4. Facilitation and Inhibition of Tone and Movement
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. identify and accurately apply various neuromuscular techniques to facilitate and inhibit abnormal tone.
        2. discuss the rate of stimulation as it applies to four rules of sensory stimulation and motor output
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Facilitation techniques
          1. Exteroceptive
          2. Proprioceptive
          3. Vestibular
        2. Inhibitory techniques
          1. General - neutral warmth, slow stroking, slow gentle shaking, slow vestibular rocking, tonic labyrinthine inverted
          2. Specific - pressure, joint compression, traction, prolong icing
        3. Rules of sensory input and motor output
    5. Mat Activities: Trunk Control and Mobility
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. demonstrate neruomuscular techniques to improve trunk mobility and stability during sitting
        2. relate the importance of trunk and limb alignment
        3. discuss the goals of performing activities of bridging and lower trunk rotation
        4. demonstrate how mobility and stability can be developed during bridging and lower trunk rotation
        5. demonstrate one activity to improve controlled mobility during bridging
      2. Special topics covered:
        1. Bridging
          1. Goals
          2. Techniques - mobility, stability, controlled mobility
        2. Lower trunk rotation
          1. Goals
          2. Techniques
        3. Rolling
          1. Goals
          2. Technique
    6. Upper Extremity Activities
      1. Objective‐‐the student will be able to:
        1. discuss the importance of upper extremity treatment in the neurological client
        2. discuss the complications of painful and/or subluxation of the shoulder and reflex sympathy dystrophy that are often seen in the client with neurological dysfunctions
        3. demonstrate/discuss precautions in handling the upper extremity of the client with a neurological problem.
        4. demonstrate neuromuscular techniques to mobilize the neurological client’s scapula
        5. demonstrate proper way to hold a client’s hand to inhibit tone or avoid increasing tone
        6. demonstrate/describe the position of dynamic alignment when the neurologic client is sitting
        7. demonstrate/describe the sequence of activities when treating the upper extremity
        8. demonstrate various neuromuscular techniques/activities to improve mobility
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Upper extremity complications in the neurologically impaired patient
        2. Upper extremity neuromuscular activities/techniques
          1. Purposes
          2. Mobilization of scapula
          3. Mobilization of the hand
        3. Treatment: basic components of normal movement and dynamic sitting posture
          1. Body on limb
          2. Body and limb together
          3. Limb on body
          4. Functional activity
    7. Neuromuscular Techniques for Transfers
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. discuss why going supine to sit is more therapeutic when it is performed on the involved side
        2. discuss why a modified pivot transfer is preferred over a standing pivot transfer with neurologically impaired client
        3. demonstrate techniques to assist a neurologic client to achieve normal components of movement during the following transitional movements:
          1. supine to sit
          2. scooting while sitting
          3. modified pivot transfer
          4. sit to stand
        4. demonstrate techniques to facilitate and mobilize the trunk of neurologic client in order to improve anterior/posterior tilts and lateral weight shift
        5. demonstrate various techniques to improve trunk control in sitting
        6. discuss components of movement necessary for an effective and safe transfer
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Trunk mobilization
          1. Purposes
          2. Anterior/posterior mobilization technique
          3. Lateral mobilization technique
        2. Facilitation techniques for pelvis
        3. Transitional sit to stand technique
        4. Neuromuscular transfer techniques
          1. Patient preparation
          2. Scooting
          3. Sit to stand
          4. Modified transfer
    8. Neuromuscular Techniques for Standing and Gait
      1. Objective‐‐ the student will be able to:
        1. discuss/identify the components of movement necessary for normal sit to stand, balanced standing, weight shifting during standing and ambulation
        2. discuss how “missing” components will affect the neurologically impaired client’s ability to perform sit to stand, balanced standing, weight shifting during standing and ambulation
        3. Demonstrate various neuromuscular techniques to facilitate normal sit to stand, balanced standing, weight shifting during standing and ambulation
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Sit to stand
          1. Essential normal components
          2. Common problems
          3. Neuromuscular techniques
        2. Balanced standing
          1. Essential normal components
          2. Common problems
          3. Neuromuscular techniques
        3. Weight shifting
          1. Essential normal components
          2. Common problems
          3. Neuromuscular techniques
        4. Stance, phase of ambulation
          1. Essential normal components
          2. Common problems
          3. Neuromuscular techniques
        5. Swing phase of ambulation
          1. Essential normal components
          2. Common problems
          3. Neuromuscular techniques

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2130 - Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2140  

    This course is designed to provide the theoretical foundation for the advanced management of musculoskeletal conditions. Discussion includes injury prevention and specialized approaches to physical therapy treatment of the spine and extremities.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the principles of musculoskeletal evaluation performed by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe concepts of concave/convex rule regarding joint mobility.
    2. Describe special tests used in orthopedic evaluation and identify significance of the tests.
    3. Discuss the significance of goniometric assessment for the patient with musculoskeletal dysfunction.
    4. Discuss the significance of manual muscle testing for the patient with musculoskeletal dysfunction.
    5. Describe tests and measures used to assess functional range of motion

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the PTA in the treatment of patients with selected orthopedic conditions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Differentiate role of the PT vs. PTA in the management of a patient with musculoskeletal impairment
    2. Describe an effective PT/PTA relationship in the management of patients with musculoskeletal pathologies
    3. Identify components of the PT plan of care appropriate for intervention by the PTA.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the etiology, clinical manifestations and physical therapy management of selected orthopedic conditions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe common causes and symptoms of tendonitis, bursitis, fractures, arthritis and related disorders, compression syndromes and musculoskeletal disorders of the spine.
    2. Describe selective tissue tensioning techniques for bone, muscle, tendon, ligaments, meniscus and discs.
    3. Describe appropriate treatment pathways for tendonitis, bursitis, fractures, arthritis, compression syndromes and musculoskeletal disorders of the spine.
    4. Discuss the principles of and rationale for selected orthopedic interventions including but not limited to soft tissue, mobilization, and stretching.
    5. Discuss the principles of and rationale for joint mobilization.
      1. Discuss the role of the PTA in joint mobilization.
    6. Demonstrate through problem solving the ability to identify appropriate physical therapy management of selected orthopedic conditions.
      1. Discuss appropriate use of electrotherapeutics, compression and traction modalities with orthopedic conditions.
      2. Demonstrate special tests that indicate specific musculoskeletal problems of the spine and extremities.
      3. Discuss indications/contraindications of PT modalities as it relates to musculoskeletal problems.
    7. Use a case study to describe the physical therapy management of a patient with musculoskeletal impairment.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction
      1. Connective Tissue
      2. Inflammation
      3. Pathologies and Impairment
    2. The Physical Therapy Evaluation and Plan of Care
      1. The PT evaluation and special tests
      2. The role of the PTA in data collection for patents with musculoskeletal pathologies
      3. Exercise/function for patients with musculoskeletal conditions
    3. Overview of Musculoskeletal Pathologies/Impairments
    4. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Shoulder
    5. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Elbow
    6. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Hand/Wrist
    7. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Cervical/Spine/TMJ
    8. Overview of Treatment of Gait Abnormalities and Dysfunction
    9. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Hip
    10. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Knee
    11. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Foot/Ankle
    12. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Thoracic and Spine
    13. Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy for the Lumbar Spine/Pelvis
    14. The Role of PTA in Treatment of Patients with Musculoskeletal Impairments

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2140 - Musculoskeletal Physical Therapy-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2190  

    Correlated laboratory practice designed to provide experience in the physical therapy management of musculoskeletal conditions. The focus will be on advanced therapeutic exercise and specialized techniques for musculoskeletal conditions.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and implement treatment techniques for the management of selected orthopedic conditions.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate effective patient management techniques including positioning, draping, and hand placement for selected treatment techniques.
    2. Demonstrate awareness of patient safety in the application of physical therapy techniques for the musculoskeletal patient including tendonitis, bursitis, fractures, sprains, strains and compression syndromes.
    3. Demonstrate passive stretching and related soft tissue techniques appropriate to the role of the PTA.
    4. Describe the principles of joint mobilization and recognize the limitations of the PTA in the application of mobilization techniques.
    5. Demonstrate proper exercise form for selected exercise techniques.
    6. Demonstrate the ability to document the treatment of the patient with musculoskeletal impairments in a manner consistent with regulatory and ethical standards of the PTA.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, given a patient profile and treatment plan, students will be able to apply appropriate intervention utilizing problem solving skills appropriate for the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Recognize when interventions should not be applied and report to the PT.
    2. Recognize when appropriate interventions are beyond the scope of the PTA and report to the PT.
    3. Identify contraindications and precautions for the treatment of common musculoskeletal conditions.
    4. Select appropriate therapeutic exercise for the management of musculoskeletal impairments of the spine and extremities within the plan of care developed by the physical therapist utilizing sound rationale.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to provide instruction to patients and caregivers regarding exercise programs and home follow-up utilizing positive communication skills and teaching techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe and demonstrate exercises using appropriate form and verbal and nonverbal cues.
    2. Explain various exercise related activities using effective teaching methodology.
    3. Develop and instruct an effective home exercise plan directed towards established outcomes.
    4. Consider individual differences, values, and preferences related to patient learning and treatment compliance.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe and appropriate use of equipment in the management of the musculoskeletal patient including selection, set-up, and monitoring of patient techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Select equipment to support activities indicated in the plan of care developed by the physical therapist
    2. Identify safety risk of selected equipment and appropriate emergency responses.
    3. Describe the role of medicine balls, physioballs, steps and ramps, fitter, BAPS, and resistive equipment in the exercise management of patients with musculoskeletal impairments.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the ability to adjust treatment technique within the plan of care developed by the physical therapist in response to physiological and psychological changes in the patient and appropriate reporting expectations.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Apply selected data collection techniques for the purposes of carrying out the plan of care and report data as appropriate to the PT.
    2. Explain the significance of the PT assessment and evaluation in determining the PT plan of care.
    3. Describe common orthopedic assessment techniques and their significance to the PT plan of care.
    4. Recognize and report adverse responses to treatment in the patient with musculoskeletal impairment.
    5. Problem solve, recognize, and report the need for alternative methods of treatment.
    6. Use data collected to adjust, modify, and progress an exercise program within the plan of care as necessary for progression toward outcomes identified by the PT.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the PTA in the treatment of patients with musculoskeletal impairments.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Participate effectively in the discharge of planning of patient with musculoskeletal impairments.
    2. Describe an effective PT/PTA relationship in the management of the patient with musculoskeletal impairments.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Demonstration of Orthopedic Evaluation as Performed by the Physical Therapist
      1. Objective the Student will be able to:
        1. verbalize the components of the orthopedic evaluation
        2. recognize the signs and symptoms that comprise the clinical picture of:
          1. contractile vsinert tissue problems
          2. hip, knee, ankle, and spine pathology
          3. bursitis vstendonitis
        3. identify the role of the PTA in the orthopedic evaluation
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Subjective evaluation
        2. General objective evaluation
          1. AROM
          2. PROM, joint end feel, and joint play
          3. Ligament testing
          4. Resistance tests
          5. Neurological tests - motor, sensory, reflexes and tension tests
        3. Specialized tests - spine, wrist, and knee
        4. Recording
        5. Role of PTA in recognizing and reporting patient response
    2. Soft Tissue Treatment Techniques
      1. Objective the Student will be able to:
        1. given a treatment plan, demonstrate safe and effective treatment applications of transverse friction massage, soft tissue mobilization, trigger points, and auto mobilization to include:
          1. appropriate patient positioning and draping
          2. appropriate PTA position
          3. appropriate hand placement
          4. patient instruction
          5. explanation of treatment
          6. stabilization
          7. treatment duration
          8. termination of treatment
        2. communicate and instruct patients/family in therapeutic exercises utilizing:
          1. appropriate terminology
          2. appropriate communication skills
          3. principles of teaching
        3. utilization problem solving in the selection of appropriate therapeutic exercises for a given patient problem
        4. modify therapeutic technique based on patient’s physiological response
        5. describe the techniques of mobilization for orthopedic conditions that were demonstrated in class for:
          1. wrists
          2. shoulder
          3. knee
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Friction massage
          1. Treatment principles
          2. Common sites of treatment in peripheral joints
            1. Tendons
            2. Muscles
            3. Ligaments
          3. Other associated treatments
            1. Traditional exercise
            2. Modalities
          4. Patient problem solving
        2. Trigger points
          1. Types of trigger points
          2. Palpation of trigger points
          3. Treatment technique principles
          4. Treatment of specific areas
          5. Associate TX techniques and exercise
        3. Soft tissue mobilization
          1. Palpation and soft tissue mobility
          2. Techniques for soft tissue mobilization
          3. Associated treatment techniques of neuromuscular reeducation
          4. Patient problem solving
    3. Treatment Techniques for Knee/Ankle/Foot
      1. Objective the Student will be able to:
        1. given a treatment plan, skillfully implement a therapeutic program for the management of soft tissue and joint lesions of the knee/ankle/foot to include:
          1. traditional exercises
          2. modalities/physical agents
          3. specialized techniques
        2. given a treatment plan, skillfully implement a therapeutic exercise program of the management of common surgical procedures for the knee/ankle/foot.
        3. demonstrate safe and appropriate use of exercise equipment as related to orthopedic conditions of knee/ankle/foot.
    4. Fractures
      1. Objective the Student will be able to:
        1. utilize problem solving in the selection of therapeutic exercise/physical agents for post fracture, given patient treatment plan.
        2. demonstrate skillful implementation of treatment program for the management of fractures during immobilization and post immobilization.
        3. modify treatment technique/exercise based on physiological response to the patient.
      2. Specific topics covered:
        1. Treatment protocols for fractures of humerus, colles fracture, hip, and ankle
        2. Exercise programs
        3. Exercise equipment
    5. Treatment Techniques for Pathology of the Spine
      1. Objective: the student will be able to:
        1. identify and describe the techniques of soft tissue mobilization, Williams exercise and Mckensie approach associated with cervical and lumbar spine.
        2. given a treatment plan, skillfully accurately, and effectively implement therapeutic exercise program to include:
          1. appropriate patient positioning and draping
          2. appropriate PTA position
          3. appropriate hand placement
          4. patient instruction
          5. explanation to patient
          6. stabilization
          7. treatment duration
          8. precautions
          9. termination of treatment
        3. modify treatment technique based on patient’s physiological response
        4. communicate and instruct patients in appropriate treatment techniques/procedures as directed by a supervising PT
        5. identify the role of the PTA in management of spine pathologies
        6. verbalize appropriate progression of treatment based on patient’s response, given a treatment plan.

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2190 - Physical Therapy Procedures 3-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2340  

    This course provides the opportunity for the physical therapist assistant student to develop knowledge related to the principles of electricity and electrotherapy for selected treatment modalities. Discussion of EMG and biofeedback is included.

    Billable Contact Hours: 1

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss principles related to the use of electrotherapy in physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and discuss the basic principles of nerve and muscle physiology.
    2. Identify the characteristics of nerve and muscle excitation with electrical stimulation associated with normal physiological responses.
    3. Compare and contrast the characteristics of nerve and muscle excitation that occur in normal physiology with those that occur in selected pathologies.
    4. Describe the general indications and contraindications of electrotherapy in Physical Therapy.
    5. Identify the role and function of the Physcial Therapy Assistant in the application of electrotherapy treatments.
    6. Identify the various diagnostic tests associated with the use of electrical stimulation that are administered by a physician.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe principles of various forms of DC (direct current) electricity that are related to the therapeutic process.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the indications/contraindications and rationale of medical galvanism (Direct Current) in physical therapy practice.
    2. Identify, discuss, and state rationale of HVGS (High Voltage Galvanic Stimulation) as an electrotherapeutic intervention.
    3. Identify, discuss and state rational of HVGS (High Voltage Galvanic Stimulation) in wound healing
    4. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of HVGS as part of the PT plan of care.
    5. Identify, discuss, and state rationale of the procedure of iontophoresis in electrotherapeutic intervention.
    6. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of iontophoresis as part of the PT plan of care.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the principles of various forms of AC (Alternating Current) electricity that are related to the therapeutic process.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the indications/contraindications and rationale of AC (Alternating Current) in physical therapy practice.
    2. Identify, discuss, and state the rationale of Russian Current as an electrotherapeutic intervention.
    3. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of Russian Current as part of the pT plan of care.
    4. Identify, discuss, and state the rationale of FES (Functional Electrical Stimulation) as an electrotherapeutic intervention.
    5. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of FES as part of the pT plan of care.
    6. Identify, discuss, and state the rationale of IFC (Interferential Current) as an electrotherapeutic intervention.
    7. Identify the advantages and disadvantages of IFC as part of the pT plan of care.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the relationship between electrical stimulation and pain management.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and state the principles and conditions, which indicate the use of TENS (Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation) as part of the PT plan of care.
    2. Discuss the rationale and procedure for TENS.
    3. Describe the various treatment protocols performed with TENS.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe various biophysical agents in electrotherapeutic plan of care.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the role and purpose of biofeedback as it relates to the patient’s plan of care.
    2. Define and identify the role and purpose of light therapy as it relates to the patient’s plan of care.
    3. Define and identify the role of Microcurrent Electrical Neuromuscular stimulation as it relates to the patient’s plan of care.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to as part of the discharge plan, develop and instruct in an electrotherapeutic home device.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify the indications and contraindications of a discharge plan with electrostimulation equipment.
    2. Develop an instructional program for the patient who is discharged with an electrostimulation unit.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to collaborate, research, and present a topic on various alternative treatment approaches with the use of electrotherapeutic principles.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Work with a team utilizing the group process and appropriate teaching strategies to develop a presentation on a special topic in physical therapy associated with electrotherapeutic principles.
    2. Demonstrate basic information competency by accessing project related materials through Internet resources.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Therapeutic Principles of Electricity
      1. Ion flow with electrical stimulation
      2. Critical factors for nerve excitation using electrical stimulation
        1. Stimulation parameters ‐‐ significance to stimulation
          1. Intensity
          2. Pulse duration
          3. Speed of rise
          4. Pulse rate
        2. Electrode size and orientation, monopolar vs. bipolar
        3. Impedance
      3. Healthy muscle response to electrical stimulation
        1. Excitability
        2. Accommodation
        3. Strength duration curve
      4. Compensation of characteristics of nerve excitation with electrical stimulation and normal physiological stimulation
      5. General uses of electrical stimulation ‐‐ direct current vs. alternating current
      6. Role of the PTA in electrotherapy treatment and modification of treatment parameters
    2. Medical Galvanism (Low Volt DC)
      1. Medical galvanism ‐‐ definition
      2. Wallerian degeneration
        1. Description ‐‐ degrees of injury
        2. Changes in muscle ‐‐ physiologically and electrically
      3. Treatment
        1. Equipment type and waveform
        2. Motor point
        3. Techniques of stimulation
          1. Motor point
          2. Nerve trunk
          3. Mass stimulation
        4. Treatment guidelines
        5. Treatment goals
      4. Indications
      5. Contraindications
      6. Chemical effects at polus
      7. Other uses
    3. Functional Electrical Stimulation (FES)
      1. FES ‐‐ definition, waveform, characteristics of current
      2. Indications/common diagnosis
      3. Contraindications
      4. Equipment ‐‐ characteristics of stimulation
      5. Techniques/uses of FES
        1. Maintain range of motion
        2. Correction of contractures
        3. Reeducation
        4. Inhibition of spasticity
        5. Strengthening
        6. Orthosis
    4. Combined Ultrasound with Electrical Stimulation and Moist Heat with Electrical Stimulation (ES)
      1. Ultrasound with ES ‐‐ definitions
        1. Indications
        2. Contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Equipment
        5. Patient preparation
        6. Technique
      2. Moist health with ES
        1. Indications
        2. Precautions and contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Patient preparation
        5. Technique
    5. Electrical Stimulation for Wound Healing
      1. Wound care with ES ‐‐ definition
        1. Indications
        2. Contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Equipment
        5. Patient preparation
        6. Technique
      2. Wound care with ES
        1. Treatment steps and protocol
        2. Ulcer preparation and concomitant therapy
        3. Documentation
    6. High Voltage Galvanic Stimulation (HVGS)
      1. Definition
      2. Pulse parameters
        1. Pulse duration
        2. Peak current
        3. Pulse rate ‐‐ modes
        4. Pulse charge ‐‐ average current
      3. Comparison to previous stimulators
      4. Physiological responses and advantages or parameters in treatment
      5. Disadvantages
      6. Indications
      7. Contraindications
      8. General guidelines
      9. Techniques ‐‐ protocols
    7. Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulations (TENS)
      1. Pain
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Types of pain
        4. Perception of pain
      2. Spasms
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Pain spasm cycle
      3. Pain theories
      4. TENS
        1. Definition
        2. Role of TENS
        3. Effectiveness
        4. Indications
        5. Contraindications/precautions
      5. Stimulation parameters and equipment
      6. Types of stimulating modes and techniques
    8. Interferential Current (IFC)
      1. Interferential Current (IFC) ‐‐ definition
      2. Concepts or principles
        1. Constructive interference
        2. Destructive interference
        3. “BEAT” frequency
      3. Patterns of interference
        1. Static
        2. Scanning
        3. Stereodynamic
      4. Advantages
      5. Indications
      6. Contraindications
      7. Treatment parameters
    9. Iontophoresis
      1. Iontophoresis ‐‐ definition
      2. Review of ion migration and Ohm’s law
      3. Review of skin function as pathway of current
      4. Principles
        1. Relationship of force to intensity and resistance
        2. Continuous DC current for ion migration and activity under electrodes
        3. Ion transfer effectiveness
      5. Advantages
      6. Indications
      7. Contraindications
      8. Equipment
      9. Techniques and medications
    10. Electrodiagnostic Tests
      1. Electrodiagnostic tests - definition/purpose of tests and general description of setup
        1. Evoked potential
        2. Nerve conduction velocity
        3. Centrally evoked potential
        4. EMG
      2. Physician tests
      3. PT tests
      4. Role of PTA
    11. Biofeedback
      1. Definition
      2. Goal
      3. Mechanisms or how it works
      4. Indications or uses of biofeedback
        1. Relaxation
        2. Muscle reeducation
      5. Requirements for success of biofeedback
      6. Equipment
      7. Conditional. Therapeutic Principles of Electricity
      8. Ion flow with electrical stimulation
      9. Critical factors for nerve excitation using electrical stimulation
        1. Stimulation parameters ‐‐ significance to stimulation
          1. Intensity
          2. Pulse duration
          3. Speed of rise
          4. Pulse rate
        2. Electrode size and orientation, monopolar vs. bipolar
        3. Impedance
      10. Healthy muscle response to electrical stimulation
        1. Excitability
        2. Accommodation
        3. Strength duration curve
      11. Compensation of characteristics of nerve excitation with electrical stimulation and normal physiological stimulation
      12. General uses of electrical stimulation ‐‐ direct current vs. alternating current
      13. Role of the PTA in electrotherapy treatment and modification of treatment parameters
    12. Medical Galvanism (Low Volt DC)
      1. Medical galvanism ‐‐ definition
      2. Wallerian degeneration
        1. Description ‐‐ degrees of injury
        2. Changes in muscle ‐‐ physiologically and electrically
      3. Treatment
        1. Equipment type and waveform
        2. Motor point
        3. Techniques of stimulation
          1. Motor point
          2. Nerve trunk
          3. Mass stimulation
        4. Treatment guidelines
        5. Treatment goals
      4. Indications
      5. Contraindications
      6. Chemical effects at polus
      7. Other uses
    13. Functional Electrical Stimulation (FES)
      1. FES ‐‐ definition, waveform, characteristics of current
      2. Indications/common diagnosis
      3. Contraindications
      4. Equipment ‐‐ characteristics of stimulation
      5. Techniques/uses of FES
        1. Maintain range of motion
        2. Correction of contractures
        3. Reeducation
        4. Inhibition of spasticity
        5. Strengthening
        6. Orthosis
    14. Combined Ultrasound with Electrical Stimulation and Moist Heat with Electrical Stimulation (ES)
      1. Ultrasound with ES ‐‐ definitions
        1. Indications
        2. Contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Equipment
        5. Patient preparation
        6. Technique
      2. Moist health with ES
        1. Indications
        2. Precautions and contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Patient preparation
        5. Technique
    15. Electrical Stimulation for Wound Healing
      1. Wound care with ES ‐‐ definition
        1. Indications
        2. Contraindications
        3. Effects
        4. Equipment
        5. Patient preparation
        6. Technique
      2. Wound care with ES
        1. Treatment steps and protocol
        2. Ulcer preparation and concomitant therapy
        3. Documentation
    16. High Voltage Galvanic Stimulation (HVGS)
      1. Definition
      2. Pulse parameters
        1. Pulse duration
        2. Peak current
        3. Pulse rate ‐‐ modes
        4. Pulse charge ‐‐ average current
      3. Comparison to previous stimulators
      4. Physiological responses and advantages or parameters in treatment
      5. Disadvantages
      6. Indications
      7. Contraindications
      8. General guidelines
      9. Techniques ‐‐ protocols
    17. Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulations (TENS)
      1. Pain
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Types of pain
        4. Perception of pain
      2. Spasms
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Pain spasm cycle
      3. Pain theories
      4. TENS
        1. Definition
        2. Role of TENS
        3. Effectiveness
        4. Indications
        5. Contraindications/precautions
      5. Stimulation parameters and equipment
      6. Types of stimulating modes and techniques
    18. Interferential Current (IFC)
      1. Interferential Current (IFC) ‐‐ definition
      2. Concepts or principles
        1. Constructive interference
        2. Destructive interference
        3. “BEAT” frequency
      3. Patterns of interference
        1. Static
        2. Scanning
        3. Stereodynamic
      4. Advantages
      5. Indications
      6. Contraindications
      7. Treatment parameters
    19. Iontophoresis
      1. Iontophoresis ‐‐ definition
      2. Review of ion migration and Ohm’s law
      3. Review of skin function as pathway of current
      4. Principles
        1. Relationship of force to intensity and resistance
        2. Continuous DC current for ion migration and activity under electrodes
        3. Ion transfer effectiveness
      5. Advantages
      6. Indications
      7. Contraindications
      8. Equipment
      9. Techniques and medications
    20. Electrodiagnostic Tests
      1. Electrodiagnostic tests - definition/purpose of tests and general description of setup
        1. Evoked potential
        2. Nerve conduction velocity
        3. Centrally evoked potential
        4. EMG
      2. Physician tests
      3. PT tests
      4. Role of PTA
    21. Biofeedback
      1. Definition
      2. Goal
      3. Mechanisms or how it works
      4. Indications or uses of biofeedback
        1. Relaxation
        2. Muscle reeducation
      5. Requirements for success of biofeedback
      6. Equipment
      7. Conditions

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2200 - Physical Therapy Procedures 3-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2340 

    This course will provide the physical therapist assistant student with the opportunity to apply the principles of electrotherapy to practical management in physical therapy. Procedures for advanced modality treatment for selected pathologies will be included.

    Billable Contact Hours: 1.5

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate appropriate and safe patient preparation of advanced electrotherapy modalities as indicated in the plan of care developed by the physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Demonstrate appropriate patient preparation including positioning, skin preparation, electrode placement, draping, and an explanation of treatment
    2. Use plan of care to identify appropriate intervention
    3. Gather and organize equipment as appropriate for electrotherapy modalities.
    4. Demonstrate knowledge of special safety requirements for electrotherapy modalities.
    5. Describe the features of select types of electroterapeutic equipment.
    6. Identify the role of the physical therapist and the physical therapist assistant in the application of electrotherapy interventions.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss indications, contraindications and rationale for selection of electrotherapeutic interventions.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. List contraindication to the use of various eletrotherapeutic interventions
    2. Use the medical record to identify contraindications to treatment and previous patient status
    3. Discuss the indication and rationale for electrotherapeutic interventions
    4. Correlate electrotherapeutic procedures associated with the evidence-based practices for effective outcomes

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate safe, effective implementation of select electrotherapeutic interventions as indicated in a plan of care developed by a physical therapist.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe expected and adverse response to treatment and report appropriate information to the supervising physical therapist.
    2. Use data collected to appropriately modify and progress eletrotherapeutic treatments as established in the plan of care for effective clinical outcomes.
    3. Demonstrate safe and effective application of Functional Electrical Stimulation (FES)
    4. Demonstrate safe and effective application of Transcutaneous Electrical Nerve Stimulation (TENS) intervention
    5. Demonstrate safe and effective application of High Volt Galvanic Stimulation (HVGS).
    6. Demonstrate safe and effective application of Iontophoresis intervention
    7. Demonstrate safe and effective application of biofeedback intervention
    8. Demonstrate safe and effective application of monopolar direct current (point probe-DC) intervention
    9. Demonstrate safe and effective application of combined modalities of ultrasound with electrical stimulation and hot packs.
    10. Demonstrate safe and effective application of electrical stimulation in wound care intervention
    11. Demonstrate safe and effective application of light therapy intervention
    12. Demonstrate safe and effective application of Russian Stimulation intervention
    13. Demonstrate safe and effective application of Interferential Current Stimulation (IFC)

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Safety and Patient Preparation
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Safety
        2. Electric shock/ Electric burns
          1. Description and cause of burns
        3. Key prevention
          1. Rules
          2. Instrument checklist
          3. Professional
            1. Attitude
            2. Judgment
            3. Pt acceptance of ES
            4. Know contraindications
            5. Pt education
        4. Care of equipment
          1. Responsibility
            1. Of manufacturer
            2. Hospital or facility
            3. PTA or PT staff
          2. Examples of ES devices/equipment
          3. Identification of components on ES devices
          4. Experimenting ES – parameters
        5. Intensity
        6. Pulse width
        7. Frequency
          1. Preparation for treatment
          2. Each laboratory stressed demonstration, observation and practical experience in the following areas:
            1. Indications
            2. Contraindications
            3. Anatomical sites of application
            4. Patient preparation
            5. Machine safety and use
            6. Care of equipment
    2. Monopolar and Bipolar Techniques
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Monopolar/bipolar techniques – demonstration and explanation
        2. Practical experience
    3. Motor Point/Nerve Trunk/Muscle Stimulation with DC Current
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/ protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem-solving
    4. Functional Electrical Stimulation
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. Problem solving
    5. High Voltage Galvanic Stimulation Application (HVGS)
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identify precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    6. Hot Packs and Ultrasound with Electrical Stimulation Applications
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/ protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    7. TENS Application
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    8. Iontophoresis – Standard and Phoresor Method
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    9. Biofeedback
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    10. Wound Care
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    11. Interferential Current Stimulation (IFC)
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    12. Russian Stimulation
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving
    13. Light Therapy
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. Demonstration/explanation
        2. Identifies precautions/protocols
        3. Practical experience
        4. Mock patient simulation
        5. problem solving

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2340 - Clinical Internship 1

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 1140 , PTAS 1150 , PTAS 1160 , PTAS 1170 , and PTAS 1180  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: PTAS 2350  

    Supervised clinical experience designed to provide the beginning level student with an opportunity to gain experience in various basic therapeutic practical skills and techniques. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 5

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency while performing a predetermined portion of a physical therapy treatment plan.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Provide services under the direction of a physical therapist and the supervision of a physical therapist or physical therapist assistant in a safe, responsible and respectful manner (CPI #1).
    2. Communicate verbally and non-verbally with the patient, the physical therapist, health care delivery personnel and others in an effective, appropriate and capable manner (CPI #5 ).
    3. Deliver established patient care reflecting respect for and sensitivity to individual differences (CPI #4).
    4. Recognize the impact pathology has on physical therapy care and patient safety (CPI #1, 7, 8).
    5. Demonstrate problem-solving skills in making judgments about patient care (CPI #7).
    6. Perform physical therapy interventions in a technically competent and safe manner (CPI # 8, 9, 10. 11, 12, 14).

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assist the physical therapist with specific assessment techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform data collection skills appropriately and safely and use the data collected to progress that patient within the plan of care established by the physical therapist (CPI # 1, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11).
    2. Monitor the patient response to treatment and make adjustments to interventions with the plan of care as necessary and report to supervising physical therapist (CPI # 8, 9, 10).
    3. Document patient progress effectively using SOAP note format required by the state practice act, the practice setting and other regulatory agencies (CPI #13).
    4. Recognize when intervention should not be provided due to changes in the patent’s status and reports this to the supervising physical therapist (CPI #1, 8, 9, 10, 11).
    5. Reports any changes in the patient’s status to the supervising physical therapist (CPI #8, 9, 10, 11).

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and exhibit professional behavior in written and verbal communication.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate a commitment to learning by taking a lead role in establishing clinical learning objectives, completing self-assessments and receiving feedback by the assigned CI (CPI #5).
    2. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal practice according to the federal and state statutes and APTA policy when administering physical therapy treatments (CPI #3, 4).
    3. Explain the various roles (including clinical education) of the physical therapist, physical therapist assistant in the assigned environment (CPI #2, 4).
    4. Understand the fiscal responsibilities in physical therapy patient management (CPI #3).
    5. Educate patients, family members and caregivers using relevant and effective methods to achieve patient outcomes (CPI #5).
    6. Demonstrate critical thinking in your self-assessment and development of a plan for enhancing present abilities in the clinic (CPI # 7).
    7. Demonstrate responsibility by completing the evaluation documents (Weekly Logs, CPI Self-Evaluation, and Student Evaluation of Clinical Education and the CI CPI Evaluation) and securing appropriate signatures (completion of Clinical Internship documents) and securing appropriate signatures (CPI #3)
    8. Exhibit conduct that reflects a commitment to meet the expectations of members of society receiving health care services (Successful completion of affiliation).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The student physical therapist assistant is at a novice level at this point who has had limited opportunity to apply their academic knowledge or clinical skills. During this affiliation, the students will begin to practice the data collection methods and interventions of care they have been studying to this point in the program (joint structure and function, kinesiology, therapeutic modalities, therapeutic exercises, tests and measures, functional activities). Primarily these include the technical aspects of physical therapy such as: modalities, therapeutic exercise, data collection, ADL’s and functional physical therapy techniques. The students may observe other PTA data collection and interventions techniques as available in the clinic. By the end of the affiliation the student is expected to be able to provide quality care with uncomplicated patients with consistent performance and judgment in the areas studied. The student will still require close supervision but is deemed to be safe and productive during the clinical practice.
    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2350 - Clinical Internship 2

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2340  with grade C or better 

    Corequisites: PTAS 2110  

    Supervised clinical experience designed to provide the beginning level student with an opportunity for continued practice of various basic therapeutic techniques and skills. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 5

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency while performing at least a predetermined portion of a physical therapy treatment plan.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Explain the various roles (including clinical education) of the PT and PTA in the assigned environment (CPI #4, 5).
    2. Demonstrate problem-solving skills in making judgments about patient care (CPI #7, 9).
    3. Perform physical therapy interventions in a technically competent and safe manner (CPI #1, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12,)
    4. Educate patient, family members and caregivers using relevant and effective methods to achieve patient outcomes (CPI #5, #10, #12).
    5. Participate in discharge planning and follow-up as directed by the supervising physical therapist (CPI #5).
    6. Demonstrate critical thinking in your self-assessment and development of a plan for enhancing these abilities in the clinic (CPI #1, #7).
    7. Provide services under the direction of a physical therapist and the supervision of a physical therapist assistant in a safe, responsible and respectful manner (CPI #1, 2, 3, #4).
    8. Deliver established patient care reflecting respect for and sensitivity to individual differences (CPI #4).

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to assist the physical therapist with specific assessment techniques.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Document patient progress effectively using the format required by the state practice act, the practice setting and other regulatory agencies (CPI #3).
    2. Perform required data collection skills appropriately and safely and use the data collected to progress that patient within the plan of care established by the physical therapist (CPI # 8, 9, 10, 11, 12).
    3. Recognize when interventions should not be provided due to changes in the patient’s status and reports this to the supervising physical therapist (CPI #1, 12).
    4. Monitor the patient response to treatment and make adjustments to interventions with the plan of care as necessary and report to supervising physical therapist (CPI #8, 9, 10, 11).
    5. Report any changes in the patient’s status to the supervising physical therapist (CPI #1, 8, 9, 10, 11).

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and exhibit professional behavior in written and verbal communication.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate a commitment to learning by taking a lead role in establishing clinical learning objectives, completing self-assessments and receiving feedback by the assigned (CPI #6,7).
    2. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal practice according to the state statutes and APTA policy when administering physical therapy treatments (CPI #3, 5).
    3. Communicate verbally and non-verbally with the patient, the physical therapist, health care delivery personnel, and others in an effective, appropriate, and capable manner (CPI #5).
    4. Demonstrate responsibility by completing the evaluation documents (Weekly Log Sheets, CPI Self-Evaluation, and Student Evaluation of Clerical Education and the CI CPI evaluation at both the mid-term and final evaluation) and securing appropriate signatures (Completion of Clinical Internship documents).
    5. Exhibit conduct that reflects a commitment to meet the expectations of members of society receiving health care services (Successful completion of affiliation).

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The student will be expected to practice all the basic physical therapy data collection techniques and treatment interventions and implement the plan of care as directed by the physical therapist. At the end of this affiliation, the student is expected to consistently provide quality care with simple or complex patients in a predictable environment. The student may require supervision or cueing when addressing complex problems and may still be developing efficiency in delivering treatment plans.
    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2390 - Clinical Internship 3

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2440 , PTAS 2450 , PTAS 2460 , PTAS 2470 , and PTAS 2500  all with grade C or better

    Supervised clinical experience designed to provide the advanced student with an opportunity for continued practice of basic therapeutic techniques and practice of various complex therapeutic techniques, exercises, and procedures for competent clinical application. This course is graded on a pass/fail basis. Students are required to pass this course to progress in the program.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate competency while implementing components of the plan of care determined by the physical therapist including adjustment of interventions in response to clinical changes with proper notification of the PT.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Provide services under the direction of a physical therapist and the supervision of a physical therapist or physical therapist assistant in a safe, responsible, and respectful manner. (CPI #1 ,2, 3, 5, )
    2. Document patient progress effectively using the format required by the state practice acts, the practice setting and other regulatory agencies. (CPI #1, 2, 3, )
    3. Deliver established patient care reflecting respect for and sensitivity to individual differences. (CPI #4)
    4. Participates in discharge planning as directed by the supervising physical therapist. (CPI #5, 8, 9, 10 )
    5. Perform physical therapy interventions in a technically competent and safe manner. (CPI #8, 9, 10, 11, 12)

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform components of data collection essential for carrying out the plan of care.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Perform required data collection skills appropriately and safely and use the data collected to progress that patient within the plan of care established by the physical therapist. (CPI #8, 9, 10, 11, 12)

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate and exhibit professional behavior in written and verbal communication with patients, families and members of the health care team consistent with responsibility to the public and the profession.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate an understanding of ethical and legal practice according to the state statutes and APTA policy when administering physical therapy treatments. (CPI #3, 5)
    2. Explain the various roles (including clinical education) of the PT and PTA in the assigned environment. (CPI # 4, 5)
    3. Demonstrate problem-solving skills in making judgments about patient care. (CPI #7)
    4. Monitor the patient response to treatment and make adjustments to interventions with the plan of care as necessary and report to supervising physical therapist. (CPI #8, 9, 10, 11, 12)
    5. Recognize when interventions should not be provided due to changes in the patient’s status and reports this to the supervising physical therapist. (CPI #1, 5)
    6. Report any changes in the patient’s status to the supervising physical therapist. (CPI #1, 5)
    7. Educate patient, family members and caregivers using relevant and effective methods to achieve patient outcomes. (CPI #5)
    8. Communicate verbally and non-verbally with the patient, the physical therapist, health care delivery personnel and others in an effective, appropriate and capable manner. (CPI #5)

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate terminal competencies for the physical therapist assistant.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate a commitment to learning by taking a lead role in establishing clinical learning objectives, completing self-assessments and receiving feedback by the assigned CI. (CPI #6)
    2. Demonstrate responsibility by completing the evaluation documents (Weekly Log Sheets, CPI Self-Evaluation, Student Evaluation of Clinical Education and the CI CPI evaluation) and securing appropriate signatures. (Completion of Clinical Internship documents)
    3. Exhibit conduct that reflects a commitment to meet the expectations of members of society receiving health care services. (Successful completion of affiliation)

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    This 8-week full time clinical affiliation is the final clinical practice for the student. The student will be expected to practice all the basic physical therapy data collection techniques and treatment interventions and implement the plan of care as directed by the physical therapist. At the end of this affiliation, the student is expected to perform at entry-level, in flagged criteria sites and consistently and efficiently providing quality care with simple or complex patients in a variety of clinical environments under the supervision of a physical therapist. The student requires no further guidance or supervision except when addressing new or complex problems at which time the student seeks assistance.
    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2440 - Rehabilitation Techniques-Lecture

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2190 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2350  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2450  

    This course is designed to provide the theoretical foundation to the treatment of adult patients with physical disabilities. Advanced treatment techniques for the management of patients with amputations, gait abnormalities, spinal cord injuries, burns and cancer are included.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of etiology and clinical manifestations of selected rehabilitation diagnoses including amputation, spinal cord injury, traumatic brain injury, burns, and cancer.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe the etiology, clinical picture and sequela of the traumatic spinal cord injury.
    2. Describe the secondary complications related to spinal cord injury.
    3. Describe the secondary complications related to spinal cord injury. Given a patient profile, identify and describe various rehabilitation treatment techniques/modalities citing appropriate rationale.
    4. Describe the etiology, clinical picture, and sequela of MS, RA, and Parkinson’s disease.
    5. Given a patient profile, identify and describe various rehabilitation treatment techniques/modalities used with the RA, MS, and Parkinson’s disease client.
    6. Explain the rationale for the techniques utilized in the rehabilitation management of the RA, MS, and Parkinson’s client.
    7. Describe the etiology and clinical picture of peripheral vascular disease and the role of diabetes.
    8. Identify and describe various rehabilitation techniques/modalities used with the patient with peripheral vascular disease.
    9. Describe possible emergency situations related to adult rehab patients and the appropriate response.
    10. Identify the etiological factors involved in amputation.
    11. Describe the levels of amputation and basic concepts in amputation surgery.
    12. Describe post-operative management: positioning, skin care, bandaging, and exercise programs for patients with amputation.
    13. State rationale for post-operative rehabilitation management techniques for amputees.
    14. Describe the etiology, clinical picture, and sequela of burns and cancer.
    15. Describe the management of the cancer patient.
    16. Describe the guidelines for management of patients with cancer.
    17. Describe aspects of wound care and wound healing following a burn injury.
    18. Given a patient profile, identify and describe various rehabilitation techniques/modalities used with the burn patient.
    19. Search and evaluate current clinical research material available through library resources as it relates to adult rehab.
    20. Develop and present a group Capstone project.
    21. Describe the effective use of the tilt table for the spinal cord patient.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast various types of orthotics, prosthetics, wheelchairs and other equipment stating rationale for selection and application within a treatment plan.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Identify and relate the rationale for the selection and application of orthotic devices.
    2. Identify various types of orthotic devices and the principles for the use of selected orthotic devices.
    3. Compare and contrast various orthotic devices.
    4. Describe components of transtibial and transfemoral prosthesis.
    5. Describe basic biomechanics of below-knee and above-knee prothesis.
    6. Compare and contrast various types of prosthetic devices available and state the rationale for their use.
    7. Understand and appropriately assess wheelchair alignment to match patient’s needs.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the principles of functional training including self-care, equipment, gait, and mobility training consistent with the role of the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Compare and contrast normal/abnormal gait.
    2. Discuss the impact of selected diagnoses on gait.
    3. Discuss the use of assistive devices to improve gait quality.
    4. Describe effective methods of gait management and progression for patients using prostheses and/or orthotics including don/doff and care of prosthesis and orthotics.
    5. Discuss the role of assistive/adaptive equipment in enhancing patient functional independently and safely in ADL and IADL.
    6. Recognize changes in skin condition related to orthotic and prosthetic wear.
    7. Recognize those signs/symptoms and changes in the adult rehab patient that require consultation with the physical therapist.
    8. Describe effective equipment management by patients and caregivers.
    9. Describe effective interaction between PTA’s and other health care providers.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss and participate in discharge planning, community resource/home care referral and advocacy for individuals with disabilities as appropriate for the role of the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the role of the PTA in discharge planning recognizing legal, ethical and regulatory expectations.
    2. Document a home exercise program consistent with a patient’s age, functional level, culture, and cognitive ability based on an established plan of care.
    3. Discuss the Americans With Disability Act and describe its 4 sections.
    4. Discuss the role of ADA in improving accessibility for individuals with disabilities.
    5. Demonstrate an awareness of community and service agency organizations related to advocacy.
    6. Describe the role of the PT and PTA in home care.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Orthotics
      1. Basic principles of orthotics and serial casting
      2. LE orthotics
      3. Spinal orthotics
      4. Seating the neurologically impaired client cushions
    2. Rehabilitation of Spinal and Injured Client
      1. Etiology
      2. Functional levels
      3. Acute management
      4. Rehabilitation management
      5. Management of complications including respiratory, genitourinary, GI
    3. Gait Analysis and Gait Training
      1. Basic review of normal gait and determinants of gait
      2. Common gait deviations
      3. Review of principles of gait training
    4. Multiple Sclerosis, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Parkinson’s Disease
      1. Rheumatoid arthritis, multiple sclerosis and Parkinson’s disease
        1. Etiology and management of exacerbations/remissions
        2. Energy conservation
        3. Adaptive equipment
        4. Relaxation exercises
        5. Joint protection
        6. Coordination exercises
    5. Prosthetics
      1. Prosthetics
        1. BK - biomechanics of prosthesis prosthetic
        2. AK - biomechanics of prosthesis prosthetic components
      2. Donning and doffing prosthesis
      3. Site visit to prosthetic lab
    6. Peripheral Vascular Disease and Diabetes
      1. Introduction to arterial, venous, and lymphatic system
      2. Ulcer management (whirlpool, electric stimulation, casting)
      3. Skin care
      4. Shoe wear
    7. Amputations
      1. Etiology, evaluation, levels of amputation
      2. Pre-operative instructions
      3. Post-operative instructions and teaching
      4. Skin care
      5. Positioning in bed and the wheelchair
      6. Early mobilization
      7. Edema control via stump wrapping or rigid dressing
    8. Architectural Barriers: Community Accessibility Project
    9. Burns and Cancer
      1. Oncology
        1. Intervention strategies, emotional aspects
        2. Treatment planning
      2. Burns
        1. Positioning
        2. Review of sterile technique
        3. Emergent management
        4. Acute management
        5. Rehabilitation management
    10. Discharge Plan and Follow-up Care
      1. Types and uses of equipment available
      2. Home exercise program and patient/family instruction
    11. The student is required to formulate and present a collaborative research paper on a noted clinical-diagnostic condition which is specifically focused on emphasizing rehabilitation care procedures and protocols
      1. Internet research
      2. Clinical practice research
      3. Speaking/presentation formulation style
      4. Use of different audio-visuals in your presentation
      5. Group dynamics in problem-solving and in preparing a collaborative based project
    12. Americans with Disability Act (ADA): A Review

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2450 - Rehabilitation Techniques-Laboratory

    Credit Hours: 1.50


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2190 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2350  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2460  

    This course is designed to correlate the principles of rehabilitation procedures in the clinical setting with the lecture topics in PTAS 2440. Emphasis will be placed on practical experiences with site visits scheduled to augment didactic components of learning.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Student Goals/Objectives:

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to read and understand a physical therapy plan of care for the rehabilitation patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Identify short and long term goals
    2. Recognize when physical therapy interventions should not be applied or when required interventions are beyond the PTA scope of practice
    3. Identify special precautions for adult rehabilitation patients
    4. Discuss the role of equipment in the rehabilitation of patients

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to implement select components of a physical therapy plan of care for the adult rehabilitation patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Instruct patients and caregivers in gait training, transfers, and ADL activities as appropriate to the learning needs of the individual
    2. Instruct patients and caregivers in the use of assistive and adaptive equipment, orthotics, and prosthetics as appropriate for a given diagnosis
    3. Recognize and monitor response to positional changes and activity, i.e., orthostatic hypotension including use of the tilt table
    4. Apply a therapeutic exercise program for the adult rehab patient directed toward patient outcomes and recognizing special precautions
    5. Use data collection to progress and monitor the treatment of the adult patient within the PT plan of care
    6. Recognize the ability to patients and caregivers to use equipment safely determining the effectiveness of instruction via verbal response and learner demonstration
    7. Demonstrate safe wheelchair management skills and the ability to instruct patients and caregivers as indicated in the plan of care
    8. Provide rationale for selected approaches to therapeutic intervention for the patient with CVA, Traumatic Brain Injury, Spinal Cord Injury, lower extremity amputation, cancer, and burns
    9. Demonstrate instruction to patients and caregivers directed at function and self care at home, at work and in the community

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to recognize and implement treatment strategies appropriate to the behaviorally an cognitively impaired patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Understand the physical and behavioral attributes of the neurologically impaired patient
    2. Demonstrate treatment techniques specific to the individual with behavior/cognitive impairments as appropriate to the role of the PTA

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to discuss the importance of interdisciplinary care for the rehabilitation patient

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Describe the role of the occupational therapist and speech/language therapist in the care of the rehabilitation patient
    2. Discuss effective communication skills that enhance inter-professional management of the rehabilitation patient

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to utilize effective teaching and communication techniques for rehabilitation patients

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Recognize individual differences and the impact they may have on patients, caregivers, and others
    2. Describe the impact of culture, age, gender, and socioeconomic status as it relates to the adult rehabilitation patient
    3. Demonstrate the effective communication with patients, family members, and team members that is sensitive to individual differences
    4. Demonstrate effective teaching techniques for patient and caregivers
    5. Demonstrate documentation appropriate to various settings that is consistent with agency and regulatory expectations

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to participate in discharge planning for the adult rehabilitation patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Understand the role of the PTA in discharge planning and family education
    2. Inspect/measure physical space recognizing the impact of physical barriers on the home and work environment of patients
    3. Describe the continuing patient care process

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course the student will be able to participate in community and service activities relevant to the role of the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will be able to

    1. Identify service organizations that support individuals with disabilities
    2. Describe advocacy activities performed by service organizations
    3. Complete a service learning activity in support of individuals with disabilities
    4. Describe how community service organization serves the public

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course Outline:

    1. Cerebral Vascular Accident
      1. Describe data collection for the patient with CVA
      2. Demonstrate techniques used for management of abnormal tone
      3. Recognize abnormal gait pattens in the patient with CVA
      4. Orthotics
      5. Instruct patients in gait activities, therapeutic exercise, and functional skills using equipment as indicated in the plan of care
      6. Instruct patient in balance and coordination activities
      7. Use data collection to progress the patient within the plan of care
      8. Documentation as appropriate
    2. Acquired Brain Injury
      1. Use safe behavioral strategies to promote learning
      2. Instruct in balance and coordination activities
      3. Instruct in therapeutic exercise directed at patient outcomes as indicated in plan of care
      4. Instruct in gait training using equipment as appropriate
      5. Data collection and progression through the plan of care
    3. Spinal Cord injury
      1. Quadriplegia
        1. Management of the respiratory system including assisted coughing and breathing
        2. Pressure relief techniques
        3. Rolling and sitting
        4. Transfers
        5. Wheelchair management
        6. Therapeutic exercise
        7. Spinal orthotics
        8. Data collection and progression and safety
      2. Paraplegia
        1. Respiratory management
        2. Self range of motion
        3. Pressure relief
        4. Transfers and bed mobility
        5. Therapeutic exercise
        6. Orthotics
        7. Gait
        8. Data collection and progression and safety
    4. Patients with Amputation
      1. Compression techniques for trans-femoral and trans-tibial amputation
      2. Positioning in bed and wheelchair
      3. Therapeutic exercise for the patient with LE amputation
      4. Prosthetic components
      5. Gait training
      6. Skin care
      7. Data collection and progression
      8. Visit to orthotics and prosthetics lab
    5. Patients with Burns
      1. Wound care and scar management
      2. Therpeutic exercise
      3. Data collection and progression
    6. Patients with Cancer
      1. Lab values that impact the provision of physical therapy
      2. Cancer related fatigue
      3. Side effects of cancer treatment
      4. Role of physical therapy
    7. Aquatic Therapy
      1. Exercise principles for aquatic therapy
      2. Special safety precautions for aquatic therapy
      3. Equipment for aquatic therapy
    8. Communication and Teaching
      1. Culture, gender, age, socioeconomic status, and other individual differences
      2. Interdisciplinary communication
      3. Teaching skills to overcome barriers to learning in various patients
      4. Documentation and discharge planning for various patients
    9. Service Learning
      1. Identifying organizations that advocate for individuals with disabilities
      2. The role of the PTA in advocacy
      3. Participation in service learning activity
    10. Site Visits and Report

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2460 - Pediatrics

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2190 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2350  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2470  

    This course is designed to provide the student with an opportunity to gain knowledge of clinical pediatric problems and management of the pediatric patient. Selected neuromuscular, orthopedic and systemic pediatric conditions are present. Application of neurophysiological and orthopedic approaches to therapeutic exercise are introduced.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the physical, motor and psychosocial development of the normal and atypical child.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe the physical and motor development of the normal child vs. the abnormal child.
    2. Describe the presence of primitive reflexes in atypical development.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the etiology, pathology, and clinical manifestations of neurological, orthopedic, developmental, and genetic disorders of the pediatric patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. For pediatric upper motor neuron pathology (UMN), identify and describe the etiology and clinical manifestations of pediatric UMN: cerebral palsy, brain trauma, and brain tumor.
    2. Describe spasticity and pathological reflexes as related to neurological pediatric conditions.
    3. Describe common motor control deficits as related to neurological pediatric conditions.
    4. For pediatric lower motor neuron pathology (LMN), identify and describe etiology, clinical problems, and clinical picture of spina bifida, poliomyelitis, Charcot-Marie Tooth, muscular dystrophy, birth palsy.
    5. For pediatric orthopedic problems, identify and describe etiology, clinical problems, and clinical picture of Legg-Calve’-Perthes disease, scoliosis, slipped capital femoral epiphysis, arthrogryposis multiplex congenita, osteogenesis imperfecta, and fractures.
    6. For selected childhood pathologies, identify and describe etiology, clinical problems, and clinical picture of cystic fibrosis, asthma, juvenile rheumatoid arthritis, Down Syndrome, and hemophilia.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and demonstrate treatment techniques used in the management of the pediatric patient appropriate to the PTA scope of practice.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe various neurophysiological techniques for selected pediatric UMN pathology.
    2. Demonstrate different techniques for selected pediatric UMN pathology.
    3. Describe types of equipment that can be utilized in treatment.
    4. Identify various assistive devices utilized with a child who had UMN lesions.
    5. Describe exercise routines and functional activities for selected pediatric LMN disabilities.
    6. Design therapeutic exercise techniques and functional activities for selected pediatric LMN disabilities.
    7. Identify the types of equipment and/or assistive aides that can be utilized for selected LMN disabilities.
    8. Design therapeutic exercise techniques and functional activities for selected orthopedic disabilities.
    9. Identify the types of equipment and/or assistive aides that can be utilized for selected orthopedic disabilities.
    10. Describe the general physical therapy management of children with selected childhood pathologies.
    11. Describe exercise routines and functional activities for childhood disabilities.
    12. Demonstrate exercise treatment techniques and functional activities for selected childhood disabilities.
    13. Identify the types of equipment and/or assistive aides that can be utilized in treatment programs for selected childhood pathologies.
    14. Describe how PT services are delivered in school-based programs.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the PTA in assessment, treatment and discharge planning of the pediatric patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify criteria for discharge of pediatric patients.
    2. Discuss steps necessary for a successful discharge.
    3. Discuss the PTA role in discharge of pediatric patients.
    4. Identify equipment/assistive aides as needed for discharge.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the impact of cultural and socioeconomic issues in the physical therapy management of the pediatric patient.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Identify policies and procedures in pediatric therapy that may reflect socioeconomic and cultural differences.
    2. Discuss communication skills that effectively respect individual differences, preferences, and values among pediatric patients and their families

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pediatric Therapy in General
      1. Children vs. adults
      2. Functional needs of pediatric patients
      3. Normal human development
      4. Universal precautions
      5. Adaptive equipment
    2. Upper Motor Neuron Lesions: Theory
      1. Definition of upper motor neuron
      2. Cerebral Palsy
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Types of involvement
        4. Classification
        5. Problems associated with cerebral palsy
        6. Assessment of children with cerebral palsy
        7. Gait patterns in children with cerebral palsy
        8. Abnormal development
      3. Brain Tumors
        1. Most common brain tumors
        2. Signs and symptoms of brain tumors
        3. Prognosis
        4. Classification
        5. Medical management
        6. Clinical picture
      4. Traumatic Brain Injuries
        1. Head trauma
        2. Complication of head trauma
        3. Level of cognitive function: Rancho Los Amigos Cognitive Scale
    3. Lower Motor Neuron Theory
      1. Definition of lower motor neuron
      2. Muscular Dystrophy
        1. Definition
        2. Duchenes muscular dystrophy
        3. Signs and symptoms
        4. Clinical picture
        5. PT assessment
        6. Other complications of DMD
        7. Other related disorders
      3. Spina Bifida
        1. In general
        2. Incidence
        3. Etiology
        4. Diagnosis
        5. Types of spina bifida
        6. Complications of spina bifida
      4. Poliomyelitis
        1. Etiology
        2. Incidence
        3. History
        4. PT goals for polio
      5. Charcot Marie Tooth
      6. Birth Palsy
        1. Brachial plexus injury
        2. Causes
        3. Clinical findings
        4. Treatment
    4. Upper Motor Neuron Pathology: Treatment
      1. Pediatric treatment in general
        1. Treatment choices
        2. Common equipment
        3. General principles of treatment
      2. Treatment of upper motor neuron pathology: NDT
      3. Problem list
      4. Goals
      5. Remediation
      6. Task Analysis
      7. Teaching
      8. Adaptation or compensation
      9. Adaptive equipment
      10. Orthotics
      11. Surgical intervention
      12. Orthopedic surgery
    5. Lower Motor Neuron Pathology: Treatment
      1. Duchene’s Muscular Dystrophy
        1. Primary problems
        2. Goals of treatment
        3. Treatment recommendations
      2. Spina Bifida
        1. Problems
        2. Goals of therapy
        3. Treatment
        4. Common orthotics used with spina bifida
        5. Orthotic management for ambulation
    6. Orthopedics
      1. Orthopedic PT in general
      2. Congenital Hip Dislocation
        1. Definition
        2. Clinical features
        3. Medical management
        4. Surgical management
        5. PT management
        6. PT modalities
      3. Arthrogryposis Multiplex Congenita
        1. Definition
        2. Clinical features
        3. Posture
        4. Medical management
        5. Bracing/splinting/casting
        6. PT management
      4. Osteogenesis Imperfecta
        1. Definition
        2. Clinical features
        3. Medical management
        4. Surgical management
        5. Splinting and orthotics
        6. PT management
      5. Legg Calve Perthes disease
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Clinical features
        4. Medical management
        5. PT management
      6. Slipped Capital Femoral Epiphysis
        1. Definition
        2. Causes
        3. Clinical features
        4. Symptoms
        5. Medical management
        6. PT management
      7. Scoliosis
        1. Definition
        2. Idiopathic scoliosis
        3. Terminology
        4. Clinical features
        5. Causes
        6. Prognosis
        7. Medical management
        8. Surgical management
        9. PT management
      8. Fractures
        1. Types
        2. Commonly broken bones
        3. PT management
    7. Other Childhood Pathologies
      1. Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis
        1. Definition
        2. Types
        3. Symptoms
        4. Medical management
        5. PT referral
        6. PT treatment
        7. Other considerations
      2. Hemophilia
        1. Definition
        2. Clinical manifestation
        3. Medical management
        4. Other contributing problems
        5. Disabilities
        6. Musculoskeletal impairments
        7. Functional limitations
      3. Down Syndrome
        1. Definition
        2. Physical and developmental features
        3. Causes
        4. Incidence
        5. Prognosis
        6. Complicating health problems
        7. Medical management
        8. PT management
      4. Asthma
        1. Definition
        2. Medical management
        3. PT management
      5. Cystic Fibrosis
        1. Definition
        2. Clinical presentation
        3. Medical management
        4. PT management
    8. School Based Therapy
      1. Federal Legislation
      2. Major provisions of the laws
      3. Delivery of School Based Therapy
      4. Related terms
    9. Discharge Planning
      1. Criteria for discharge
      2. Role of the PTA in discharge planning
      3. Equipment and resources
    10. Socio/cultural aspects of Care
      1. Communication skills
      2. Value based behaviors
      3. Socioeconomic and cultural challenges

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2470 - Cardiopulmonary Rehabilitation

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2190 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2350  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2500  

    This course provides an overview of the physical therapy management of cardiopulmonary conditions. Also included is the role of physical therapy in fitness and wellness programming.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Student Goals/Objectives:

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the anatomy, physiology and pathology of the cardiopulmonary system as it relates to physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe the anatomical and physiological aspects of the respiratory system
    2. Describe the anatomical and physiological aspects of the cardiac system
    3. Describe diagnostic techniques for respiratory and cardiac pathologies

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the clinical manifestations of pulmonary disease as it relates to physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe common causes of obstructive and restrictive lung disease
    2. Discuss impairments found in patients with obstructive and restrictive pulmonary conditions
    3. Describe the role of physical therapy in the management of obstructive and restrictive pulmonary conditions
    4. Describe precautions in treatment of obstructive and restrictive pulmonary conditions

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the clinical manifestations of cardiac disease as it relates to physical therapy.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe common causes of cardiac disease
    2. Discuss impairments seen in patients with congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, angina pectoris, and sudden death
    3. Describe the role of physical therapy in the management of patients with cardiac disease
    4. Describe precautions in the treatment of patients with cardiac disease

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe tests and measures commonly used in the evaluation of the patient with cardiopulmonary disease.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Discuss procedures utilized by the physical therapist in evaluation of physical therapy plan of care for pulmonary and cardiac patients
    2. Describe tests commonly used by physicians in the management of cardiopulmonary patients
    3. Describe the role of the PTA in applying select interventions for the pulmonary and cardiac patient recognizing when interventions may be outside the PTA scope of practice
    4. Describe expected and adverse responses in the pulmonary and cardiac patients recognizing the need to report responses to the supervising PT

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate competency in select physical therapy techniques used in the evaluation and treatment of the cardiopulmonary patient appropriate to the role of the PTA.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Describe and demonstrate various treatment techniques such as: diaphragmatic breathing, coughing, vibration, thoracoabdominal movement
    2. Demonstrate accurate hand placement, positioning, and technique for postural drainage and vibration
    3. Describe goals, indications, and basic principles for breathing exercises, chest mobilization exercises, and postural drainage
    4. Identify precautions and contraindications for postural drainage
    5. Describe characteristics of cough and sputum
    6. Describe the relationship between supplemental oxygen, breathing patterns, and functional activities

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe aerobic exercise, cardiac rehabilitation and fitness programming for the healthy and impaired population.

    Objectives: The student will be able to:

    1. Define fitness, endurance, conditioning, adaptation, cardiac output, VO2 MAX, MET
    2. Identify the physiologic changes to aerobic exercise
    3. Discuss in general stress-testing and fitness testing
    4. Identify the appropriate guidelines for determining the intensity, duration and frequency of an exercise program
    5. Calculate a target training heart rate
    6. Discuss overload principle in endurance training
    7. Identify components of an exercise program
    8. Compare and contrast high-level and low-level exercise program
    9. Describe the three phases of cardiac rehabilitation
    10. Describe activities that are utilized in each phase
    11. Apply the principles of aerobic conditioning to rehabilitation programs for myocardial infarction or coronary artery by-pass patient
    12. Identify the characteristics of each phase of cardiac rehabilitation
    13. Identify and describe the role and function of PTA in cardiac rehabilitation
    14. Demonstrate vital sign management in the plan of care for the cardiopulmonary patient

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Review of Respiratory Structure and Function
      1. Specific Topics Covered
        1. thorax and ribs
        2. muscles of respiration
        3. movements of thorax in respiration
        4. movement of air
        5. anatomy and function of respiratory tracts
          1. upper respiratory tract
          2. lower respiratory tract - tracheobronchial tree
        6. lungs
          1. anatomy
          2. volume and capacities
        7. evaluation in chest PT performed by PT
          1. purpose
          2. general appearance
          3. breathing pattern
          4. chest mobility
          5. posture and chest deformities
          6. palpation
          7. percussion
          8. auscultation
          9. cough and sputum
        8. PTA role in evaluation process
    2. Management of Pulmonary Conditions
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. obstructive lung disease
          1. define
          2. terminology
          3. characteristics - clinical picture
          4. clinical problems
        2. specific obstructive pulmonary conditions and clinical picture
          1. chronic bronchitis
          2. emphysema
          3. asthma
        3. general treatment goals and plan of care
          1. chronic bronchitis and emphysema
          2. asthma
        4. restrictive or non-obstructive lung disorders
          1. define
          2. causes
          3. clinical problems
        5. specific restrictive pulmonary conditions
          1. post-thoracotomy
          2. pneumonia
        6. general treatment goals and plan of care
          1. post-thoracotomy
          2. pneumonia
        7. precautions
        8. role of PTA in treatment
    3. Treatment Techniques in Cardiopulmonary PT
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. breathing exercises
          1. indications
          2. goals
          3. principles for teaching
          4. precautions
          5. specific breathing patterns
            1. diaphragmatic breathing
            2. lung expansion - inspiratory breathing
            3. segmented breathing
            4. glossopharyngeal
            5. pursed-lip breathing
        2. exercises for chest mobilization
        3. coughing
          1. cough mechanism
          2. factors that affect mechanism
          3. teaching and facilitatory cough
          4. precautions
        4. postural drainage
          1. goals and rationale
          2. contraindications
          3. techniques
            1. huffing
            2. coughing
            3. percussion
        5. postural drainage positions
          1. general treatment considerations
          2. positions and rationale
          3. hand placement
          4. percussion
          5. treatment duration
        6. functional activities
        7. role of PTA
    4. Review of Cardiovascular System and Principles of Coronary Heart Disease
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. review of anatomy and physiology of cardiovascular system
        2. basic principles of the electrocardiogram
        3. cardiovascular disorders - clinical pictures
          1. arteriosclerosis
          2. coronary artery disease
          3. myocardial infarction
          4. hypertension
          5. valvular disease
    5. Principles of Aerobic Exercise
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. terminology
          1. fitness
          2. endurance
          3. VO2 MAX
          4. conditioning
          5. adaptation
        2. physiological responses to aerobic exercise
          1. cardiovascular
          2. respiratory
          3. circulatory
        3. stress testing and fitness testing
        4. determinants of an exercise program
          1. intensity
          2. duration
          3. frequency
        5. exercise program
          1. warm-up
          2. aerobic exercise
          3. cool-down
        6. physiologic changes with training
    6. Application of Aerobic Exercise Principles to a Conditioning Program for Coronary Artery Conditions
      1. Specific topics covered:
        1. three phases of cardiac rehabilitation
          1. Phase 1 acute myocardial infarction hospital admission to discharge
          2. Phase II after discharge from hospital
          3. Phase III active reconditioning program
        2. role and function of PTA in cardiac rehabilitation

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PTAS 2500 - Seminar for Physical Therapist Assistants

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Physical Therapist Assistant Program; PTAS 2110 , PTAS 2120 , PTAS 2130 , PTAS 2140 , PTAS 2190 , PTAS 2200 , and PTAS 2350  all with grade C or better, or grade Pass (if the course is a Pass/Fail course)

    Corequisites: PTAS 2440  

    (Effective Winter 2010: course description changed)

    This course examines special topics and contemporary issues in physical therapy for the advanced PTA student. Students are prepared for the transition to work through a number of student‑led projects and presentations.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    When Offered: Winter semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Student Goals/Objectives:

    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss in depth the role of the physical therapist assistant and the relationship with the physical therapist in various clinical settings.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Analyze and compare/contrast the role of the PT/PTA by utilizing APTA core documents including the APTA Guide for Conduct of the Physical Therapist Assistant and the Standards of Ethical Conduct for the Physical Therapist Assistant
    2. Describe the roles of the PTA/PT observed in clinical settings.
    3. Review and understand the Michigan Physical Therapy Practice Act and legal implications.
    4. Discuss the role of the PTA in advocacy for the physical therapy profession through membership and participation in APTA/MPTA

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss contemporary issues that affect the practice of physical therapy and the role of the physical therapist assistant.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Review and be able to apply “The Guide to PT Practice” in physical therapy practice
    2. Analyze and describe Hippocratic physical therapy practice through: self-analysis, effective verbal and communication strategies, ethical decision making practices, risk management (law and liability), and health care reimbursement patterns.
    3. Discuss the role of the PTA in health promotion and wellness
    4. Discuss the role and challenges of culture and gender in the workplace
    5. Discuss domestic violence and role of the PTA in reporting and in victim advocacy

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe in depth the relationship between the physical therapist and physical therapist assistant.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe academic depth and breadth for PT and PTA education
    2. Describe effective collaboration and supervision in physical therapy
    3. Coordinate and create a student directed learning experience to provide PT/PTA students an opportunity to work and learn together about their education, roles, and responsibilities as team members

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to Design, create and complete a resume and a cover letter.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Understand the principles and presentation styles of cover letters and resumes.
    2. Review examples of various styles of cover letters and resumes.
    3. Develop a cover letter and resume appropriate for presentation to potential employees.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate interview skills appropriate for an entry level PTA position.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Demonstrate appropriate verbal and non-verbal cues during an interview
    2. Recognize appropriate and inappropriate questioning during an interview
    3. Describe appropriate post-interview follow-up.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Preferred PT/PTA relationships and ethical utilization
    2. School to work transitions, challenges, skills and risks
    3. Licensure, competency, mentorship, and life-long learning
    4. Advocacy for self, profession, and patient
    5. Special topics in physical therapy
      1. Health promotion and wellness
      2. Culture and gender in the workplace
      3. Domestic violence
      4. Roles of PT/PTA in clinical practice
    6. Self-actualization: self and others

    Primary Faculty
    Plisner, Carol
    Secondary Faculty
    Mele, Robert
    Associate Dean
    Primeau, Paula
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Physics

  
  • PHYS 1180 - College Physics 1

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: MATH 1000  with grade C or better; or higher level math course, or math placement score, or consent of faculty 

    (formerly PHYS 1160)

    The first of a two‑semester sequence of algebra‑based courses designed to present the fundamental principles of physics including mechanics and fluids. The student will also perform integrated experiments dealing with the physics of mechanics and fluids.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the scientific process as related to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the laws, models, or theories that are applicable.
    2. Describe the physical laws, models, and theories.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models and theories.
    4. Assess (or Evaluate) the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate physical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of physical hypotheses.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able gain a familiarization with the scientist’s usage of specialized, scientific vocabulary relating to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Define terminology.
    2. Recall terminology.
    3. Employ terminology.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explore preconceptions concerning physical interactions and develop conceptual changes to reflect basic physics concepts relating to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between intuitive expectations and established scientific principles through classroom discussion and laboratory exercises.
    2. Through lab experiments students will compare experimental results with preconceived notions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain experience in constructing both qualitative representations and then mathematical representations of physical situations relating to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Employ coordinate systems to analyze dynamic and static situations.
    2. Apply dimensional and unit analysis to give meaning to, and to communicate measurements.
    3. Construct free body diagrams to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    4. Draw/sketch vectors to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    5. Students will utilize various mathematical methods (i.e. vector, algebra, simultaneous linear equations, quadratic equations, etc.) to solve mathematical equations as related to various physical situations.
    6. Derive mathematical equations to describe, and explain, dynamic and static situations.
    7. Assess the reasonableness of final mathematical solutions.
    8. Organize ideas to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain experience in taking accurate data, organizing and analyzing this data dealing with experiments relating to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Collect data through experimentation and observation.
    2. Utilize various measuring instruments to collect data.
    3. Analyze and interpret data to arrive at a conclusion.
    4. Reproduce results that are commonly accepted.
    5. Based upon current theoretical models make predictions about experimental outcomes.
    6. Compare experimental conclusions to theoretical predictions.
    7. Organize results and conclusions to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain a historical perspective of the development of science and scientific laws relating to the physics of solids and fluids.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the historical laws, models, and theories.
    2. Describe the historical laws, models, and theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lecture

    1. Introduction
      1. What is Physics?
      2. Scientific Notation and SI Prefixes
      3. Standards of Length, Time, and Mass
      4. Dimensional Analysis, Scientific Figures and Conversion of Units
    2. Kinematics
      1. Statements - Types of Physical Phenomenon
      2. Describing Motion
      3. Distance and Displacement
      4. Vectors & Scalars and Graphical Vector Addition
      5. Average Speed and Velocity
      6. Graphical Analysis of Speed - Slope
      7. Instantaneous Speed and Velocity
      8. Average Acceleration
      9. Instantaneous Acceleration
      10. Graphical Analysis of Acceleration - Slope
      11. Graphical Analysis - Area Under a Curve
      12. Equations for One Dimensional Constant Acceleration Motion
      13. Motion in Free Fall
    3. Motion in Two Dimensions
      1. Components of a Vector
      2. Velocity and Acceleration in Two Dimensions
      3. Projectile Motion
      4. Relative Velocity
    4. Dynamics
      1. Forces
      2. Newton’s First Law of Motion
      3. Combining Forces - Graphical Addition
      4. Combining Forces - Vector Components
      5. Force and Motion
      6. Inertia, Mass
      7. Newton’s Second Law of Motion
      8. Weight
      9. Free-Body Diagrams
      10. Newton’s Third Law of Motion
      11. Equilibrium in Two Dimensions
      12. Friction
    5. Frames of Reference
      1. Inertial Frames of Reference
      2. Accelerated Frames of Reference
      3. The Earth as a Frame of Reference
      4. Newtonian Relativity
    6. Uniform Circular Motion
      1. Centripetal Force
      2. Centripetal Acceleration
      3. Rotating Frames of Reference
      4. Uniform Circular Motion
    7. Gravitation
      1. Fundamental Forces
      2. The Universal Law of Gravitation
      3. Relationship Between “g” and “G”
      4. Satellite Orbits
    8. Work and Energy
      1. Mechanical Work
      2. Power
      3. Work and Energy
      4. Work Energy Principle
      5. Conservation of Energy
      6. Kinetic Energy
      7. Potential Energy
      8. Gravitational Potential Energy Near the Earth
      9. Potential Energy of a Spring
      10. Work Done by Friction - Non-Conservative Forces
    9. Impulse and Momentum
      1. Momentum
      2. Conservation of Momentum
      3. Impulse
      4. Rocket Propulsion
      5. Elastic and Inelastic Collisions
    10. Fluid Statics
      1. What is a Fluid?
      2. Density
      3. Pressure
      4. Calculation of Pressure in a Fluid
      5. Pressure in the Atmosphere
      6. Pressure in U-Tubes
      7. Pascal’s Principle
      8. Buoyant Forces and Archimedes’ Principle
      9. Floating

    Lab

    1. The Metric System
      1. Length, Volume, Mass and Density
    2. Graphing Laboratory Data Scientific Investigation
    3. Position and Velocity (Two to Three Labs)
      1. Kinematics I
      2. Kinematics II
      3. Kinematics on an Inclined Plane Acceleration due to Gravity
    4. Projectile Motion Demo. Lab
    5. The Force Table (Three to Four Labs)
      1. Dynamics I
      2. Dynamics II
      3. Newton’s Second Law and Atwood’s Machine The Force of Friction
    6. Uniform Circular Motion (Two to Three Labs)
      1. Conservation of Mechanical Energy Pendulum Motion
      2. Conservation of Momentum
    7. Buoyancy and Specific Gravity
      1. Pressure and the Buoyant Force

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHYS 1190 - College Physics 2

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PHYS 1180  with grade C or better

    (formerly PHYS 1170)

    The second of a two‑semester sequence of algebra‑based courses designed to present the fundamental principles of physics including thermodynamics, electricity, waves, and optics. The student will also perform integrated experiments dealing with the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, waves, and optics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the scientific process as related to the physics of scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the laws, models, or theories that are applicable.
    2. Describe the physical laws, models, and theories.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models and theories.
    4. Assess (or Evaluate) the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate physical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of physical hypotheses.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain a familiarization with the scientist’s usage of specialized, scientific vocabulary relating to the physics scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Define terminology.
    2. Recall terminology.
    3. Employ terminology.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explore preconceptions concerning physical interactions and develop conceptual changes to reflect basic physics concepts relating to the physics scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between intuitive expectations and established scientific principles through classroom discussion and laboratory exercises.
    2. Through lab experiments students will compare experimental results with preconceived notions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain experience in constructing both qualitative representations and then mathematical representations of physical situations relating to the physics of scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, waves, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Employ coordinate systems to analyze dynamic and static situations.
    2. Apply dimensional and unit analysis to give meaning to, and to communicate measurements.
    3. Construct free body diagrams to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    4. Draw/sketch vectors to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    5. Students will utilize various mathematical methods (i.e. vector, algebra, simultaneous linear equations, quadratic equations, etc.) to solve mathematical equations as related to various physical situations.
    6. Derive mathematical equations to describe, and explain, dynamic and static situations.
    7. Assess the reasonableness of final mathematical solutions.
    8. Organize ideas to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain experience in taking accurate data, organizing and analyzing this data dealing with experiments relating to the physics of scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, waves, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Collect data through experimentation and observation.
    2. Utilize various measuring instruments to collect data.
    3. Analyze and interpret data to arrive at a conclusion.
    4. Reproduce results that are commonly accepted.
    5. Based upon current theoretical models make predictions about experimental outcomes.
    6. Compare experimental conclusions to theoretical predictions.
    7. Organize results and conclusions to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to gain a historical perspective of the development of science and scientific laws relating to the physics of scientific laws, models, and theories relating to the physics of thermodynamics, electricity, waves, and wave phenomena.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the historical laws, models, and theories.
    2. Describe the historical laws, models, and theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lecture

    1. Introduction to Thermodynamics
      1. Internal Energy
      2. Internal Energy as Microscopic Energy
      3. Heat
      4. Equivalence of Heat and Work -The First Law of Thermodynamics
      5. The Second Law of Thermodynamics & The Concept of Temperature
      6. Thermometers
      7. Scales of Temperature
      8. Specific Heats
      9. Calorimetry
      10. Latent Heat
      11. Thermal Expansion
      12. Heat Transfer by Conduction, Convection, and Radiation
      13. Perpetual Motion Machines
    2. Physics of Gases
      1. Macroscopic Description of a Gas
      2. Behavior of Gases
      3. The Ideal-Gas Law
      4. Equations of State
      5. Molecular Model of an Ideal Gas
      6. Brownian Motion
      7. Kinetic Theory of an Ideal Gas
      8. Molecular Motion in Gases
      9. Specific Heats of an Ideal Gas
      10. Thermodynamic Processes in an Ideal Gas
      11. Adiabatic Processes in an Ideal Gas
    3. Electric Forces
      1. Electrostatics and the Electric Charge
      2. Elementary Electric Charges
      3. Charging by Contact and Induction
      4. Conservation of Charge
      5. Coulomb’s Law of Electric Force
      6. Vector Addition of Electric Force Vectors using Components
    4. Electric Fields and Electric Potential Energy
      1. Electric Fields
      2. Vector Addition of Electric Fields using Components
      3. Millikan’s Oil-Drop Experiment
      4. Electric Potential Energy
    5. Electric Potential
      1. Electric Potential
      2. Electric Potential in the Field of Point Charges
      3. Electric Field Lines
      4. Electric Field Maps
      5. Relation Between Electric Field Strength and Potential
      6. Electric Acceleration of Charged Particles
    6. Electric Current
      1. Electric Current
      2. Continuity of Current
      3. Sources of Electromotive Force
      4. Resistance and Ohm’s Law
      5. A Microscopic View of Resistance
      6. Resistivity
      7. Variation of Resistivity with Temperature-Superconductivity
      8. Transfer of Energy and Power by electric current
    7. Electric Circuits
      1. Diagrams of Electric Circuits
      2. Resistors Connected in Series or in Parallels
      3. Open Circuits and Short Circuits
      4. Measurements Using Ammeters and Voltmeters
      5. Household Electric Circuits
      6. Direct Current Networks - Kirchhoff’s Rules
    8. Normal Modes of Oscillation. Sound Waves
      1. Some Properties of Waves
      2. Waves on a Taut String
      3. Standing Waves on a String
      4. Normal Modes and Normal Frequencies
      5. Sound Waves in Air
      6. Intensity of Sound
      7. Energy Content of Waves
      8. The Sound Spectrum
      9. Sources of Sound Waves
      10. Standing Waves in an Air Column
      11. Sound and Music
      12. Resonance and Beats in Sound Waves
    9. Light Waves
      1. Diffraction by a Single Slit
      2. Interference of Waves
      3. Young’s Experiment
      4. The Nature of Light Electromagnetic Waves
      5. The Electromagnetic Spectrum
      6. Measurements of the Speed of Light
      7. Index of Refraction
      8. Diffraction of Light by a Grating
      9. Explanation of Diffraction by a Grating
    10. Reflection and Refraction of Light
      1. Models for Light
      2. Types of Reflecting Surfaces
      3. Laws of Reflection and Refraction
      4. Total Internal Reflection-Critical Angle & Fiber Optics
      5. Dispersion - Refraction by a Prism
    11. Mirrors and Lenses
      1. Objects and Images
      2. Image Formation by Convex Mirrors
      3. Image Formation by Concave Mirrors
      4. Image Formation by Thin Lenses

    Lab

    1. Specific Heat
      1. Latent Heat of Fusion
      2. Latent Heat Vaporization
      3. Linear Expansion
    2. Absolute Zero
      1. Cp/Cv of Gases
    3. Electrostatics
      1. Electric Field Mapping
      2. Ohm’s Law
      3. Resistances in Circuits
      4. Series & Parallel Circuits
      5. Kirchhoff’s Rules
    4. Double Slit Interference Using a He-Ne Laser
    5. Normal Modes of Oscillation Speed of Sound
    6. The Laws of Reflection and Refraction
      1. Focal Length of Thin Lenses

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHYS 2220 - Analytical Physics 1

    Credit Hours: 5.00


    Prerequisites: PHYS 1180  with grade C or better; or passing score on the Physics Area Placement Test and MATH 1760  with grade C or better

    (formerly PHYS 2190)

    The first in a two‑semester sequence of calculus‑based physics courses for physical science and engineering students covering calculus‑based mechanics, thermodynamics, vibrations, and wave motion. The student will also perform integrated experiments dealing with the physics of mechanics, thermodynamics, vibrations, and wave motion.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Course Outcome
    Demonstrate an understanding of the scientific process as related to the physics of mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the laws, models, or theories that are applicable.
    2. Describe the physical laws, models, and theories.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models and theories.
    4. Assess (or Evaluate) the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate physical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of physical hypotheses.

    Course Outcome
    Gain a familiarization with the scientist’s usage of specialized, scientific vocabulary relating to the physics of mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Define terminology.
    2. Recall terminology.
    3. Employ terminology.

    Course Outcome
    Explore preconceptions concerning physical interactions and develop conceptual changes to reflect basic physics concepts relating to the mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Differentiate between intuitive expectations and established scientific principles through classroom discussion and laboratory exercises.
    2. Through lab experiments students will compare experimental results with preconceived notions.

    Course Outcome
    Gain experience in constructing both qualitative representations and then mathematical representations of physical situations relating to the physics mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Employ coordinate systems to analyze dynamic and static situations.
    2. Apply dimensional and unit analysis to give meaning to, and to communicate measurements.
    3. Construct free body diagrams to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    4. Draw/sketch vectors to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    5. Students will utilize various mathematical methods (i.e. vector, algebra, simultaneous linear equations, quadratic equations, calculus, etc….) to solve mathematical equations as related to various physical situations.
    6. Derive mathematical equations to describe, and explain, dynamic and static situations.
    7. Assess the reasonableness of final mathematical solutions.
    8. Organize ideas to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Course Outcome
    Gain experience in taking accurate data, organizing and analyzing this data dealing with experiments relating to the physics of mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Collect data through experimentation and observation.
    2. Utilize various measuring instruments to collect data.
    3. Analyze and interpret data to arrive at a conclusion.
    4. Reproduce results that are commonly accepted.
    5. Based upon current theoretical models make predictions about experimental outcomes.
    6. Compare experimental conclusions to theoretical predictions.
    7. Organize results and conclusions to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Course Outcome
    Gain a historical perspective of the development of science and scientific laws relating to the physics mechanics, wave phenomena, and thermodynamics.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the historical laws, models, and theories.
    2. Describe the historical laws, models, and theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lecture

    1. DESCRIBING THE MOTION OF A PARTICLE IN ONE DIMENSION (KINEMATICS)
      1. Displacement, Average Speed and Velocity*
      2. Instantaneous Speed and Velocity*
      3. Average and Instantaneous Acceleration*
      4. Using Graphs to Find Position, Velocity and Acceleration*
      5. Calculus Derivation of Kinematic Equations
      6. Equations for Motion with Constant Acceleration*
      7. Using Calculus to Describe Motion
    2. EXPLAINING MOTION IN ONE DIMENSION (Dynamics)
      1. Forces and Newton’s First Law of Motion*
      2. Combining Forces Using Vector Components*
      3. Mass and Newton’s Second Law of Motion*
      4. Weight*
      5. Free-Body Diagrams*
      6. Friction and Coefficients of Friction*
    3. FRAMES OF REFERENCE
      1. Events and Frames of Reference*
      2. Inertial and Non-inertial Frames of Reference*
      3. Newtonian Relativity*
      4. Rotating Frames of Reference*
    4. PARTICLE MOTION IN TWO AND THREE DIMENSIONS
      1. Unit Vectors
      2. Vector Equations of Motion
      3. Motion of Projectiles*
      4. Centripetal Force and Centripetal Acceleration*
      5. Uniform Circular Motion*
      6. Applications of Calculus
    5. WORK AMD ENERGY
      1. Vector Multiplication
      2. Work Done by a Constant Force*
      3. Work Done by a Varying Force
      4. Kinetic Energy & Work-Energy Theorem*
      5. Power*
    6. POTENTIAL ENERGY & CONSERVATION OF ENERGY
      1. The Concept of Potential Energy*
      2. Gravitational Potential Energy*
      3. Elastic Potential Energy
      4. Conservative and non-conservative Forces and Potential Energy
      5. Conservation of Mechanical Energy
      6. Conservation of Energy
      7. Mass-Energy Equation
    7. LINEAR MOMENTUM & COLLISIONS
      1. Linear Momentum & Conservation of Linear Momentum*
      2. Impulse
      3. Collisions
      4. System of Particles
      5. Motion of a System of Particles
      6. Center of Mass
      7. Rocket Propulsion
    8. ROTATION ABOUT A FIXED AXIS
      1. Rotational Variables
      2. Rotational Kinematics
      3. Rotational Energy
      4. Angular & Linear Quantities
      5. Calculating Moments of Inertia
      6. Torque
      7. Newton’s Second Law for Rotation
      8. Work, Power, and Energy in Rotational Motion
    9. ANGULAR MOMENTUM
      1. The Vector Product and Torque
      2. Newton’s Second Law in Angular Form
      3. Angular Momentum of a System of Particles
      4. Conservation of Angular Momentum
      5. Symmetry and Conservation Principles
    10. MECHANICAL OSCILLATIONS
      1. The Physical Basis of Oscillatory Motion
      2. Energy and Restoring Force in Oscillatory Motion
      3. Simple Harmonic Motion
      4. Energy in Simple Harmonic Motion
      5. Damped Harmonic Motion
      6. Forced Harmonic Oscillator, Resonance
    11. NORMAL MODES OF OSCILLATION. SOUND WAVES
      1. Waves on a Taut String
      2. Standing Waves on a String
      3. Normal Modes and Normal Frequencies
      4. Sound Waves in Air
      5. Intensity of Sound
      6. Energy Content of Waves
      7. The Sound Spectrum
      8. Sources of Sound Waves
      9. Standing Waves in an Air Column
      10. Sound and Music
      11. Resonance and Beats in Sound Waves
    12. INTRODUCTION TO THERMODYNAMICS
      1. Internal Energy
      2. Internal Energy as Microscopic Energy
      3. Heat
      4. Equivalence of Heat and Work - The First Law of Thermodynamics
      5. The Concept of Temperature
      6. Thermometers
      7. Scales of Temperature
      8. Specific Heats
      9. Calorimetry
      10. Thermal Expansion
      11. Heat Transfer by Conduction
      12. Heat Transfer by Radiation
      13. Perpetual Motion Machines

    * Review Mechanics Material from Physics 1180

    Labs

    1. One Dimensional Kinematics
    2. Newton’s Second Law
    3. Kinetic Friction
    4. Work and Energy
    5. Impulse and Momentum
    6. Rotational Motion I
    7. Rotational Motion II
    8. Harmonic Motion
    9. Standing Waves
    10. Specific Heat and Latent Heat of Fusion

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty
    Skonieczny, Timothy
    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PHYS 2230 - Analytical Physics 2

    Credit Hours: 5.00


    Prerequisites: PHYS 2220  and MATH 1760  all with grade C or better

    (formerly PHYS 2180)

    The second in a two‑semester sequence of calculus‑based physics courses for physical science and engineering students covering calculus‑based electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, and physical and geometrical optics. The student will also perform integrated experiments dealing with the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, and physical and geometrical optics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 7

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Course Outcome
    Demonstrate an understanding of the scientific process as related to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the laws, models, or theories that are applicable.
    2. Describe the physical laws, models, and theories.
    3. Analyze and apply the physical laws, models and theories.
    4. Assess (or Evaluate) the testability of a hypothesis.
    5. Develop appropriate physical hypotheses.
    6. Analyze and interpret the success or failure of physical hypotheses.

    Course Outcome

    Gain a familiarization with the scientist’s usage of specialized, scientific vocabulary relating to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Define terminology.
    2. Recall terminology.
    3. Employ terminology.

    Course Outcome
    Explore preconceptions concerning physical interactions and develop conceptual changes to reflect basic physics concepts relating to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Differentiate between intuitive expectations and established scientific principles through classroom discussion and laboratory exercises.
    2. Through lab experiments students will compare experimental results with preconceived notions.

    Course Outcome
    Gain experience in constructing both qualitative representations and then mathematical representations of physical situations relating to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Employ coordinate systems to analyze dynamic and static situations.
    2. Apply dimensional and unit analysis to give meaning to, and to communicate measurements.
    3. Construct free body diagrams to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    4. Draw/sketch vectors to demonstrate an understanding of various physical situations.
    5. Students will utilize various mathematical methods (i.e. vector, algebra, simultaneous linear equations, quadratic equations, calculus, etc….) to solve mathematical equations as related to various physical situations.
    6. Derive mathematical equations to describe, and explain, dynamic and static situations.
    7. Assess the reasonableness of final mathematical solutions.
    8. Organize ideas to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Course Outcome
    Gain experience in taking accurate data, organizing and analyzing this data dealing with experiments relating to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Collect data through experimentation and observation.
    2. Utilize various measuring instruments to collect data.
    3. Analyze and interpret data to arrive at a conclusion.
    4. Reproduce results that are commonly accepted.
    5. Based upon current theoretical models make predictions about experimental outcomes.
    6. Compare experimental conclusions to theoretical predictions.
    7. Organize results and conclusions to communicate understanding of mathematical and conceptual physics.

    Course Outcome
    Gain a historical perspective of the development of science and scientific laws relating to the physics of electromagnetism, electromagnetic waves, physical and geometric optics.

    Objectives

    1. Identify the historical laws, models, and theories.
    2. Describe the historical laws, models, and theories.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Lecture

    1. ELECTRIC FIELDS
      1. Electric Charge and. Coulomb’s Law of Electric Force
      2. Electric Fields
      3. Elementary Electric Charges
      4. Components of a Vector
      5. Vector Addition Using Components
      6. Electric Potential Energy
    2. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
      1. Electric Potential
      2. Electric Potential in the Field of Point Charges
      3. Electric Field Lines
      4. Electric Field Maps
      5. Relation Between Electric Field Strength and Potential
      6. Electric Acceleration of Charged Particles
    3. LAWS OF THE ELECTROSTATIC FIELD
      1. The Field Concept - An Analogy
      2. Flux of the Electric Field
      3. Gauss’s Law
      4. Electric Field Lines and Gauss’s Law
      5. Electric Field of a Uniformly Charged Sphere
      6. Electric Field Near a Charged Conducting Surface
      7. Conductors in Electrostatic Fields
      8. Potential Difference in Electrostatic Fields
      9. Evaluation of Line Integrals
      10. The Circulation Condition for Electrostatic Fields
    4. CAPACITANCE
      1. The Meaning of Capacitance
      2. Capacitance of an Isolated Sphere
      3. Parallel-Plate Capacitor
      4. Dielectrics
      5. Energy Stored in a Charged Capacitor
      6. Capacitors Connected in Series or Parallel
      7. Transient Behavior of a Capacitor - Time Constant
    5. MAGNETIC FIELDS
      1. Electricity and Magnetism
      2. Magnets and Magnetic Fields
      3. Magnetic Flux
      4. Magnetic Force on a Moving Charged Particle
      5. Motion of a Charged Particle in a Magnetic Field
      6. Ampere’s Law
      7. Magnetic Field Near a Long Straight Wire
      8. Magnetic Field in a Long Solenoid
    6. ELECTROMAGNETISM
      1. Electromagnetic Induction - Faraday’s Law
      2. Lenz’s Law
      3. Inductance and Inductors
      4. Transient Behavior of an Inductor - Time Constant
    7. ELECTRIC CURRENT
      1. Electric Current
      2. Continuity of Current
      3. Sources of Electromotance Electromotive Force
      4. Resistance and. Ohm’s Law
      5. A Microscopic View of Resistance
      6. Resistivity
      7. Variation of Resistivity with Temperature - Superconductivity
      8. Energy Transfer by Electric Current - Electric Power
    8. D.C. ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
      1. Diagrams of Electric Circuits
      2. Resistors Connected in Series or in and Parallels
      3. Open Circuits and Short Circuits
      4. Measurements Using Ammeters and Voltmeters
      5. Household Electric Circuits
      6. Direct Current Networks and. Kirchhoff’s Rules
    9. VARIABLE-CURRENT ELECTRIC CIRCUITS
      1. Concept of a Circuit
      2. Resistors, Batteries, and S-C Circuits
      3. Kirchhoff’s Rules and Capacitance
      4. Charging a Capacitor
      5. Discharging a Capacitor
      6. Kirchhoff’s Second Rule and Inductance
      7. LR Series V-C Circuits
    10. ALTERNATING-CURRENT CIRCUITS
      1. Voltages Sinusoidal in Time and. Impedance
      2. Series LRC Circuits
      3. Steady-State Voltages in a Series LRC Circuit
      4. Power in A-C Circuits
      5. Resonance in a Series LRC Circuit
    11. LIGHT WAVES
      1. Some Properties of Waves
      2. Diffraction by a Single Slit
      3. Interference of Waves
      4. Young’s Experiment
      5. The Nature of Light and. Electromagnetic Waves
      6. The Electromagnetic Spectrum
      7. Measurements of the Speed of Light
      8. Index of Refraction
      9. Diffraction of Light by a Grating
      10. Explanation of Diffraction by a Grating
    12. REFLECTION AND REFRACTION OF LIGHT
      1. Models for Light and. Light Rays
      2. Types of Reflecting Surfaces
      3. Laws of Reflection and Refraction
      4. Total Internal Reflection and. Critical Angle
      5. Dispersion - Refraction by a Prism
    13. MIRRORS AND LENSES
      1. Objects and Images
      2. Image Formation by Convex Mirrors
      3. Image Formation by Concave Mirrors
      4. Image Formation by Thin Lenses

    LAB

    1. Electric Field Mapping
      1. Ohm’s Law
      2. Resistances in Circuits
      3. Series & Parallel Circuits
      4. Kirchhoff’s Rules
      5. The Wheatstone Bridge
    2. Parallel-Plate Capacitance
      1. Capacitance Networks

    Primary Faculty
    Fey, Francette
    Secondary Faculty
    Skonieczny, Timothy
    Associate Dean
    Young, Randall
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Plumbing & Pipefitting

  
  • ATPP 1100 - Plumbing Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Specifications, applications, and maintenance of pipes, fittings, and valves. Provides a basic knowledge of simple pipe calculations and template development. A study of tools used in piping. Proper valve installation and maintenance. Consideration of safe working pressures of pipes and valves.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate math problems related to pipe and pipefitting.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a picture of a standard rule, the student will read 3 marked dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    2. Given 3 sets of fractional dimensions, the student will add these dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    3. Given 3 sets of fractional dimensions, the student will subtract these dimensions, to an accuracy of 67%.
    4. Given 3 fractional dimensions in inches, the student will convert these dimensions to feet and inches, to an accuracy of 67%.
    5. Given 3 fractional dimensions in feet and inches, the student will convert these dimensions to inches, to an accuracy of 67%.
    6. Given the run and the offset, the student will calculate the travel of the pipe using the Pythagorean Theorem, to an accuracy of 100%.
    7. Given the run and the offset, the student will calculate the travel of the pipe using the Pipefitter’s Handbook, to an accuracy of 100%.
    8. Given the diameter and the length, the student will calculate the volume of a cylinder, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the proper application of valves.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify the ground key valve, gate valve, globe valve, ball valve, and check valve, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify the corporation valve, curb stop, meter stop, stop and waste valve, flush valve, and vacuum breaker, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify the flush valve, pressure relief valve, back water valve, and pressure regulator valve, to an accuracy of 70%

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the proper use of piping materials.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify ABS plastic pipe, PVC plastic pipe, CPVC plastic pipe, PEX plastic pipe, black steel pipe, galvanized steel pipe, copper pipe, and cast iron pipe, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a supply or waste location in the plumbing system, the student will describe which type of pipe is normally used in that location, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given 5 different piping materials, the student will describe the method of fastening sections of pipe, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to select the proper plumbing fittings.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify a sanitary tee, sanitary wye, fixture tee, P‐trap, closet flange, bushing, street ell, drop ell, MIPT adapter, union and dielectric union, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, the student will identify a hub and spigot connection, no‐hub connection and mechanical joint, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of standards, the student will identify the true diameters and lengths of thread for ½ inch, ¾ inch and 1 inch malleable fittings, to an accuracy of 70%

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to select the proper piping size to the application.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the appropriate charts and a plumbing layout, the student will determine the individual fixture dfu, the branch dfu, and the sewer dfu load factors, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given the appropriate charts and a plumbing layout, the student will determine the individual fixture drain size, the branch drain size, and the sewer size, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given the appropriate charts and a plumbing layout, the student will determine the individual fixture supply size, distribution pipe sizes, and the service pipe size, to an accuracy of 70%

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Safety and Plumbing Tools
    2. Mathematics for Plumbers/Hydraulic and Pneumatics
    3. Print Reading and Sketching/Rigging and Hoisting/Building and Plumbing Codes/Excavating
    4. Water Supply Systems/Water Treatment/Plumbing Fixtures
    5. Piping Materials and Fittings/Valves and Meters/Water Heaters
    6. Designing Plumbing Systems/Preparing for Plumbing System Installation/DWV Pipe & Fitting Installation
    7. Installing Water Supply Piping/Supporting and Testing Pipe/Installing Fixtures, Faucets and Appliances
    8. Septic Systems/Storm Water and Sumps/Installing HVAC Systems/Swimming Pools, Hot Tubs and Spas/Irrigation Systems
    9. Repairing DWV Systems/Repairing Water Supply Systems/Remodeling/Job Organization

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATPP 1110 - Plumbing-Drain, Waste & Vent

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATAM 1150  or ATAM 1160  or consent of apprenticeship coordinator

    Proper materials of sewer, soil, vent, and waste pipes. The principles of drainage flow and proper venting. A study of traps and installation of unit sanitation equipment. Includes a study of joints and fittings used on drainage systems.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to select the proper plumbing tools, materials, and fittings for a given plumbing procedure.

    Objectives:

    1. Given descriptions and pictures, the student will identify and name 22 typical plumbing tools, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given descriptions and pictures, the student will identify and name 12 typical plumbing operations, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given a typical plumbing tree, the student will identify the component fittings, to an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Given a typical copper joint, the student will describe the flux, solder and temperature required, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to join, install, and support the pipe within a building according to the standards provided within the text.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a typical copper joint, the student will describe the cleaning, heating and solder feeding, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a typical steel pipe joint, the student will describe the cutting, reaming, threading and joining of steel pipe, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given a typical mechanical joint, the student will describe the grooving, clamping, and securing of steel pipe, to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given a typical plastic pipe joint, the student will describe the cutting, cleaning, priming and cementing of PVC pipe, to an accuracy of 100%.
    5. Given a table from the text or from the International Plumbing Code, the student will calculate hanger spacing for four piping materials, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the principles considered in the installation of sanitary drainage piping, vent piping and storm drainage piping.

    Objectives:

    1. Given test questions, the student will describe scouring action, flow velocity and proper pitch of horizontal drainage piping, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given test questions, the student will describe wet venting, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given test questions, the student will describe individual, re‐vent and common venting, to an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Given a typical plumbing tree and tables in the text, the student will calculate pipe sizes using dfu factors, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to sketch the minimum venting requirements for a one family dwelling.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a plumbing waste tree and standards listed in the text, the student will sketch the piping of all required venting, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given a plumbing waste tree with the required venting and standards listed in the text, the student will calculate the minimum vent pipe sizes, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to sketch the minimum venting requirements for a two story one family dwelling.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a plumbing waste tree and standards listed in the text, the student will sketch the piping of all required venting, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given a plumbing waste tree with the required venting and standards listed in the text, the student will calculate the minimum vent pipe sizes, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the wsfu factors that determine the size of water piping.

    Objectives:

    1. Given exam questions, the student will define demand, flow rate and water service fixture unit, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given tables in the text and exam questions, the student will select the correct wsfu factors for five plumbing fixtures, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to list and explain the use of the tools needed to air test a sanitary and drainage vent piping system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given descriptions and pictures, the student will identify and name the components of the test plug assembly, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given exam questions, the student will identify the appropriate test pressure, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given a drawing of a manometer, the student will determine the correct pressure reading, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the layout and design procedure of the various systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a worksheet, the student will follow the steps to lay out waste drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given a worksheet, the student will follow the steps to lay out storm drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given a worksheet, the student will follow the steps to lay out water supply system, to an accuracy of 80%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction and Handouts
    2. Tools and Safety
    3. Math
    4. Plumbing Materials
    5. Tools and Equipment
    6. Joining, Installing and Supporting Pipe
    7. Sanitary Drainage, Vent and Storm Drainage Piping
    8. Sizing Sanitary Drainage and Vents
    9. Plumbing Traps and Testing and Inspecting Plumbing Systems

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATPP 1120 - Plumbing-Heating

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATPP 1100 

    Principles of steam and hydronic heating. The various types of steam systems in use. The proper sizing and trapping of steam units. An extensive study of hydronic heating including: one pipe, two pipe, high temperature and pressure systems. Considerations will be given to heat loss calculations and the design of hydronic systems.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to perform a hydronic system heat loss calculation.

    Objectives:

    1. Given the IBR tables of heat loss factors and a typical house plan, calculate the room by room heat loss, to an accuracy of 90%.
    2. Given the IBR tables of heat loss factors and a typical house plan, calculate the whole house heat loss, to an accuracy of 90%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the difference steam heating systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify a one pipe steam heating system, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify the major components of a one pipe steam heating system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify a two pipe steam heating system, to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify the major components of a two pipe steam heating system, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the various steam traps.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify the thermostatic trap, the F&T trap, and the inverted bucket trap, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a location in a two pipe steam heating system, identify whether to apply a thermostatic trap, an F&T trap, or an inverted bucket trap, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify five different hot water systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify a series loop hot water system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify one pipe hot water system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify two pipe reverse return hot water system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    4. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify two pipe direct return hot water system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    5. Given a set of pictures or descriptions, identify radiant hot water system, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to choose the correct hot water boiler for a heating system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given manufacturer’s specifications and the result of a whole house heat loss calculation, select a boiler to fit the application, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to choose the correct pump for a hot water heating system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given manufacturer’s specifications, the result of a whole house heat loss calculation, and the required head for the system, select a pump to fit the application, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to design a series loop hot water heating system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a typical house plan, the result of a room by room heat loss calculation, and manufacturer’s specifications for baseboard radiators, locate the correct length of baseboard in each room, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a layout of baseboard radiators, draw the piping loop connecting all radiators, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given piping loop and sizing tables, determine the pipe sizes and the resulting system head, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to design a simple gas piping system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given an appliance layout and the GAMA pipe sizing tables at ½ inch pressure loss, determine the branch pipe sizes, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given an appliance layout and the GAMA pipe sizing tables at ½ inch pressure loss, will determine the main pipe sizes, to an accuracy of 100%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Introduction/History
    2. Harnessing Heat
    3. Selecting and Placing a Boiler
    4. Components of Hydronic Hot Water Heating Systems
    5. Piping of Hydronic Hot Water Heating
    6. Sizing of Hydronic Hot Water Heating Systems
    7. Auxiliary Heating Loads
    8. Components of Hydronic Steam Heating Systems
    9. Piping of Hydronic Steam Heating Systems
    10. Steam Heat Troubleshooting
    11. Radiant Heating Basics
    12. System Survey Forms Gas Piping

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATPP 1130 - Plumbing-Code

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: ATPP 1100 

    Plumbing rules and regulations governing installation of plumbing systems. Considerations are also given to the rules and regulations pertaining to joints, traps, cleanouts, water distribution, fixtures and drainage.

    Billable Contact Hours: 2

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to differentiate the responsibilities of the various entities involved in completing a plumbing project.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will identify when the building owner is able to procure permits, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will identify when the master plumber is able to procure permits, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the limitations and responsibilities of the contractor, to an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the limitations and responsibilities of the inspector, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate the number and type of fixtures required for any commercial occupancy.

    Objectives:

    1. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and final exam ques ons, the student will calculate the number of water closets required in a theater, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will calculate the number of urinals allowed in any building, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and final exam questions, the student will calculate the number of lavatories required in an office, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the minimum sizes and safety requirements for water heaters.

    Objectives:

    1. Given lecture notes and final exam questions, the student will pick the minimum size water heater required in a four bedroom home, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the correct safety relief valve for a water heater, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will identify the correct termination height for the discharge of the relief valve for a water heater, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate the minimum pipe sizes for a commercial water distribution system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the number of wsfu’s, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the fixture pressure requirements, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the equivalent length requirements, to an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the supply pipe size, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate the minimum pipe sizes for a commercial sanitary drainage system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the number of dfu’s, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the horizontal branch pipe sizes, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the stack pipe size, to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and fixture requirements for a building, the student will determine the building drain/sewer pipe size, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate the minimum pipe sizes for a roof storm drainage system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and location of a building, the student will determine the probable rainfall, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and the roof area of a building, the student will determine the gutter size, to an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and the roof area of a building, the student will determine the leader/conductor size, to an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and the roof area of a building, the student will determine the building storm drain/sewer pipe size, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to calculate the minimum pipe sizes for a drainage vent system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a layout of a plumbing drainage system, the student will size each vent pipe shown, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given tables available in the current International Plumbing Code and a layout of a plumbing drainage system with a vent developed length greater than 40 feet, the student will determine the size of each vent pipe shown, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the function and location of a trap.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will describe the reason for a trap in a plumbing drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will list the required locations for a trap in a plumbing drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given final exam questions, the student will list minimum trap sizes for five plumbing fixtures, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the function and location of a clean‐out.

    Objectives:

    1. Given final exam questions, the student will describe the reason for a clean‐out in a plumbing drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will list the required locations for a clean‐out in a plumbing drainage system, to an accuracy of 80%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Administration
    2. Definitions
    3. General Regulations
    4. Fixtures, Faucets and Water Heaters
    5. Water Supply and Distribution
    6. Sanitary Drainage
    7. Indirect/Special Waste
    8. Vents
    9. Traps
    10. Storm Drainage
    11. Fuel Piping & Special Piping

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATPP 1140 - Pipefitting-Power Piping Systems

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: ATPP 1100  and ATWD 1110 ; or consent of apprenticeship coordinator or related work experience

    Introduction to maintenance for power piping systems, steam, gas, water, and air. The study of generating power for industrial application and conversion of water to steam for power. Considerations are also given to safety, definitions, and application of piping terms; materials such as hangers, flanges, valves, and gaskets for the various systems are included. Specifications standards of threaded and welded systems, fabrication, including welding hot and cold bending of steel and tubing, are thoroughly examined.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe and show on paper how to field fabricate pipe fittings to industry standards.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble a four‐piece pipe bend, to an accuracy of 90%.
    2. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble a tee and a reducing tee, to an accuracy of 90%.
    3. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble a lateral and a reducing lateral, to an accuracy of 90%.
    4. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble a cross fitting, to an accuracy of 90%.
    5. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble a concentric reducer and an eccentric reducer, to an accuracy of 90%.
    6. Given a pattern and step‐by‐step instructions in the text, the student will construct on paper, cut out, and assemble an orange peel plug and a bull plug, to an accuracy of 90%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to list and describe three steam traps.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify a thermostatic steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify an F&T steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify an inverted bucket steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.
    4. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will describe the difference in operation of each trap, to an accuracy of 80%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair of three steam traps.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify operational problems and maintenance of a thermostatic steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.
    2. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify operational problems and maintenance of an F&T steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.
    3. Given a video presentation and exam questions, the student will identify operational problems and maintenance of an inverted bucket steam trap, to an accuracy of 80%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Pipe Bends
    2. Tees
    3. Reducing Tees
    4. Video: Let’s Talk Steam Traps
    5. Lateral
    6. Reducing Lateral
    7. Welding Fittings, Flanges, Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts
    8. Midterm Exam
    9. Cross Fittings
    10. Concentric Reducers
    11. Eccentric Reducer
    12. Orange Peel Plug, Bull Plug
    13. Fabricating Fittings from 90 degree Welding Elbow
    14. Semester Review
    15. Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • ATPP 1150 - Pipe Fitting Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly ATPP 2913)

    A study of piping, joints, fittings, valves, hangers, fluid flow in pipes, and pumps. An overview Steam Fitting, Hydronic Fitting, and Refrigeration Fitting.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the various types of pipe materials.

    Objectives:

    1. Given descriptions on exam questions, the student will identify cast iron; PVC; CPVC; ABS; types K, L & M copper; black iron; and galvanized and stainless steel piping, to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given final exam questions, the student will describe the application of cast iron; PVC; CPVC; ABS; types K, L & M copper; black iron; and galvanized and stainless steel pipe, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a list of pipes, the student will determine the material used, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the various types of pipe joints.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a list of cast iron; PVC; CPVC; ABS; types K, L & M copper; black iron; and galvanized and stainless steel pipe, the student will identify the type of joint - thread, solder, flare, cement, compression, or flange ‐ to an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Given a list of joint types on a work sheet, the student will describe the fabrication of the joint, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a list of joint types in a lab setting, the student will fabricate three types of joints, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the various types of valves.

    Objectives:

    1. Given descriptions on exam questions, the student will identify gate, globe, ball, butterfly, check, relief, and safety valves, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a list of 7 valves on exam questions, the student will describe the application of each valve in a system, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a list of 3 valves on exam questions, the student will describe the operation of each valve, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the various types of fittings, nipples, flanges, and gaskets.

    Objectives:

    1. Given pictures of fittings, the student will identify the tee, cross, ell, union, and wye, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a catalog of pipe nipples, the student will select 3 standard sized nipples, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given pictures of 3 flanges, the student will identify the manufacturer of each flange, to an accuracy of 70%.
    4. Given pictures of 3 gaskets, the student will identify the applications of each gasket, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the various types of pipe hangers and their appropriate spacing.

    Objectives:

    1. Given 8 pipe materials, the student will identify the acceptable hanger material, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given pictures of 8 hangers, the student will identify the correct name, to an accuracy of 70%.
    3. Given a list of 8 hangers, the student will identify the application, to an accuracy of 70%.
    4. Given tables from the text or the current International Plumbing Code and 8 pipe materials, the student will determine the allowable spacing between hangers, to an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the effect of pressure on the fluid flow in pipes.

    Objectives:

    1. Given tables of pipefittings, the student will determine the equivalent length of fittings, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given graphs of fluid flow in five pipe materials, the student will determine the flow for a given pressure, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the components and piping used in steam fitting.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will identify 20 components, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will describe the operation of 4 components, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the components and piping used in steam fitting.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will identify 20 components, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will describe the operation of 4 components, to an accuracy of 70%.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to identify the components and piping used in steam fitting.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will identify 20 components, to an accuracy of 70%.
    2. Given a layout of a typical steam system, the student will describe the operation of 4 components, to an accuracy of 70%.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction
    2. Pipe
    3. Tubing
    4. Valves
    5. Fittings
    6. Gaskets, Offsets, and Measurements
    7. Pipe Layout
    8. Piping Prints
    9. Pipe Welding and Soldering
    10. Rigging and Safety

    Primary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Pawlowski, Timothy
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Political Science

  
  • POLS 1000 - Introduction to American Politics

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Survey course dealing with the major aspects of American politics: its policy making process and structure at all levels of government.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate their knowledge of politics in relation to the concepts of power, conflict, popular sovereignty, authority, and legal and political accountability.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and define key terms.
    2. Identify, explain, and define democracy, its major characteristics, and conditions for success.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate their knowledge of American political culture, identify its main ideological components, core values, and beliefs, and distinguish between ideals and realities of democratic models.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and define core political values, culture, and class.
    2. Identify, explain, and define ideology and socialization.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate a working knowledge of the constitution, the evolution of individual rights and liberties, rights in the workplace, relevant case law, and the functioning of the judicial system.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain American constitutional government; identify key features and constitutional powers.
    2. Explain the concept and evolution of rights and liberties.
    3. Identify the process of nationalization.
    4. Identify substantive rights, procedural rights, and settled law.
    5. Explain the evolution of constitutional law.
    6. Identify and explain legislated rights (political, legal, and economic).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will identify key elements of the political decision-making process, including the convergence of influences of interest groups, media, public opinion, and political participation on both policy and the electoral process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain the media’s impact on politics.
    2. Identify the importance of interest group participation and influence on American politics.
    3. Identify how public opinion is measured and its varying impact on American politics.
    4. Identify the various forms of political participation.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate their knowledge of elections in American politics and the elements of modern political campaigns.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and define the role of the media, interest groups, and public opinion on elections.
    2. Identify controversies regarding modern elections and potential for reform.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate their comprehension of the relationship between the branches of government in terms of competition, compromise, and cooperation.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and define the role of Congress in policy-making and its power relationship to the president and the judiciary.
    2. Identify, explain, and define the role of the President in policy-making and its relationship to Congress and the Judiciary.
    3. Identify, explain, and define the importance of the Supreme Court and the U.S. legal system in American politics.
    4. Identify, explain, and define the relationship between the Courts and the Congress and President.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    UNIT I The American Democratic System

    1. Introduction To Government and Politics
      1. Overview of Functions of Government
      2. Power, Legitimacy, Accountability, Social Contract
      3. The Rule of Law
    2. Democracy in a Republic
      1. Theoretical Values versus Reality
      2. Major Characteristics
      3. Conditions for Success
      4. The American People: Demographic Profile
    3. Core Values
      1. Political Culture
      2. National Consensus in a Diverse Society
      3. Concepts of Liberty and Equality (Political, Legal, and Economic)
      4. Majority “Rule” and Minority Rights
      5. Class Wars and Culture Wars
    4. Ideologies
      1. Political Socialization
      2. The American Political Spectrum (Ideological Groupings)
      3. Attitudes About the Role of Government
      4. Specific Ideologies
        1. Liberal
        2. Conservative
        3. Libertarian
        4. Progressive
        5. Neo-Conservative
      5. Political Diversity, Conflict, and Compromise
    5. Constitutional Government
      1. The Road From Confederate States to Nation (Union)
      2. Features of the Constitution
        1. Republican Form of Government
        2. Separation of Powers
        3. Checks and Balances
        4. Flexible document
      3. Constitutional Powers
        1. Enumerated, Implied, Inherent
        2. Exclusive, Shared (Concurrent)
        3. Prohibited
        4. Judicial Interpretation
    6. Federal/States Relationship
      1. National Supremacy - An Evolving Concept

    UNIT II Civil Liberties and Civil Rights

    1. The Concept and Evolution of Liberties
      1. The Social Contract and Influences of the Enlightenment
      2. The Purpose of the Bill of Rights
      3. Who Is Left Out?
    2. Nationalizing the Bills
      1. Incorporation under the 14th Amendment
      2. Who, What, Where, and How do the Bills Protect?
      3. Substantive Rights: Expression, Association, and Privacy
      4. Procedural Rights: Due Process Considerations
        1. Access to Justice
        2. Rights in Time of War
      5. Settled Law
    3. Evolution of Constitutional Law
      1. International Influences
      2. Exceptionalism
      3. “Constitution in Exile”
    4. Legislated Rights
      1. Why Are They Necessary?
      2. The Roots of Discrimination
      3. Segregation and Jim Crow
      4. The Civil Rights Movement and Civil Rights Legislation
      5. Affirmative Action Issues
      6. Discrimination Against Women
      7. Current Racial, Ethnic, and Gender Discrimination Issues
      8. Workplace Rights
      9. Opportunity and Equality: Political, Legal, Economic

    UNIT III Links Between People and Government

    1. The Media
      1. Media’s Role and Impact on Politics
        1. Setting the Agenda
        2. Investigations
        3. Making and Breaking Politicians
        4. Adversarial or Embedded
      2. Media as Big Business
      3. Media Concentration and Results for Politics
      4. Mainstream Media and the Internet Challenge
      5. Government Censorship and “Self-Censorship”
      6. Media Bias
        1. Advocacy Media
        2. Negative Undercurrents About Government
        3. Issue Bias
        4. Infotainment
        5. Commercial Bias and Consequences
      7. Is the Media Responsive to the People?
    2. Interest Groups
      1. What Are They and Why Are They?
        1. “Who gets What, When, How, and Why?”
        2. Purpose of All Interest Groups
        3. Types of Interest Groups
      2. The Inside Strategy: Lobbying
        1. Methods Used
      3. The Outside Strategy: Going Public
        1. Methods Used
      4. Electioneering
      5. Using the Courts
      6. Do Interest Groups Make Government Responsive?
      7. Are Interest Groups Good for Democracy?
    3. Political Participation

      1. The American Voter
        1. Early Restrictions/Consequences
        2. Suffrage Reforms
        3. Profile of the Current Voter
        4. Why Do So Many Not Vote?
        5. Comparisons To Other Democracies
        6. Possible Reforms
      2. Participation Beyond Voting
        1. What Works and How
        2. Citizen Activism Today
    4. Campaigns and Elections
      1. Changes in Political Campaigns
        1. Candidate Centered Campaigns
        2. Role of the Media
        3. Role of Money, Role of PACs
        4. Role of Professionals
        5. Role of Political Parties
        6. Role of the Internet
        7. Does All of This Help the Voter Decide?
      2. The Permanent Campaign
        1. Keeping One’s Seat Safe
        2. Does Money Buy Influence?
      3. Presidential Campaigns
        1. Who runs, Why, and How?
        2. Primaries and General Elections: Framing the Issues Differently
        3. Electoral College
      4. Congressional Campaigns
        1. Who, Why, and How
        2. The Incumbent Advantage
      5. Third Parties
        1. What is Their Place in Politics?
      6. Possible Reforms
        1. Public Financing
        2. Proportional Representation
        3. Procedural Reform

    UNIT IV Policy-Making Institutions

    1. Congress
      1. The Role of Congress - What Does it Do?
      2. Members and Who They Represent
      3. Demographics of Congress
      4. Advantage of Incumbency
      5. House and Senate Differences
      6. The Importance of Committees
      7. Congressional Leadership
      8. Majority Party Rule, Minority Party Role
      9. Congress and the President: Nature of the Relationship
    2. Presidency
      1. Evolution of the Role of President
      2. Powers and Responsibilities
        1. Executive Powers
        2. Head of State
        3. Foreign Policy Leader
        4. Commander-In-Chief
        5. Head of His Party/Chief Fundraiser
      3. Presidential Leadership
        1. President and the Public
        2. Presidential Decision-Making
        3. Unilateral Presidency
      4. President and the Media
      5. The Limits of Presidential Power
    3. The Judiciary
      1. The Dual Court System
      2. The Federal Courts: Structure and Role
      3. The Decision-Making Process of the Supreme Court
      4. The Power of Judicial Review
      5. Selecting Lifetime Appointees
        1. The Process
        2. The Politics
        3. The Effects
      6. Are Judges Independent?
      7. From Weakest Branch (Founders) to Most Powerful Branch?
      8. Are the Federal Courts Responsive to the People?

    Primary Faculty
    Cross, Matthew
    Secondary Faculty
    Allen, Brooke
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1101 - Politics in Film, Music & Art-Contemporary Political Issues

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course explores the power of images and sounds to deliver political messages and affect the way we think about political issues. It will focus on controversial topics presented in films and documentaries.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate their knowledge of politics in relation to image and sound.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and define key terms.
    2. Identify, define, and explain basic genres of film.
    3. Identify and define key constitutional, legislative, and legal foundations of the production, distribution, and consumption of film, music, and art.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to demonstrate their understanding of how film, music and art shapes, changes, and reinforces how we think about politics and political issues.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain how film and other art forms contribute to our understanding of politics, power, public policies, social conditions, justice, and value systems.
    2. Identify and explain film and other art forms convey points of view through dramatic structure and image.
    3. Critically analyze and explain important political themes in film and art.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to competently communicate the relationship between film, music and art and critical political problems in a democratic society.

    Objectives:

    1. Argue and defend various interpretations and perspectives on political messages in specific films.
    2. Argue and defend interpretations and perspectives on the political context of various musical genres.
    3. Research and explore a variety of source material relating to popular culture, film, music and art, and synthesize the results.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to analyze film, music and art from a diverse and global perspective.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain multicultural factors and their significance
    2. Identify and explain how various political themes are expressed across genres from an international perspective (theme-specific when a theme is established)
    3. Identify, explain, and analyze diverse historical, sociological, and political perspectives as expressed in film and music.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    The course content outline is divided into two components. The first component includes an overview of the role of film, music, and art in American politics. The second component will depend on the thematic focus chosen for the semester. The second component provided below will focus on law and justice, although themes will vary semester to semester at the professor’s discretion.

    1. The Role of Film, Music, and Art in Politics
      1. A brief historical overview of the topic
      2. General introduction to the relationship of politics and popular culture
      3. The relationship of the government to film production, music, and art, including legislative, constitutional, and legal foundations
      4. Transmiting ideological and political messages
      5. Government censorship in the past, the new censors, and industry self-censorship
      6. Shaping the American mind
      7. Comparative examples of propaganda
      8. The use of image and sound in political campaigns
      9. Shaping public opinion in war
      10. The motion picture as primary source material
      11. The consequences of concentrated media power
      12. The role of the political documentary: Narrative realism? Is objectivity in film possible?
      13. Guidelines for evaluating images and sounds
    2. Law and Justice in Film
      1. General overview of the American judicial system
      2. Legal conflict as depicted in the “reel” justice system
      3. Law and the participants (lawyers, judges, jurors, prosecutors) in an adversarial system, e.g., Anatomy of a Murder; Twelve Angry Men; To Kill a Mockingbird; Philadelphia
      4. Due process and crime control, e.g., Murder in the First; and Justice for All; Presumed Innocent; The Star Chamber
      5. Law, political power, and resistance, e.g., Iron Jawed Angels;
      6. Tort litigation: up against the big odds, e. g., A Civil Action; The Insider
      7. Hollywood depicts the death penalty, e.g., Dead Man Walking; The Ox Bow Incident
      8. Law and morality in a time of emergency, e.g., The Trial of Joan of Arc
      9. Gender and race issues in legal films J. Military justice films, e.g., The Soldier’s Story; Breaker Morant; Prisoners of the Sun
      10. International and comparative law films, e.g., Judgment at Nuremberg; A Dry White Season; In the Name of the Father
      11. Popular culture, constitutional issues, and realism, e.g., The Thin Blue Line; Brother’s Keeper; With all Deliberate Speed; Skokie; Incident at Oglala
      12. Summary evaluation of the significance of popular culture’s representation of the legal system

    Primary Faculty
    Cross, Matthew
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1200 - Local & State Government

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Survey course dealing with the major aspects of state and local government: the structures of government, their policy‑making process, and major trends in metropolitan and suburban politics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, the student will be able to

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the structural arrangement of the various levels of state and local government.
    2. Identify the participants at the various levels of state and local government.
    3. Understand the relations between and among state and local governments and the federal government.
    4. Discuss current problems of policy making within the governmental process at state and local government.
    5. Analyze a major policy area such as education, environment or transportation.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Overall view of State and Local Government
    2. Participants in the Political System
    3. The Administrative System
    4. The Legislative System
    5. The Legal System
    6. Intra-Governmental Relationships
    7. State and Local Finances
    8. Local Governments

    Primary Faculty
    Flemming, Gary
    Secondary Faculty
    Allen, Brooke
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1500 - Leadership Development

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Students in this course will learn theories, ideas, and practical strategies for leadership development. Students will examine past and present leadership figures in various contexts (political, movement, non-profit, and business), analyze the strengths and weaknesses of various leadership models, and develop leadership skills in the context of teams and groups.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1 : Students will be able to evaluate leadership theories and practices with an emphasis on representing the needs of diverse community members.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the needs of diverse community members
    2. Analyze the factors of community change
    3. Explain the impact of change on various communities, and analyze the complex impacts of past changes on vulnerable communities.

    Outcome 2: Students will be able to explain the relationship between leadership theories and the effect of those theories on various groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify theories of leadership.
    2. Analyze past and current leaders and the context(s) in which they acted.
    3. Analyze case studies of leadership practices and their impact.

    Outcome 3: Students will be able to explain modern leadership skills rooted in community service, diversity, and accountability.

    1. Develop effective leadership skills for community organizations
    2. Practice various leadership skills and strategies
    3. Analyze the elements and processes involved in decision making

    Outcome 4: Students will be able to analyze the dynamics of conflict and its resolution.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the processes of negotiation, mediation, facilitation, and consensus.
    2. Analyze theories of conflict resolution
    3. Practice self-reflection, self-awareness, empathy, and communication techniques in conflict scenarios.

    Outcome 5: Students will be able to distinguish the differences in value, power and resources that impede or facilitate effective leadership.

    Objectives:

    1. Analyze leadership dynamics in relation to political, economic, and social power.
    2. Explain the role of a leader in initiating change and helping others adapt to change
    3. Practice leadership roles and strategies.
    4. Analyze empowerment, delegation, and building trust as effective leadership skills.

    Outcome 6: Students will be able to formulate a reflection and analysis of leadership within the local community.

    Objectives:

    1. Document student/group work experience during the semester
    2. Analyze student/group work experience in the context of class goals and materials.
    3. Evaluate student/group learning and skill development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course Outline:

    1. What is leadership?
      1. Identifying various definitions of leadership as it relates to different institutional and organizing models.
      2. Traditional understandings of leadership
      3. Identifying and practicing cultural/ethnic competency as a core value of leadership.
    2. What is the value of leadership?
      1. Understanding the impact of leadership on social movements and interest groups in the US
      2. Identifying and analyzing social, political, and economic power dynamics (historical/present; global/local)
      3. Understanding diversity in the context of leadership.
    3. What is the purpose of leadership?
      1. Effective administration
      2. Visionary leadership
      3. Accountability
    4. Leadership and power dynamics
      1. Understanding power dynamics in society, institutions, groups and communities;
      2. Analyze and identify larger social/political/economic power dynamics and their impact (advantageous/discriminatory) on various communities.
      3. Review various power dynamics related to leadership within organizations
      4. Autocratic versus Democratic leadership; benefits and drawbacks of each
    5. Which leadership practices lead to change?
      1. Critically examining past and current leadership examples
      2. Exploring theories, techniques and strategies for successful organizing
      3. How do leaders assess their own success or failure?
      4. Individual leadership versus interdependent leadership versus shared leadership (“we are all leaders”)
      5. “The leader always eats last.”
    6. Demographic Characteristics of Leaders
      1. Value System, Ethics and Culture
      2. Generational Differences
      3. Abilities and Skills
      4. Intelligence: Practical and Emotional
      5. Creativity and Divergent Thinking
      6. Relevant Personality Traits
      7. Characteristics of Leaders Who Fail
    7. Leadership and Communication
      1. Transformational and Charismatic leadership
      2. Reinforcing vision and mission through communication
    8. Public and private models of leadership
      1. Goals of public institutions versus private institutions
      2. How organizational goals shape leadership style
    9. Leadership and Diversity
      1. The complexity of “diversity”
      2. Diversity or Inclusion?
      3. “Nothing about us without us”: understanding the limitations of organizations and leadership structures lacking diversity
      4. What is the value of diversity in the decision-making process?
      5. What is the value of diversity in executing leadership and organizational goals
    10. Ethical Leadership
      1. “If the President does it, it’s not illegal”: understanding the limitations of power
      2. Abuse and corruption
      3. The concept of institutional ethics
      4. The elements of ethical leadership
      5. Organizational accountability
      6. The complexities inherent in ethical leadership
      7. Modeling leadership for others
    11. Leadership Development
      1. Preparing the next generation
      2. Identifying and uplifting leadership qualities throughout the organization
      3. Understanding and encouraging mentorship
      4. Seeing leadership in all places: how time, events, and needs shape leadership and how we understand it

    Primary Faculty
    Cross, Matthew
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1600 - International Politics

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: POLS 1000 

    Introductory study of international relations, designed to acquaint students with basic factors motivating behavior of nations as illustrated by present world affairs.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course students will be able to discuss the differences between domestic politics and world politics.

    Objectives:

    • List the major participants of both domestic and world politics and recall their goals and objectives
    • Explain what power is
    • Describe the attributes of a political actor that contribute to its power
    • Prepare a table that illustrates the power rankings of major actors

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course students will be able to explain the relationship between social science and the study of world politics.

    Objectives:

    • Identify the purposes and goals of science
    • Outline the scientific method
    • Explain what the levels of analysis are
    • Evaluate a published article as to its scientific merit

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course students will be able to relate the major theoretical explanations for international conflict and economic growth on the systemic level of analysis.

    Objectives:

    • Point out the effect of geography on international conflict and economic growth
    • Analyze the role of globalization on international conflict and economic growth
    • Ascertain if there are ant patterns in international conflict and economic growth

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course students will be able to relate the major theoretical explanations for international conflict and economic growth on the on the national

    Objectives:

    • Point out the effect of culture on the potential for international conflict and economic growth
    • Examine the role of a nation’s political system and its use of violence to resolve international conflict and its potential economic growth
    • Compare the role of a nation’s political system and its use of violence to resolve international conflict and its potential economic growth.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to relate the major theoretical explanations for international conflict and economic growth on the sub-nation state level of analysis.

    Objectives:

    • Formulate the rational decision-making process
    • Assess the impact of domestic social institutions and groups on ability of main decision maker to construct a rational foreign policy.
    • Model the role of bureaucracies and governmental groups in the formulation of foreign policy.
    • Outline the standard intellectual and psychological limitations of rational decision-making and how they affect the potential for international conflict.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Not available.
    Primary Faculty
    Flemming, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1700 - Organizing & Conflict Resolution

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course introduces students to social and political power dynamics in the context of organizing and resolving conflict. It explores strategies and theories around building community, building power from the resources of that community, and using power strategically to make concrete change. The course also explores root causes of conflict, and provides skills and practice in several methods of conflict resolution, particularly those that facilitate connection and understanding among diverse groups of people.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Students will be able to evaluate leadership practice and development with an emphasis on representing the needs of diverse community members.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the needs of diverse community members
    2. Analyze the role of leadership in community change and evolution
    3. Explain the impact of community change on diverse community members

    Outcome 2: Students will be able to explain the relationship between leadership theories and the effect of those theories on various groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify theories of leadership.
    2. Analyze case studies of leadership practices and their impact.

    Outcome 3: Students will be able to explain modern leadership skills rooted in community service, diversity, and accountability.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop effective leadership skills for community organizations
    2. Practice various leadership skills and strategies.

    Outcome 4: Students will be able to analyze the dynamics of effective and ineffective leadership styles and models.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the processes of negotiation, mediation, facilitation, and consensus.
    2. Analyze theories of leadership as applied to various organizations
    3. Practice critical thinking and reflection, self-awareness, and communication techniques in leadership scenarios.

    Outcome 5: Students will be able to distinguish the differences in value, power and resources that impede or facilitate leadership development and success.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify concepts of leadership and their application to organizational success.
    2. Analyze leadership dynamics in relation to political, economic, and social power.
    3. Practice leadership roles and strategies.

    Outcome 6: Students will be able to formulate a reflection of leadership within the local community.

    Objectives:

    1. Document student/group work experience during the semester
    2. Analyze student/group work experience in the context of class goals and materials.
    3. Evaluate student/group learning and skill development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course Outline:

    1. What is the value of collective action?
      1. Understanding social movements and interest groups in the US
      2. Identifying and analyzing social, political, and economic power dynamics (historical/present; global/local)
      3. Role of social movements and interest groups in the US (historical/present; global/local)
      4. Analyzing principles and theories: we go faster alone; we go further together.
      5. Understanding diversity in the context of collective action.
    2. What is change?
      1. Understanding and identifying the complex factors driving social and institutional change;
      2. Analyzing principles and theories of change, group evolution, and sustainability.
      3. Learn and practice skills required to be successful community change agents.
    3. What is power?
      1. Understanding power dynamics in society, institutions, groups and communities;
      2. Analyze and identify larger social/political/economic power dynamics and their impact (advantageous/discriminatory) on communities.
      3. Practice the engagement of various power dynamics, rooted in observation and reflection.
      4. Introduction to conflict resolution.
    4. What is organizing?
      1. Identifying common practices and theories around community/organizational collaboration and commitment.
      2. Practicing group decision-making
      3. Learning and practicing conventional and progressive organizing methods: planning, strategy, relationships, issue development, research, recruitment, fundraising, training and movement building
      4. Understanding and identifying the impact of diversity (and the practices of inclusivity/exclusivity) on meeting organizing goals.
    5. Which organizing and leadership practices lead to change?
      1. Critically examining past and recent organizing campaigns
      2. Exploring theories, technics and strategies for successful organizing
        1. Traditional organizing versus transformative organizing
        2. Creating shared story
        3. Creating shared relational commitment
        4. Creating shared structure: building leadership team(s)
    6. What is conflict? How can we resolve it?
      1. Identifying sources of conflict
      2. Understanding and practicing intentional, active listening.
      3. Are the goals of the group/campaign at odds with the goals of its workers? What about the people it represents/serves?
      4. Superficial conflict resolution versus transformative conflict resolution.
    7. Introduction to Conflict
      1. Conflict as a natural part of life.
      2. Productive ways to handle conflict
      3. Conflict cycles and styles
      4. Understanding and dealing with angry/difficult people
    8. Sources of Conflict
      1. Competition for resources
      2. Culture of competition versus culture of cooperation
      3. Different Points of View and perspectives
      4. Bias versus prejudice
      5. Awareness/Ignorance of power and privilege
    9. Arenas of conflict
      1. Interpersonal conflict
      2. Political Conflict
      3. Workplace and Organizational Conflict (internal)
    10. Traditional models of conflict resolution
      1. Distinguishing litigation, arbitration and mediation
      2. Settlement conferences
      3. Federal and state court system
    11. Mediation
      1. Models of mediation
      2. Role of the mediator
      3. Preparation of the mediation environment
      4. Mediation skills and tools
    12. Facilitation
      1. Models of facilitation
      2. Intentional/active listening
      3. Encouraging engagement
      4. Summarizing and clarifying
      5. Finding and strengthening connections and common interests
    13. Communicating Conflict
      1. Needs vs. positions
      2. Reframing
      3. Validation
      4. Maintaining neutrality
      5. Acknowledging different points of view
      6. Empathizing
      7. Finding common ground
      8. Using open-ended questions
      9. What to emphasize and what to avoid
    14. Constructing agreements
      1. Creating clear steps for moving forward
      2. Accountability - how will we make this agreement real going forward?
      3. Reconvene and reassess

    Primary Faculty
    Cross, Matthew
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • POLS 1900 - Comparative Systems: USA

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Survey course comparing the American, Canadian, and German political systems, emphasizing similarities and differences concerning the role of state and local governments in the formulation of public policy.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to discuss how the historical experiences of Germany, Canada and USA influenced the development of each country’s political culture.

    Objectives:

    • Illustrate how geography affects the formation of political beliefs.
    • Explain how religious experiences influenced the formation of political and economic values.
    • Explain how major economic crises influenced the formation of political and economic beliefs.
    • Describe how involvement in war and its aftermath influence the formation of political and economic beliefs.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to explain how the political culture of each country affected the formation of each country’s governmental structure.

    Objectives:

    • Describe how political culture influenced the elaboration of political and economic rights in each country.
    • Describe how political culture influenced the manner of representation in each country.
    • Explain how political culture affected the distribution of governmental power and responsibilities in each country.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course the student will be able to explain how laws are made in each country.

    Objectives:

    • Locate the main areas in which political decision making.
    • Identify the main participants in political decision making
    • Explain how they interact to establish government policy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. German Political System
    2. Swedish/Japanese Political System
    3. American Political System
    4. Canadian Political System

    Primary Faculty
    Flemming, Gary
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Pre‑Engineering

  
  • ENGR 1000 - Introduction to Engineering

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    An introduction to the engineering professions through lectures and guest speakers. This course emphasizes engineering research, covers work place expectations, academic preparation, computers in engineering and problem solving through teamwork.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    OUTCOME 1: 
    Upon completion of this course, students will be aware of the various disciplines of engineering.


    OBJECTIVES: 

    1. You will describe work involved in several engineering disciplines.
    2. You will identify approximate pay in several engineering disciplines.
    3. You will examine the evolving global marketplace and how it influences the demand for engineers worldwide.
    4. You will describe career opportunities for engineers.

     

    OUTCOME 2: 
    Upon completion of this course, students will identify the nature of engineering as a profession.


    OBJECTIVES: 

    1. You will identify the National Society of Professional Engineers’ Fundamental Cannons of Ethics.
    2. You will explain the National Society of Professional Engineers’ requirements for registration.
    3. You will collaborate with a team/group to identify typical engineering ethical dilemmas and provide a solution.
    4. You will illustrate how the profession of engineering has had positive influence on society throughout history.
    5. You will examine the more prominent challenges currently affecting the engineering profession.


    OUTCOME 3: 
    Upon completion of this course, students will be aware of employer and workplace expectations in engineering.


    OBJECTIVES: 

    1. You will examine how the engineer utilizes the design process to support the completion of projects.
    2. You will explain how the engineer interacts with computer-based tools and software.
    3. You will categorize strategies and techniques that could be used to develop the skills necessary to meet employer expectations of newly graduated engineering students.

     

    OUTCOME 4: 
    Upon completion of this course, students will be aware of the academic preparation needed in the various engineering disciplines.


    OBJECTIVES: 

    1. You will analyze and differentiate the engineering programs available at three universities.
    2. You will examine the availability to transfer courses from Macomb Community College to one of these universities.
    3. You will describe the semester by semester course requirements until completion of an engineering degree for one of the universities.
    4. You will describe strategies and techniques that could be employed to support the academic preparation required for successful completion of various engineering degrees.
    5. You will examine the benefit of internships, research activities and cooperative work experience as they relate to engineering as a field of study and a career.

     

    OUTCOME 5: 
    Upon completion of this course, students will be able to search out problems in a product and explore viable solutions.


    OBJECTIVES: 
     

    1. Given an existing household product, you will identify the operation and use of the product through methods of reverse engineering and brainstorming in a group setting.
    2. Given an existing household product, you will research similar products available on the market.
    3. Given an existing household product, you will collaborate with a team/group to identify and examine numerous possible product improvements.
    4. Given an existing household product, you will collaborate with a team/group to select a single feasible product improvement and present it to the instructor or class room for verification as a valid improvement.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to and History of Engineering
    2. Engineering Majors
    3. Engineering Profession
    4. Global and International Engineering
    5. Future Challenges
    6. Succeeding in the Classroom
    7. Engineering Work Experience
    8. Problem Solving
    9. Graphics and Orthographic Projection
    10. Computer Tools
    11. Teamwork
    12. Project Management
    13. Engineering Design
    14. Technical Communications
    15. Ethics and Engineering
    16. Strategies for Achieving Goals/Semester Wrap Up

    Primary Faculty
    Richter, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Product Development

  
  • PRDE 1010 - Design Principles

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly PRDE 1000)

    No credit after PRDE 1000. This course is intended to provide students with a strong knowledge of theoretical design. Main topics that will be discussed are descriptive geometry, orthographic projection, assembly and detail drawings.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use Descriptive Geometry techniques to develop views.

    Objectives: Given a project drawing the learner will:

    1. Project points within views, with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Construct true length lines, with a minimum of 80% accuracy.
    3. Construct true views of planes, with a minimum of 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop views of objects using orthographic methods of projection.

    Objectives: Given a project part the learner will:

    1. Create principal views, with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Create auxiliary views, with a minimum of 80% accuracy.
    3. Create section views, with a minimum of 80% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will apply dimensioning and information to engineering drawings.

    Objectives: Given an assembly drawing the learner will:

    1. Add revision columns, general notes, dimensioning, and appropriate notes with a minimum of 90% accuracy
    2. Add revision columns, general notes, dimensioning, and, notes with a minimum of 90% accuracy
    3. Apply geometric dimension and tolerances with a minimum of 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop views of objects using perspective drawings.

    Objectives: Given a project part the learner will:

    1. Create principal views, with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    2. Create isometric views, with a minimum of 80% accuracy
    3. Create section views, with a minimum of 80% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Lettering
    2. Descriptive Geometry
    3. Orthographic Projection
    4. Sectioning
    5. Auxiliary Views
    6. Assembly and Detail Drawings
    7. Measuring
    8. Dimensioning

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1200 - Theory of Sheet Metal Fabrication

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly DRTF 1210 and DRVD 1300)

    This course introduces the student to the theory of press working operations used in the fabrication of sheet metal components. Topics include blanking, piercing, trimming, forming, and drawing operations in addition to the types of presses, fixtures, and mechanical handling devices required.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify sheet metal cutting operations.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Name three operations used for shaping sheet metal into finished products with 100% accuracy.
    2. Define the theory of cutting sheet materials with dies with 100% accuracy, and correctly name four types of forces used for cutting sheet metal.
    3. Describe shear force, shear force spacing, and how shear force spacing is determined.
    4. Define the following terms with 100% accuracy:
      1. Rollover.
      2. Burnish.
      3. Fracture.
      4. Burr.
    5. Describe how penetration is determined and identify whether or not soft metals require more or less penetration to fracture, with 100% accuracy.
    6. Define clearance variation with 100% accuracy and describe one appropriate reason that it is an important consideration.
    7. Define spacing distortion, secondary shear, dish distortion, shear strength with 100% accuracy, and correctly describe why each occurs.
    8. Define wear and shear, and identify where each most usually occur.
    9. Define stripping force and list a minimum of two general rules for stripping force.
    10. Match each of the following cutting operations: shearing, cutoff, notching, semi-notching, blanking, slitting, punching, parting, perforating, lancing, parting, cutoff, trimming, shaving, and slotting with one of the following categories: producing blanks, cutting holes, progressive working, size control with an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will identify sheet metal forming operations.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe bending, neutral axis, and the reason a pad is used during bending with 100% accuracy.
    2. Identify which radius surface (inside or outside) is held to a closer tolerance when bending, and briefly summarize why with 100 % accuracy.
    3. Define springback and name three methods used to minimize springback.
    4. Define the following bending operations: bending, flanging, hemming, seaming, curling, and corrugating, with 100% accuracy.
    5. Describe at least one way that embossing is different from the forming operations: flanging, curling, and hemming, with an accuracy of 100%.
    6. Define bead and rib and one reason why they are used.
    7. Define oilcanning, with 100% accuracy.
    8. Describe why offsetting is used in 50 words or less.
    9. In 50 words or less correctly describe why cold working a concern during the embossing process.
    10. Name the two types of embossing die, and briefly describe one difference between each one, with 100% accuracy.
    11. Name the term used for operations that cannot be classified in any of the embossing applications.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will identify sheet metal drawing operations.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe how the term drawing gets its name.
    2. List the stages of drawing from initial contact through completion, with 100% accuracy.
    3. Name two types of friction that are developed during the drawing process and describe each one in 100 words or less.
    4. Identify which part of the cup transmits the punch force to the areas of bending, straightening, friction and compression during the cup drawing process with 100% accuracy.
    5. Name the correct cup draw operation used to form a cup bottom that is other than flat.
    6. Define “design of experiment”. Correctly describe why it is used in the die profession, and correctly name three draw issues for consideration during the design of experiment.
    7. Name and describe two types of redraws and when is the redrawing process used.
    8. Describe when box shaped draws are used.
    9. Identify whether or not tearing and wrinkling are an issue during box draws.
    10. Calculate how much of one corner in a box draw is equivalent to how much of a cup draw, with 100% accuracy.
    11. Choose which is apt to wrinkle more easily, thin or thick sheet metal.
    12. Describe when beads are used during drawing with 100% accuracy.
    13. Define stretch bending and stretch forming.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how dies are constructed.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Describe two ways that dies are classified.
    2. Determine whether or not a die may perform multiple operations, even though it may be classified by one particular way.
    3. Name the classification for each of the following dies with 100% accuracy:
      1. Cutoff die.
      2. Drop through die.
      3. Compound blank and punch die.
      4. Return type die.
      5. Compound die.
      6. Compound blank and draw die.
      7. Combination die.
      8. Continental die.
      9. Compound punch and form die.
      10. Sub-press die.
      11. Follow die.
      12. Drop through blanking die.
      13. Progressive die.
      14. Return-type punch and flange die.
      15. Transfer die.
      16. Sub-press punching die.
      17. Shuttle die.
    4. Name two cutting operations that a Cutoff die would be used for, with 100% accuracy.
    5. Describe what it means when a die is called drop through.
    6. Define the following dies:
      1. Return-type die.
      2. Compound die.
      3. Combination die.
      4. Continental die.
      5. Sub-press die.
      6. Progressive die.
      7. Transfer die.
      8. Shuttle die.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the basic construction procedures for dies.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Determine if die terminology is consistent throughout industry the die industry.
    2. List what part of the assembly or package of metal components that is place in a press to shape sheet metal is called the die.
    3. Determine whether or not dies may be noncomplex for small lot processing, or extremely complex assemblies that will not use transfer devices.
    4. Name four die components included the die set, with 100% accuracy.
    5. Name the upper and lower die half and describe where each is attached in the press.
    6. Define the term die set and describe what would happen if a die set were not used.
    7. Define the following terms:
      1. Die steel.
      2. Punch steel.
      3. Stripper plate.
      4. Die spring.
      5. Keeper.
      6. Knockout plate.
      7. Hold down plate.
      8. Pad plate.
      9. Blankholder.
      10. Pressure pin.
      11. Key, dowel.
      12. Heel.
      13. Stop block.
      14. Bolster plate.
      15. Backing plate.
      16. Pilot.
      17. Gage.
      18. Insert.
    8. Describe a minimum of one way that cams, hinges, and rockers are used.
    9. Describe why a die is not constructed as a welded assembly, or machined from solid.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the basic operation of mechanical and hydraulic presses.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Determine whether or not an understanding of basic press operation a necessity during the die design process and describe why.
    2. Define each of the following terms:
      1. Frame.
      2. Frame position.
      3. Action.
      4. Drive.
      5. Suspension.
      6. Energy.
      7. Torque.
      8. Tonnage.
      9. Stroke.
      10. Shut height.
      11. Adjustment.
      12. Strokes per minute.
      13. Die space.
      14. Gibbing.
      15. Flywheel.
      16. Die energy.
      17. Clutch.
    3. List the number of connecting rods and crankshaft throws for the following types of press suspensions, with 100% accuracy:
      1. One point.
      2. Two point.
      3. Three point.
      4. Four point.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will identify various material handling devices used in the stamping industry.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. List 4 groups by classification of function for mechanical handling devices, with 100% accuracy.
    2. Define the term “Hitch Feed”, with 100% accuracy.
    3. Describe the basic operation for each of the following feeding mechanisms for individual parts:
      1. Hopper.
      2. Dial.
      3. Chutes.
      4. Slides.
      5. Magazine.
      6. Step.
      7. Special.
    4. Write a correct explanation of each ejection mechanism listed below:
      1. Gravity.
      2. Air.
      3. Kicker.
      4. Litter.
      5. Shovel.
      6. Mechanical hand.
      7. Ejection by next part.
    5. What is the purpose of a transfer mechanism?
    6. Define each of the following transfer mechanisms:
      1. Conveyor.
      2. Shuttle.
      3. Turnover.
      4. Turnaround.
      5. Stacker.
      6. Rails.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the considerations involved in the processing of sheet metal parts.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Define the following terms with 100% accuracy:
      1. Reel.
      2. Cradle.
      3. Stock layout.
      4. Scrap percentage.
      5. Percent utilization.
      6. Spacing.
      7. Progression.
    2. List a minimum of two correct considerations to be taken into account when using Strip Stock and Coil Stock in presswork.
    3. Describe Direction of Fiber, and Direction of Burr.
    4. List a minimum of three factors to consider during press selection that affect press-working performance.
    5. Define the following terms with 100% accuracy as they apply to presswork:
      1. Critical dimensions.
      2. Close tolerance.
      3. Baseline.
      4. Special dimensions.
      5. Geometric control.
      6. Mechanical control.
      7. Critical operations.
      8. Non-critical operations.
      9. Tie in operations.
      10. Allied operations.
      11. Inspection operations.
      12. Operations required.
      13. Sequence of operations.
      14. Systems location.
      15. Supports.
    6. Describe a minimum of two reasons why the proper selection of equipment important.
    7. Define the following major press considerations, with 100% accuracy:
      1. Tonnage.
      2. Speed or strokes per minute.
      3. Bed area.
      4. Shut height.
      5. Stroke.
      6. Number of presses required.
    8. Describe with 100% accuracy:
      1. Operation routing (tool routing).
      2. Purchase order.
      3. An engineering change.
      4. Follow up.
    9. List a minimum of two basic factors to be considered when cost estimating, with 100% accuracy.
    10. With 100% accuracy, define the following:
      1. Styling plaster.
      2. Differential surface area.
      3. Flow control.
      4. Tipping of the styling plaster.
      5. Rubber skin for trim line development.
      6. Plussing of flange breaklines.
      7. Wrap development.
      8. Draw bars for uniform metal flow.
    11. Summarize the advantages of using the experimental die.
    12. Name two categories of sheet metal uses, with 100% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session 1

    1. Course Orientation
    2. Introduction -Theory of Cutting Sheet Metal

    Session 2

    1. Theory of Cutting Sheet Metal
    2. Forces for Cutting
    3. Classifications of Cutting Operations

    Session 3

    1. Forming Operations
    2. Bending
    3. Embossing

    Session 4

    1. Assessment Measure 1

    Session 5

    1. Review Test 1 Answers
    2. Drawing Operations
      1. Cup drawing
      2. Box-shapes

    Session 6

    1. Die Construction Materials
    2. Construction Procedures

    Session 7

    1. Die Construction & Procedures

    Session 8

    1. Assessment Measure 2

    Session 9

    1. Review Test 2 Answers
    2. Press Operation

    Session 10

    1. Press Operation

    Session 11

    1. Assessment Measure 3

    Session 12

    1. Review Test 3 Answers
    2. Handling Devices

    Session 13

    1. Sheet Metal Processing Considerations

    Session 14

    1. Sheet Metal Processing Considerations

    Session 15

    1. Assessment Measure 4

    Session 16

    1. Review Test 4 Answers
    2. Course Evaluation

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1250 - Basic Blueprint Reading

    Credit Hours: 2.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly DRBP 1500)

    The purpose of this modularized blueprint reading course is to develop the learner’s skill to read and interpret engineering drawings at the entry level. Topics include drawing terminology; title block; revision column; notes; dimensions and tolerances applications; types of lines; basic symbols; conventions; symmetry of assembly; detail working drawings; and isometric/3D, orthographic, auxiliary, and section views.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify types of lines and views used in engineering drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed information, the learner will identify which lines are hidden, object, extension, and section with an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed information, the learner will recognize the front, top, and right side views, identify if the print is drawn in first or third angle projection, and detect features (plain hole, and threaded hole) in one view and find those same features in another view with an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed information, the learner will identify the front, top, right side left side, auxiliary, and section views according to their placement on the print. Or at the option of the administering institution, given an actual part (by the administering institution) the learner will match the views to the appropriate surfaces. Performance is satisfactory when the learner has correctly identified or matched the appropriate surfaces with an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with orthographic and isometric views, the learner will correctly identify the isometric view and provide a written 50-word (minimum) description of the differences and relationship between an isometric and orthographic view. Performance is satisfactory when the description is complete and submitted to the administering institution/facilitator.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will recognize and interpret the attributes of the assembly and detail engineering drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing and a list of multiple choice definitions, the learner will define the following basic blueprint terminology:
      1. Title block
      2. Border
      3. Views
      4. Notes
      5. Revision block Performance will be considered satisfactory when the learner has filled in all of terminology blanks with the correct definitions, and determine the intent and use of the assembly and detail working drawing in industry with an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Using an illustration of an engineering mechanical working drawing title block with completed information and a list of multiple choice answers, the learner will interpret the following essential components found in a title block:
      1. Company Name
      2. Part Name and Part Number
      3. Material
      4. Name Of Designer
      5. Checker
      6. Revision History Performance is considered satisfactory when the learner has matched the essential component to the correct answer with an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Using an illustration of an engineering mechanical working drawing title block with completed information and a list of multiple-choice answers, the learner will determine the scale of the drawing. Performance is considered satisfactory when the learner has matched the scale to the correct answer with an accuracy of 100%.
    4. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing and a revision block with completed information and a list of multiple choice answers, the learner will match the progress of design changes, symbols and notations, and one revision from the revision block with the drawing feature to the correct answers, with an accuracy of 100%.
    5. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing and a revision block with completed information, the learner will choose the most current revision and drawing that does not contain revisions with an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will interpret engineering drawing measurement and dimensioning.

    Objectives:

    1. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed dimensioning information and list of multiple choice answers, the learner will differentiate between dimensions of location, size, ordinate, baseline, and tabular with an accuracy of 100%.
    2. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed tolerance dimensioning, the learner will differentiate between an implied and specific tolerance with an accuracy of 100%.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will interpret engineering drawing notes.

    Objectives:

    1. Using an engineering mechanical working drawing with completed information, the learner will identify the following ANSI and ISO general note symbols and their application within a manufacturing environment with an accuracy pf 100%:
      1. Tool and abrasive finishing
      2. Steel content (numbering system)
      3. Press and slip fit
    2. Using an engineering mechanical working assembly drawing and (2) related detail working drawings with completed information, the learner will locate the following notes on the assembly working drawing:
      1. Operational notes
      2. Informational notes
      3. Part name
      4. Number required
      5. Stock size
      6. Material
      7. Heat treating
      8. Special information contained within the sub-title block Performance is considered satisfactory when the learner has located the notes within a time limit of two minutes per note and with an accuracy of 100%.
    3. Using an engineering mechanical working assembly and related detail working drawings with completed information and list of multiple choice answers, the learner will interpret commonly used abbreviations and terminology used on prints in the manufacturing environment which will include:
      1. HRS (Hot Rolled Steel)
      2. CRS (Cold Rolled Steel)
      3. SOC
      4. HD
      5. SCR (Socket Head Screw)
      6. P.F. (Press Fit)
      7. S.F. (Slip Fit)
      8. DIA (Diameter)
      9. I.D. (Inside Diameter),
      10. O.D. (Outside Diameter)
      11. MM (Millimeter) Performance is considered satisfactory when the learner has matched the abbreviation to the correct answer within a time limit of two minutes per term and 100% accuracy. Also, to be documented by a third party observer at the option of the administering institution.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session Topics and Activities

    1.  
      1. Introduction/Orientation
    2.  
      1. Module 1 pre-test
      2. Orthographic and pictorial views
      3. Normal views of projection
    3.  
      1. Reference planes
      2. Types of lines
    4.  
      1. Auxiliary Views
    5.  
      1. Section Views
    6.  
      1. Module 1: Assignment 1 and Field Activity 1
    7.  
      1. Module 2 Pre-test
    8.  
      1. Common types of drawings used by industry
      2. Ballooning
      3. Assembly drawing title block
      4. Stock list (bill of materials)
    9.  
      1. Module 1: Assignment 2 and Field Activity 2
    10.  
      1. Module 2: Assignment 1 and Field Activity 1
    11.  
      1. Informational notes
      2. Revision column (block)
      3. Detail drawing sheet
      4. Detail Subtitle block
      5. Detail drawing title block
      6. Product drawing (part print)
    12.  
      1. Module 2: Assignment 2 and Field Activity 2
    13.  
      1. Module 3 Pre-test
    14.  
      1. Dimensioning
      2. Base line dimensioning
      3. Datum line dimensioning
      4. Tabular dimensioning (boring chart)
    15.  
      1. Module 3: Assignment 1 and Field Activity 1
    16.  
      1. Precision dimensioning
      2. Specific tolerance dimensioning
      3. Implied tolerance dimensioning
    17.  
      1. Metric Dimensioning
    18.  
      1. Module 3: Assignment 2 and Field Activity 2
    19.  
      1. Module 4 Pre-test
    20.  
      1. Surface Finish
        1. Finish marks
        2. Spot face
    21.  
      1. Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance
    22.  
      1. Callouts
      2. Threads
    23.  
      1. Module 4: Assignment 1 and Field Activity 1
    24.  
      1. Carbon steel
      2. Carbon steel and numbering
    25.  
      1. Basic Manufacturing Processes
        1. Cold working
    26.  
      1. Basic Manufacturing Processes
        1. Hot working
    27.  
      1. Basic Manufacturing Processes
        1. Milling
    28.  
      1. Basic Manufacturing Processes
        1. Drilling
    29.  
      1. Basic Manufacturing Processes
        1. Turning
    30.  
      1. Module 4: Assignment 2 and Field Activity 2
    31.  
      1. All assignments and field activities due
      2. Assessment measure: Blueprint Reading Demonstration
    32.  
      1. Assessment Measure: Blueprint Reading Demonstration

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Kroneck, Sharlene
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1260 - Introduction to AutoDesk Fusion 360 & Generative Design

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1250, or PRDE 1010, or consent of advisor.

    PRDE 2919

    This course will introduce the student to the entry level CAD applications of Autodesk’s Fusion 360 software, provide “hands-on” experience to create 3D Models of Basic Parts and Assemblies, Orthographic Drawings, and perform a Generative Design on Parts & Assemblies. It includes 3D printing/Additive Manufacturing, Motion Study Simulation, and N/C tool path creation.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to use The Fusion 360 User Interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Use an appropriate internet browser and select menu options and access to launch Fusion 360 CAD software from the internet within the time allowed.

    2. Use select Fusion 360 menu options to sketch and model a part within the time allowed.

    3. Use select Fusion 360 menu options to model an assembly within the time allowed.

    4. Use select Fusion 360 menu options to perform a generative design within the time allowed.

    5. Use select Fusion 360 menu options to create an orthographic engineering drawing within the time allowed.

    6. Use select Fusion 360 and 3D printer menu options to create a 3D print within the time allowed.

     

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to construct a 2D Part Sketch.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined sketch parameters, will:

    1. Create a 2D sketch with 100% accuracy.

    2. Apply sketch constraints with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a 3D Part Model.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined sketch parameters, will:

    1. Use sculpting applications to create a 3D free form model. Performance is satisfactory when the free form has been modified with 100% accuracy.

    2. Import a learner self constructed sketch and create a 3D solid model. Performance is satisfactory when the 3D model has been constructed with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a 3D Assembly.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined assembly parameters, will:

    1. Construct an assembly with 100% accuracy.

    2. Define assembly joint parameters with 100% accuracy.

    3. Apply top-down design principles with 100% accuracy.

    4. Perform a motion study with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to perform a Generative Design.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined assembly parameters, will:

    1. Define the design problem within the time allowed.

    2. Define functional, manufacturing, and mechanical requirements within the time allowed.

    3. Generate the design with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create an Orthographic Engineering Drawing.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined assembly parameters, will:

    1. Create a Drawing of a model with 100% accuracy.

    2. Create Views with 100% accuracy.

    3. Create & Edit Annotations with 100% accuracy.

    4. Select and adjust Drawing Settings and Preferences with 100% accuracy.

    5. Output the Drawing with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a 3D Printed Part.

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined assembly parameters, will:

    1. Select the body to output within the time allowed.

    2. Select the mesh parameters within the time allowed.

    3. Select the print utility output within the time allowed.

    4. Print the part with 100% accuracy.

     

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a Numerical Control (N/C) Tool Path for Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM)

    Objectives:

    The Learner will access and launch Fusion 360 from the internet, and given pre-defined part parameters, will:

    1. Create setups and apply 2D operations for face, 2D adaptive clearing, 2D contour, chamfer milling, and boring operations within the time allowed.

    2. Simulate toolpaths and stock material removal with 100% accuracy.

    3. Produce setup sheets within the time allowed.

    4.  Produce NC code via post processing within the time allowed.


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Course Content Outline:

    Course Orientation

    Introduction

    a. Create a project

    b. Upload data

    Product Design datasets

    a. Download datasets

    b. Getting started with the project.

    Sketching

    a. Create 2D sketches

    b. Define constraints

    c. Create the first 3D part.

    Sculpting

    a. Work with free forms

    b. Modify and fine-tune t-splines.

    Solid modeling

    a. Create solid models from 2D sketches and sculpted bodies

    b. Manage and collaborate remotely with your team via the cloud and mobile.

    Assembly design

    a. Create assemblies

    b. Define joints

    c. Perform a motion study

    d. Apply top-down design principles

    Rendering

    a. Set materials

    c. Setup environments

    d. Render locally and in the cloud

    Animation

    a. Create an animation

    b. Exploded view of a model

    Drawing creation

    a. Create drawings

    b. Place views

    c. Add annotations.

    Simulation and Fabrication

    a. Design validation and optimization

    Perform a Generative Design

    a. Define the design problem

    b. Define Functional, manufacturing and mechanical requirements                                          

    c. Generate the design.

    Create a 3D Printed Part

    Create a Numerical Control (N/C) Tool Path for Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM

    a. Create setups

    b. Apply 2D operations

    c. Face

    d.2D adaptive clearing

    e. 2D contour

    f. Chamfer milling

    g. Bore

    Simulate toolpaths and stock material removal

    a. Produce setup sheets

    b. Produce NC code via post processing

    All Projects Due

    Course Evaluation & Assessment (Tentative)


    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1300 - Industrial & Materials Processes

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly DRST 1160)

    A study of the industrial processes and the selection of ferrous and non‑ ferrous materials as they apply to the design of machine details and assembly tool components.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the different classifications and properties of ferrous and non-ferrous materials.

    Objectives:

    1. List two classifications of metals, with an accuracy of 100%.
    2. List eleven mechanical properties of materials and correctly describe one characteristic for each.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the production and manufacturing methods of ferrous and non-ferrous materials.

    Objectives:

    1. List three products used in production of ferrous metal.
    2. List five types of furnaces used in the production of ferrous metal.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the process methods and characteristics of heat-treating.

    Objectives:

    1. List five heat treatments of metal.
    2. List four heat-treating techniques and correctly describe one basic process for each.
    3. List two methods of testing the hardness of metal.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will explain the characteristics of plain carbon steel and the effects of its alloying elements.

    Objectives:

    1. List three classifications of plain carbon steels.
    2. List three classifications of alloy steels.
    3. Summarize the profile of 8620 steel.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will discuss the methods used in production inspection and quality control.

    Objectives:

    1. Name three common measuring tools used in industry and correctly define the accuracy of each.
    2. List nine non-precision measuring instruments and correctly describe one basic application of each.
    3. List nine precision measuring instruments and correctly describe the basic application of each.
    4. Name five high production inspection gauges and correctly describe one basic application of each.
    5. Name and define two types of quality control.
    6. List ten methods of production inspection.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will explain different foundry methods and examine their characteristics.

    Objectives:

    1. Name five common casting methods used in industry.
    2. Name three types of pattern materials.
    3. Describe the purpose of a chill.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will to discuss the processing methods and characteristics of hot and cold worked materials.

    Objectives:

    1. Summarize the characteristics of hot worked metal.
    2. List four hot worked metal processes.
    3. Summarize the basic characteristics of cold worked metal.
    4. List eight cold worked metal processes.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will identify different press operation techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Name two die operation categories.
    2. List eight cutting die operations.
    3. Name two forming die operations.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will explain traditional and not-traditional material processes.

    Objectives:

    1. List six applications of milling.
    2. Name three metal removal processes using electricity and correctly describe the basic operation of each.
    3. Correctly describe the basic operation of broaching.
    4. Correctly describe the basic operation of turning machines.
    5. Correctly describe the basic operation of drilling/boring/threading.
    6. List the three steps of powder metallurgy.

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will identify gas and electric welding processes.

    Objectives:

    1. List four electric welding processes, and correctly describe the operation of each.
    2. Name three gas welding processes.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course, students will describe surface feature identification techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Name two types of tolerancing.
    2. Correctly describe the basic method of geometric dimensioning and tolerance (G, D, & T).
    3. Identify the surface features in a surface texture symbol, with 100% accuracy.

    Outcome 12: Upon completion of this course, students will explain automation process applications.

    Objectives:

    1. Correctly define the basic process of numerical control.
    2. Correctly describe the position of the X, Y, Z planes in both horizontal and vertical milling machines.

    Outcome 13: Upon completion of this course, students will describe industrial plastics applications.

    Objectives:

    1. Name two categories plastics, and describe the basic characteristics of each.
    2. List five plastics processes.

    Outcome 14: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the design, manufacturing, implementation, and follow-up study of a manufactured component. Art to Part.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the implications of manufacturing and industrial processes technology on the environment and do a class oral presentation regarding these implications, with visual aids and appropriate dress.
    2. Describe the process flow of a component and/or assembly from concept, design, engineering, manufacturing, delivery, and discard, i.e., “art to part”, and present their finding to the class in an oral presentation, using visual aids and appropriate dress.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1.  
      1. Course Orientation
        1. Course policy
        2. Course outline
    2.  
      1. Classification of Metals
        1. Alloy metals
        2. Single element metals
      2. Mechanical Properties of Metals
      3. Production of Ferrous Metals
    3.  
      1. Production of Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals
        1. Types of furnaces used in production
        2. Methods used for processing
    4.  
      1. Introduction to Heat Treating
      2. Characteristics of Heat Treatment
      3. Heat Treating Techniques
        1. Normalizing, annealing, and tempering
        2. Hardened surfaces
      4.  Hardening Methods
    5.  
      1. Carbon Steels
        1. Plain carbon steels
        2. Alloy carbon steels
      2. Topic Review for Assessment Measure I
    6.  
      1. Assessment Measure I
    7.  
      1. Measurement
        1. Applications of non-precision instruments
        2. Applications of precision instruments
    8.  
      1. Inspection
        1. Applications of high production
        2. Inspection gauges
      2. Quality Control
        1. Purpose
        2. Methods of production inspection
      3. Topic Review for Assessment Measure II
    9.  
      1. Assessment Measure II
    10.  
      1. Foundry Processes
        1. Casting methods
      2. Team Research Project
        1. Team member selection
        2. Topic materials distributed
        3. Project overview
    11.  
      1. Hot Worked Metal
        1. Characteristics of hot worked steel
        2. Hot worked steel processes
    12.  
      1. Cold Worked Metal
        1. Characteristics of cold worked steel
        2. Cold worked steel processes
    13.  
      1. Presswork
        1. Die operations
        2. Die applications
      2. Topic Review for Assessment Measure III
    14.  
      1. Assessment Measure III
    15.  
      1. Metal Removal and Cuttng
        1. Milling
    16.  
      1. Metal Removal and Cutting
        1. Abrasive machining
        2. Electrical discharge machining
    17.  
      1. Metal Removal and Cutting
        1. Broaching
        2. Turning
    18.  
      1. Metal Removal and Cutting
        1. Threading tool applications
        2. Drilling and boring
      2. Topic Review for Assessment Measure IV
    19.  
      1. Assessment Measure IV
    20.  
      1. Powder Metallurgy
        1. Method of powder metallurgy
      2. Team Research Project
        1. Presentation information distributed
        2. Presentation overview
        3. Presentation date confirmed
    21.  
      1. Welding
        1. Electric welding
        2. Gas welding
    22.  
      1. Plastics
        1. Characteristics of plastics
        2. Processes of plastics
      2. Team Research Meetings
    23.  
      1. Geometric Tolerancing and Dimensioning
        1. Methods of tolerancing
        2. Application of geometric tolerancing
        3. Surface texture
      2. Topic Review for Assessment Measure V
      3. Team Research Meetings
    24.  
      1. Numerical Control
        1. Process of numerical control
        2. Applications of numerical control
        3. Datum dimensioning
    25.  
      1. Assessment Measure V. Note: Will not include G.D.&T. or N/C
    26.  
      1. Computers In Industry
        1. Applications of CAD
        2. Applications of CAM
      2. Team Research Meetings
    27.  
      1. Robotics
        1. Overview of robotics
        2. Applications of robotics in industry
      2. Team Research Meetings
    28.  
      1. Automation
        1. Overview
        2. Applications
      2. Team Research Meetings
    29.  
      1. Topic Review For Assessment Measure VI
      2. Team Research Meetings
    30.  
      1. Assessment Measure VI
    31.  
      1. Team Research Presentations
    32.  
      1. Course Evaluation - Tentative
      2. Team Research Presentations - Tentative

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1400 - Introduction to SolidWorks & 3D Parametric Solid Modeling

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1010  or PRDE 1250  

    (formerly DRCG 1150)

    This course introduces the student to entry‑level applications of SolidWorks solid modeling software and provides hands‑on experience to build parametric models of basic parts and assemblies with dynamic operation of components.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use the SolidWorks user interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    2. Use selected options, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    3. Develop and use selected customized tool bars, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will develop Basic Part Models.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate appropriate design intent, completing all modeling exercises required to model the part.
    2. Apply best profile/efficient modeling practices required to model the part.
    3. Demonstrate appropriate placement of model in space, with 90% accuracy.
    4. Construct defined and under-defined sketches, with minimum 90% accuracy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will develop Basic Assembly Parametric Models.

    Objectives:

    1. Create new components required to model the assembly.
    2. Add and position components within the time allowed.
    3. Create associativity of components, with a minimum of 90% accuracy.
    4. Analyze and explode the assembly, with a minimum of 90% functionality.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will create 3-Dimensional and Orthographic Electronic Drawings.

    Objectives:

    1. Develop electronic orthographic views within the time allowed.
    2. Develop electronic 3-dimensional views within the time allowed.
    3. Develop electronic auxiliary views with minimum 90% accuracy.
    4. Develop electronic section views with minimum 90% accuracy.
    5. Develop electronic detail views with minimum 90% accuracy.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session Topic

    1.  
      1. Orientation
    2.  
      1. Introduction to SolidWorks
        1. Basic Functionality
        2. User Interface
          1. Create toolbars
          2. Create a folder
          3. Save a file
        3. Basic Functionality NOTE: Save to external device. User interface Demonstration
      2. File Management
        1. Create Folders Demonstration NOTE: save to external device
      3. Part Template
        1. Create Part Templates ANSI and ISO
        2. Demonstration
      4. Lab
    3.  
      1. 3-D Solid Modeling
      2. Creating a Single Part
        1. Sketching
        2. Features
          1. Base
            1. dimension
            2. extrude
            3. save
      3. Lab
      4. Start Create a Single Part - Demonstration
      5. The 40 minute Running Start
    4.  
      1. 3-D Solid Modeling
      2. Creating a Single Part
        1. Sketching
        2. Features
          1. Boss
            1. extrude
            2. add relations
            3. create cut
        3. Lab
        4. Create a Single Part - Demonstration
    5.  
      1. 3-D Solid Modeling
      2. Creating a Single Part
        1. Sketching
        2. Features
          1. Create fillets and rounds
      3. Lab
      4. Create a Single Part - Demonstration Completed
    6.  
      1. 3-D Solid Modeling
      2. Creating a Single Part
        1. Sketching
        2. Features
          1. Shelling out the part
          2. Dimension using handles
          3. Cutting a section
      3. Lab
      4. Create a Single Part - Demonstration Completed
    7.  
      1. Lab
        1. Base
      2. Start Battery Part Lab Activity
    8.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 1 - Battery Part
          1. Base
    9.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 1 - Battery Part
          1. Base
          2. Start plate (Tentative)
    10.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 1 - Battery Part
          1. Base due beginning of class
        2. Start Plate
    11.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 1 - Battery Part
          1. Plate
    12.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 1 - Battery Part
          1. Plate
    13.  
      1. Project 1 - Battery Part Completed
        1. Plate Due Beginning of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Start Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
          1. Lens
    14.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
    15.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
          1. Lens
    16.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
          1. Lens
    17.  
      1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
        1. Lens Completed - Due Beginning of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Start Bulb
    18.  
      1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
        1. Bulb
    19.  
      1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
        1. Bulb
    20.  
      1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
        1. Bulb
    21.  
      1. Project 2 - Lens and Bulb
        1. Bulb Completed - Due Beginning of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Start Project 3
          1. O-ring, switch
          2. Lens cap and housing
    22.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3 - O-ring
    23.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3 - O-ring - Due by End of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Project 3 - Start Switch
    24.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3 - Switch - Due by End of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Project 3 - Start Lens Cap
    25.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3 - Lens Cap
    26.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3 - Lens Cap - Due by End of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Project 3a - Start Housing
    27.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3a - Housing
    28.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3a - Housing
    29.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3a - Housing - Due at Start of Class
    30.  
      1. Lab
        1. Project 3a - Housing - Due at Start of Class
      2. Lab
        1. Start Project 4 - Assembly Modeling
    31.  
      1. Lab
        1. Exploded View
    32.  
      1. Assembly Modeling Due at Start of Class
        1. Exploded View Due at Start of Class
      2. Course Evaluation

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1410 - SolidWorks: Components & Assemblies

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1400  or DRCG‑1150

    Industrial drawing practices with emphasis on the development of 3D parametric modeling and orthographic projection, and basic subsystem (subassembly) and single component (detail) drawing including dimensioning, auxiliary, and section views.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create three dimensional single component parametric models (details) in the construction of engineering drawings.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component in orthographic 3rd angle projection, the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate appropriate design intent required to model the part within a specified timeline.
    2. Apply Best Profile/Efficient Modeling Practices within a specified timeline.
    3. Demonstrate appropriate Placement of Model in Space with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    4. Construct defined and underdefined sketches within a specified timeline.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will create single component (details) orthographic engineering drawings in 3rd angle projection.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the pictorial sketch with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Convert the electronic drawing from Objective 1.1 to an orthographic drawing in 3rd angle projection. Performance is satisfactory when all primary views of the component are complete, to scale, appropriately dimensioned, and the subtitle block and the title block are complete, with an accuracy of 100% after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will apply thread and fastening techniques.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the pictorial sketch with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Construct a clearance, counter bored, counter sink hole thru with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Construct a clearance, counter bored, counter sink hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    4. Construct a press fit and slip fit hole thru with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    5. Construct a press fit and slip fit hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    6. Construct a threaded hole thru with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    7. Construct a threaded hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    8. Construct a press fit and slip fit dowel pin and socket head screw with the appropriate callout with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop charts and tables.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software, the learner will:

    1. Construct a revision chart with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Construct a bill of materials with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Construct a boring chart with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    4. Import a boring chart, revision chart, and bill of materials into a given electronic drawing, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will apply dimensioning systems to machine parts, casting, and weldments.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid, casting, and welded constructed single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid, casting, and welded constructed single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Apply appropriate base line dimensioning to a machine from solid part, casting and weldment with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Apply appropriate datum line dimensioning to a machine from solid part, casting and weldment with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will develop auxiliary views.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid, single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 6.1, the learner will develop a single auxiliary view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 6.1, the learner will develop a double auxiliary view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will develop sectional views.

    Objectives: Using SolidWorks CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 7.1, the learner will develop a broken section, half section, offset section, and aligned section view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will construct a three-dimensional parametric subsystem (subassembly) drawing.

    Objectives:

    1. Construct an electronic parametric solid model of the subsystem with ballooning, completed bill of materials, and title block, with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    2. Complete a component (detail) sheet(s) in orthographic 3rd angle projection and included 3D thumbnail sketch, with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    3. Animate and exploded view of the subsystem with 100% accuracy within a specified timeline.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session Topic

    1.  
      1. Orientation
    2.  
      1. Orthographic Projection
      2. Lab
    3.  
      1. Lab
    4.  
      1. Dimensioning
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    5.  
      1. Lab
    6.  
      1. Assembly and Detail Relationship
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    7.  
      1. Lab
    8.  
      1. Commercial Details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    9.  
      1. Lab
    10.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Parts machined from a solid
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    11.  
      1. Lab
    12.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Parts machined from a solid
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    13.  
      1. Lab
    14.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Casting details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    15.  
      1. Lab
    16.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Casting details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    17.  
      1. Lab
    18.  
      1. Welded Construction
        1. Weldment details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    19.  
      1. Lab
    20.  
      1. Welded Construction
        1. Weldment details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    21.  
      1. Lab
    22.  
      1. Sectional Views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    23.  
      1. Lab
    24.  
      1. Sectional Views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    25.  
      1. Lab
    26.  
      1. Auxiliary Views
        1. Single auxiliary views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    27.  
      1. Lab
    28.  
      1. Auxiliary Views
        1. Multiple auxiliary views
      2. Lab
    29.  
      1. Lab
    30.  
      1. Lab
      2. Problems Due
    31.  
      1. Lab
      2. Problems Due
    32.  
      1. Course Evaluation

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1450 - AutoCAD: Detailing & Assemblies

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: DRCG 1140  

    (formerly DRCG 1110)

    Industrial drawing practices with emphasis on development of 3D parametric modeling and orthographic projection and basic subsystem (subassembly) and single component (detail) drawing including dimensioning, auxiliary, and section views.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will create three dimensional single component parametric models (details) in the construction of engineering drawings.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component in orthographic 3rd angle projection, the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate appropriate design intent required to model the part within a specified timeline.
    2. Apply best profile/efficient modeling practices within a specified timeline.
    3. Demonstrate appropriate placement of model in space with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    4. Construct defined and under-defined sketches within a specified timeline.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will create single component (details) orthographic engineering drawings in 3rd angle projection.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the pictorial sketch with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Convert the electronic drawing from Objective 1.1 to an orthographic drawing in 3rd angle projection. Performance is satisfactory when all primary views of the component are complete, to scale, and appropriately dimensioned and the subtitle block and the title block are complete with an accuracy of 100% after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will apply thread and fastening techniques.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the pictorial sketch with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Construct a clearance, counter bored, counter sink hole thru with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Construct a clearance, counter bored, counter sink hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    4. Construct a press fit and slip fit hole thru with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    5. Construct a press fit and slip fit hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    6. Construct a threaded hole thru with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    7. Construct a threaded hole to a specified depth with the appropriate callout, using the 3D model from Objective 3.1, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    8. Construct a press fit and slip fit dowel pin, and socket head screw, with the appropriate callout, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will develop charts and tables.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software, the learner will:

    1. Construct a revision chart, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Construct a bill of materials, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Construct a boring chart, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    4. Import a boring chart, revision chart, and bill of materials into a given electronic drawing, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will apply dimensioning systems to machine parts, casting and weldments.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid, casting, and welded constructed single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid, casting, and welded constructed single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Apply appropriate base line dimensioning to a machine from solid part, casting, and weldment with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Apply appropriate datum line dimensioning to a machine from solid part, casting, and weldment with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will develop auxiliary views.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid, single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 6.1, the learner will develop a single auxiliary view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    3. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 6.1, the learner will develop a double auxiliary view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will develop sectional views.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a machined from solid single component pictorial, the learner will:

    1. Develop an electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.
    2. Using the electronic solid model drawing of the machined from solid single component from Objective 7.1, the learner will develop a broken section, half section, offset section, and aligned section view with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes within one try.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will construct a three-dimensional parametric subsystem (subassembly) drawing.

    Objectives: Using AutoCAD CAD software and a given paper sketch of a subsystem drawing, the learner will:

    1. Construct an electronic parametric solid model of the sub system with ballooning, completed bill of materials and title block with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    2. Complete a component (detail) sheet(s) in orthographic 3rd angle projection and included 3D thumbnail sketch with 100% accuracy after checker changes within one try.
    3. Animate and exploded view of the subsystem with 100% accuracy within a specified timeline.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session Topic

    1.  
      1. Orientation
    2.  
      1. Orthographic Projection
      2. Lab
    3.  
      1. Lab
    4.  
      1. Dimensioning
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    5.  
      1. Lab
    6.  
      1. Assembly and Detail Relationship
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    7.  
      1. Lab
    8.  
      1. Commercial Details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    9.  
      1. Lab
    10.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Parts machined from a solid
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    11.  
      1. Lab
    12.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Parts machined from a solid
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    13.  
      1. Lab
    14.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Casting details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    15.  
      1. Lab
    16.  
      1. Detailing
        1. Casting details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    17.  
      1. Lab
    18.  
      1. Welded Construction
        1. Weldment details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    19.  
      1. Lab
    20.  
      1. Welded Construction
        1. Weldment details
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    21.  
      1. Lab
    22.  
      1. Sectional Views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    23.  
      1. Lab
    24.  
      1. Sectional Views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    25.  
      1. Lab
    26.  
      1. Auxiliary Views
        1. Single auxiliary views
      2. Lab
      3. Problems Due
    27.  
      1. Lab
    28.  
      1. Auxiliary Views
        1. Multiple auxiliary views
      2. Lab
    29.  
      1. Lab
    30.  
      1. Lab
      2. Problems Due
    31.  
      1. Lab
      2. Problems Due
    32.  
      1. Course Evaluation

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1520 - NX Fundamentals

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1010  or PRDE 1250  

    (replaces PRDE 1500 and PRDE 1510 together but does not equate to either course separately)

    This course is designed for the new user of NX. The student will be introduced to Sketcher, Part Modeling, Assemblies, and Drafting. No credit after PRDE 1510.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use the NX Sketcher interface.

    Objectives: Using the NX Sketcher interface the learner will:

    1. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    2. Use selected options, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    3. Develop and use selected customized tool bars, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Assembly tools in NX.

    Objectives: Using the Assembly tools in NX the learner will:

    1. Use the menus to assemble components within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to hold associative properties within the assembly.
    3. Use the menus to substitute components of an assembly

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Drafting interface in NX.

    Objectives: Using the Drafting interface in NX, the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus within the time allowed to develop orthographic views.
    2. Use the selected options within the time allowed to properly dimension a part.
    3. Demonstrate the proper notes to complete a drawing.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to use Basic Part Modeling to design a part

    Objectives: Using the Basic Part Modeling interface the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus to complete the project within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to build the project within the time allowed.
    3. Create a parametric part with the time allowed for the project.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to NX Interface
    2. Sketching and Geometric Constraint menu options
    3. Basic Part Creation menu options
    4. Assembly menu options
    5. Drafting menu options
    6. Project introduction

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1620 - CATIA Essentials

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1010  or PRDE 1250  

    (replaces PRDE 1600 and PRDE 1610 together but does not equate to either course separately)

    This course is designed for a new user of CATIA. The student will be presented the fundamentals of Part Modeling, Assemblies, and Drafting. No credit after PRDE 1610.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use the CATIA Sketcher interface.

    Objectives: Using the CATIA Sketcher interface the learner will:

    1. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    2. Use selected options, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    3. Develop and use selected customized tool bars, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Assembly tools in CATIA.

    Objectives: Using the Assembly tools in CATIA the learner will:

    1. Use the menus to assemble components within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to hold associative properties within the assembly.
    3. Use the menus to substitute components of an assembly.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Drafting interface in CATIA.

    Objectives: Using the Drafting interface in CATIA, the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus within the time allowed to develop orthographic views.
    2. Use the selected options within the time allowed to properly dimension a part.
    3. Demonstrate the proper notes to complete a drawing.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to use Basic Part Modeling in CATIA to design parts.

    Objectives: Using the Basic Part Modeling in CATIA the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus to complete the project within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to build the project within the time allowed.
    3. Create a parametric part with the time allowed for the project.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to CATIA Interface
    2. Sketching and Geometric Constraint menu options
    3. Basic Part Creation menu options
    4. Assembly menu options
    5. Drafting menu options
    6. Project introduction

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1710 - Fundamentals of Clay Modeling

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1010  and MACA 1040 

    This class will introduce students to clay modeling concepts, terms, and basic skills as it pertains to industry standards and techniques.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate surfacing techniques in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using the surfacing techniques in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Develop a high quality surface in the given time.
    2. Build a model with the techniques given in the time allowed.
    3. Identify the difference between poor and high quality surface in the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will capture 2D to 3D relationship in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using the 2D to 3D relationship in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Identify sections in the time given.
    2. Build an armature in the given time allowed.
    3. Build a 3D model from a 2D drawing in the time allowed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will build and effectively use clay modeling tools.

    Objectives: Identifying the industry tools, the learner will:

    1. Identify proper tools in the given time.
    2. Build a basic set of tools in the time allowed.
    3. Demonstrate proper technique of tools in the time given.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate symmetry in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using symmetry in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate dragging tools to mirror in the time allowed.
    2. Identify cross sections templates from 2D drawings in the given time.
    3. Develop a symmetrical model in the time given.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students demonstrate scale in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Demonstrating scale in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate an ability to visualize a scale model
    2. Identify the proper measurements and techniques to create a scale model
    3. Develop accurate size and proportioning in a scale model

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate line quality in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Demonstrating line quality in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate the understanding of line quality
    2. Identify the differences between quality line and surface
    3. Develop accurate surfaces with consistent lines.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre - Test
    2. Introduction to Tools
    3. Classroom Procedures
    4. 2D Development & Translation
    5. Creating Cross Sections
    6. Clay Manipulation
    7. Clay Modeling Projects
    8. Modifying Surface
    9. Final Project

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1820 - Alias Principles

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1010 

    This course provides an introduction to Alias Studio Tools. Students will learn to convert a 2D sketch, develop a 3D math model, and animate the models they have completed. On completion of the course, students will be prepared to take a product from the sketch phase to a finished product that is rendered and ready for presentation to the customer.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will effectively navigate and utilize the Alias User Interface..

    Objectives: Using the Alias user interface the learner will:

    1. Develop and use customizable Marking menus and Shelves in the given time allowed.
    2. Develop an understanding of the Pallet menu in the given time.
    3. Identify how to navigate both perspective and orthographic 3D space in the time provided.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will use the basic modeling functions in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the basic modeling functions in Alias the learner will

    1. Develop an understanding of modeling theory in the time allowed.
    2. Develop curve tools to develop surface in the given time.
    3. Identify surface tools to develop a 3D model in the given time allowed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Rendering interface in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the Rendering interface in Alias, the learner will:

    1. Identify the Multi-lister to create shaders and lights in the given time allowed.
    2. Develop the Hardware shader menu in the time allowed.
    3. Identify basic rendering theory in the given time allowed.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will use animation in Alias

    Objectives: Using the animation interface in Alias the learner will:

    1. Develop objects using Alias’s animation tools in the given time allowed.
    2. Identify local pivots and axis’s to animate in the time allowed.
    3. Develop animations using the time slider window from the given time allowed.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will use the surface construction functions in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the surface construction functions in Alias the learner will: Develop and use selected customized tool bars, modeling the part within the time allowed. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed. Use selected options, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will use the sketch interpretation interface in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the sketch interpretation interface in Alias, the learner will:

    1. Identify background data in the time allowed.
    2. Demonstrate the creation of background data within the time allowed.
    3. Demonstrate customization of background data in the time allowed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre - Test
    2. Introduction to Alias Studio
    3. Classroom Procedures
    4. Modeling Menus
    5. Animation Menus
    6. Surface Creation
    7. Modifying Surface
    8. Sketch to Model
    9. Final Project

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 1920 - CATIA-Generative Shape Design

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1620  

    CATIA Generative Shape Design is a three-dimensional CAD and Engineering tool that will introduce the student to the concepts and techniques of creating curves and surfaces for product design and manufacturing. Functionalities covered in this course are curve and wireframe features, simple and complex surfaces, filleting methods, analytical tools, laws, and surface/solid integration. Automation and navigation tools, as well as the CATIA interface as it relates to GSD, will be explored. Engineering design will be explored as it pertains to metal and plastic components.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the use of the CATIA GSD interface.

    Objectives: In the GSD interface the student will:

    1. Set  Roles within GSD
    2. Navigate to the GSD app
    3. Navigate and Set model  preferences
    4. Locate the Importing and Exporting functionality
    5. Open and Save Data within the ENOVIA Database

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate basic modeling functionality within the GSD app.

    Objectives: Within the GSD app the student will:

    1. Demonstrate feature fundamentals
    2. Demonstrate curve creation utilizing Sketcher and Work on Support
    3. Execute the various surface creation functions and methods
    4. Execute different methods for filleting

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will demonstrate the analytical tools within the GSD app

    Objectives: Using the analytical tools the student will:

    1. Demonstrate the measuring functionality in GSD
    2. Demonstrate the curve analysis tools (Porcupine Analysis)
    3. Interrogate surface integrity  using Connect Checker, and Surface Curvature Analysis
    4. Set up and interpret draft analysis

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the process of interrogating the history structure of the part

    Objectives: Using the model navigation tools the student will:

    1. Demonstrate model Management and Data Organization
    2. Demonstrate Quick Select
    3. Identify Parents and Children interpretation as well as the Historical Graph Navigation

    Outcome 5:  Upon Completion of this course, students will demonstrate the options of Automation Tools in GSD

    Objectives: Using the Automation Tools the student will:

    1. Link and create formulas within Knowledge-ware
    2. Create and apply User Defined Features
    3. Create and apply Power Copies

    Outcome 6: Upon Completion of this course, students will demonstrate model modification

    Objectives: When making changes the student will:

    1. Demonstrate modeling problem solving methods
    2. Identify error diagnosis and resolution
    3. Identify error messages and meaning

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. GSD User Interface
    2. Sketcher Creation
    3. Edit Sketcher Curve
    4. Shape Design Creation Features
    5. Create Fillet
    6. Surface Creation
    7. Curve Analysis
    8. Surface Analysis
    9. Surface Integrity
    10. Model Management
    11. Knowledge Ware Modeling
    12. User-Defined Features
    13. Read Error Message

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2000 - Product Development Process

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course provides students with an overall understanding of the Product Development Process used in a variety of industries. Emphasis is on planning, specifications, development processes, and economics.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will identify the major steps in the product development process.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand and explain planning and customer needs.
    2. Understand and explain product specifications.
    3. Understand and explain concept selection and testing.
    4. Understand and explain product architecture.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will understand task management.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand sequential, parallel, and coupled tasks.
    2. Identify steps of baseline project planning.
    3. Understand and utilize project execution skills.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will understand basic elements of economic analysis.

    Objectives:

    1. Understand time value of money.
    2. Understand cash flows.
    3. Understand net present value techniques.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week Topic

    1. Introduction
    2. Development Processes and Organizations
    3. Product Planning
    4. Identifying Customer Needs
    5. Product Specifications
    6. Concept Generation
    7. Concept Selection
    8. Concept Testing
    9. Product Architecture
    10. Design and Manufacturability
    11. Prototyping
    12. Patents and Intellectual Property
    13. Product Development Economics
    14. Product Development Economics
    15. Managing Projects
    16. Project Completion and Final Exam

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2010 - Introduction to Simulation & Analysis

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1400  and ATMT 1950 ; or Consent of Advisor

    (formerly PRDE 2916)

    An introduction to CAD Simulation and Analysis operations used to model and/or analyze the effectiveness of potential solutions to design problems. This course includes 3D sketch applications, plane creation, application of kinematics and dynamics, and an introduction to Finite Element Analysis with related 3D CAD simulation software.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, the student will: Develop alternative 3D CAD design solutions.

    Objectives:

    1. Using SolidWorks Simulation 3D CAD tools the Student will:
      1. Apply logic and order to build model and assembly structure(s).
      2. Create 3D solid models.
      3. Apply feature constraints in model creation.
      4. Develop 3D assemblies.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will: Evaluate design solutions based on the ability to handle kinematic and dynamic load factors.

    Objectives:

    1. Using SolidWorks Dynamics Lab 3D CAD applications, the student will apply kinematic and dynamic properties to 3D Parts & Assemblies and:
      1. Explain limitations of simulation/analysis techniques.
      2. Use analytical and simulation tools to evaluate analyze 3D CAD model performance/capability.
      3. Determine collision/clearance relationships.
      4. Apply kinematics to CAD models/assemblies.
      5. Define boundary conditions.
      6. Determine linear, rotary and/or rotational movement among multiple components.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will: Perform basic FEA analysis applying restraints and loads.

    Objectives:

    1. Using basic SolidWorks FEA CAD tools, the student will:
      1. Explain limitations of FEA techniques.
      2. Perform basic Finite Element Analysis for a 3D CAD part/assembly.
      3. Define how forces impact product designs.
      4. Calculate static/dynamic forces that impact performance of design solutions.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Course orientation.
    2. Advanced 3D sketch creation Particle Kinematics-Particle Dynamics Force & Acceleration
    3. Particle Dynamics Work & Energy-Particle Dynamics Impulse & Momentum
    4. Curvilinear motion, Gear train analysis
    5. Multi body dynamic analysis
    6. Introduction to Engineering Finite Element Analysis
    7. Static Analysis of a plate Linear Static analysis with Solid Elements
    8. Static Analysis of an L-bracket Stress singularities
    9. Static and Frequency analysis pipe support Use of Shell Elements
    10. Static Analysis of a Link Symmetry Boundary Conditions
    11. Frequency analysis of a tuning fork and plastic part Frequency Analysis with & without supports
    12. Frequency analysis of a tuning fork and plastic part Rigid body modes Symmetric and anti-symmetric modes
    13. Thermal analysis of a pipe connector Steady State thermal Analysis
    14. Thermal analysis of a heat sink Analysis of an Assembly
    15. Buckling analysis of an I-beam Buckling analysis
    16. Course Review

    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2100 - Design Intent & Analysis

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course exposes students to various methods of product analysis and redesign. Topics include design for manufacturing, design for assembly and failure modes, and effects analysis.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the Design for Manufacturing processes.

    Objectives: Using the Design for Manufacturing processes, the learner will:

    1. Simplify the design and reduce the number of parts within the time allowed.
    2. Identify the standardization and the use of common parts and materials within the time allowed.
    3. Define the design for ease of fabrication within the time allowed.
    4. Identify the design for parts orientation and handling within the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to identify the Design for Assembly processes.

    Objectives: Using the Design for Assembly processes, the learner will:

    1. Define the simplifying process of a design within the time allowed.
    2. Identify the reduction of parts within the time allowed.
    3. Identify the reduction time in assembly within the time allowed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will be able define the Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA) techniques.

    Objectives: Using the FMEA tools, the learner will:

    1. Identify the FMEA with 90% accuracy.
    2. Define the benefits of FMEA with 90% accuracy
    3. Identify the FMEA timing within the time allowed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week

    1. Introduction and Overview
    2. Design for Manufacturing
    3. Materials
    4. Component Manufacturing Costs
    5. Assembly Costs and Cost Structures
    6. DFM Project / Test #1
    7. Design for Assembly
    8. Standardization/Black Box Components
    9. Maximize Ease of Assembly
    10. Impact on Part Quality
    11. DFA Project / Test #2
    12. Failure Modes and Effects Analysis
    13. FMEA Systematic Process
    14. FMEA Reports/Criticality
    15. FMEA Project
    16. Project Completion and Final Exam / Test #3

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2180 - Advanced Clay Modeling

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1710 

    This class is intended for students who have a basic understanding of clay modeling. Students will learn Class A functions used in clay modeling. The major topics will include capturing design intent and advanced surfacing techniques. Students will develop a quarter scale model of a vehicle which will be judged by industry professionals.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will apply design modifications in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using the modification techniques in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Add clay to a model in the given time. b. Sculpt an existing model given in the time allowed.
    2. Identify the need for modifications on a clay model in the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will capture design intent in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using the design intent in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Identify customer needs for the design in the time given.
    2. Build a prototype of the model in the given time allowed.
    3. Demonstrate changes to the customer in the time allowed.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use advanced surfacing techniques in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Demonstrating the surfacing techniques, the learner will:

    1. Identify the difference of a good surface to a poor surface in the given time.
    2. Build a quality surface in the time allowed.
    3. Demonstrate the techniques to build a quality surface in the time given.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will use finishing techniques in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Using finishing techniques in clay modeling the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate the techniques used in clay modeling in the time allowed.
    2. Identify tools used to in finishing a model in the time allowed.
    3. Develop the finishing touches on a model in the time given.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will present 1/4 scale model in clay modeling.

    Objectives: Building a 1/4 scale model the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate the techniques to view the model as a complete product
    2. Identify the proper scale model
    3. Present the final scale model

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre - Test
    2. Introduction to Advanced Tools
    3. Classroom Procedures
    4. Model Modification Techniques
    5. Edit Cross Sections
    6. Clay Manipulation
    7. ¼ Scale Project

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2200 - Jig & Fixture Detailing & Design

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1410  or PRDE 1450  or PRDE 1520  or PRDE 1620  or consent of advisor; and PRDE 1300  

    (formerly DRTF 1170)

    This course covers detail and design methods and procedures for jigs and fixtures used in the metal removal industry. It includes drilling and reaming jigs and milling fixtures.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will detail a milling fixture.

    Objectives: Given a drawing of a milling fixture subsystem, the learner will:

    1. Identify and detail all build and altered components of the assembly, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    2. Apply the appropriate dimensions to build and altered details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    3. Apply the appropriate surface finish to details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    4. Apply appropriate heat treating notation, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    5. Construct and complete a detail sub-title block, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    6. Construct a detail sheet title block, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will balloon an assembly drawing and develop a bill of materials (BOM).

    Objectives: Given a jig or fixture subsystem drawing, the learner will:

    1. Identify and appropriately balloon all standard details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    2. Identify and appropriately balloon all altered details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    3. Identify and appropriately balloon all build details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    4. Construct and complete an assembly drawing Bill Of Materials (BOM), with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will detail a welded construction jig assembly.

    Objectives: Given a drawing of a welded construction subsystem, the learner will:

    1. Identify and detail all build and altered components of the assembly, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    2. Detail a welded construction detail, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    3. Apply the appropriate dimensions to build and altered details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    4. Apply the appropriate surface finish to details, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    5. Apply appropriate heat treating notation, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    6. Construct and complete a detail sub-title block, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    7. Construct and complete a detail sub-title block for a welded construction detail, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    8. Construct a detail sheet title block, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will design a jig or fixture.

    Objectives: Given a part print for manufacturing, the learner will:

    1. Develop a sketch of a jig or fixture assembly for approval with adjustment and within 3 tries.
    2. Develop an engineering assembly drawing of a jig or fixture assembly, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.
    3. Develop an engineering detail drawing of the jig or fixture assembly, with 100% accuracy after completing checker changes.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    Week(s) Day Topic and/or Assignment
    1 1

    1. Orientation
    a. Course goals
    b. Course content
    c. Course policy

    2. Drafting and Design
    a. Standards
    b. Manual/CAD applications
    c. 2-D/3-D drawings and simulation

    1 2

    1. Review of Engineering Working Drawings
    a. Purpose
    b. Ballooning
    c. Build details
    d. Standard and purchase details
    e. Altered details
    f. Bill Of Materials (BOM)/stock list
    g. Title block h. Detail sheet-assembly relationship

    2. Drawing Assignment #1 Issued

    3. Homework Assignments #1 and #2 Issued

    4. Drawing Assignment #1 Lecture
    a. Assembly operation
    b. Build details identified
    c. Standard details identified

    5. Reference Catalogs
    a. Purpose
    b. Standard details
    c. Stock size
    d. Lab

    2 3

    1. Lab

    2 4

    1. Homework Assignments #1 and #2 Due

    2. Lab

    3 5

    1. Lab

    3 6

    1. Drawing Assignment #1 Due (NOTE: Due one hour after class begins)

    2. Drawing Assignment #2 Issued

    3. Lab

    4 7

    1. Drawing assignment #2 Lecture
    a. Assembly operation
    b. Build details identified
    c. Standard details identified
    d. Assembly drawing reference/part print dimensions

    2. Detailing
    a. Patterns (casting)
    b. Machine tool
    c. Sub-title block
    d. Title block

    3. Dimensioning
    a. CAD variations
    b. Datum line dimensioning
    c. Base line dimensioning
    d. Precision dimensioning

    4. Lab

    4 8

    1. Lab

    5 9

    1. Lab

    5 10

    1. Lab

    6 11

    1. Lab

    6 12

    1. Lab

    7 13

    1. Lab

    7 14

    1. Lab

    8 15

    1. Lab

    8 16

    1. Drawing Assignment #2 due (NOTE: Due one hour after class begins)

    2. Drawing Assignment #3 Issued

    3. Lab

    4. Design project
    a. Choose partner
    b. Part print issued
    c. Machining options

    9 17

    1. Drawing Assignment #3 Lecture
    a. Assembly operation
    b. Build details identified
    c. Standard details identified
    d. Welded construction
     i. Identifying Subcomponents
     ii. Dimensioning
     iii. Sub-title block

    2. Lab

    9 18

    1. Lab

    10 19

    1. Lab

    10 20

    1. Design project
    a. Design team should have design idea prepared for sketch

    2. Lab

    11 21

    1. Lab

    11 22

    1. Lab

    12 23

    1. Lab

    12 24

    1. Lab

    13 25

    1. Drawing Assignment #3 due (NOTE: Due one hour after class begins)

    2. Design Project sketch due (NOTE: Due by the end of class)

    13 26

    1. Lab

    14 27

    1. Lab

    14 28

    1. Lab

    15 29

    1. Lab

    15 30

    1. Lab

    16 31

    1. Final design project Assembly and Details (NOTE: Due one hour after class begins)

    16 32

    1. Debriefing
    a. Course evaluation
    b. Final grades (tentative)


    Primary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Secondary Faculty
    Gordon, Victoria
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2400 - Plastics Design & Manufacturing

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: None

    This course introduces students to proper design principles and techniques insuring a robust and manufacturable plastic molded part.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify plastic manufacturing techniques.

    Objectives: Recognize and identify:

    1. Injection molding.
    2. Compression molding.
    3. Draft angles.
    4. Parting lines.
    5. Cooling/warpage.
    6. Lifters/slides/injectors.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify various plastic materials.

    Objectives: Recognize and identify:

    1. SMC.
    2. RIM.
    3. PET.
    4. VEMPET.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply techniques to design plastic components.

    Objectives: Design:

    1. Ribs/bosses.
    2. Dog houses.
    3. Snap features.
    4. Design hinges.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Week

    1. Introduction and Overview
    2. Injection Molding
    3. Compression Molding
    4. Wall Sections/Radii; Test #1
    5. Draft and Textures
    6. Materials
    7. Ribs/Bosses
    8. Holes
    9. Dog Houses
    10. Snap Features; Test #2
    11. Inserts
    12. Living Hinges
    13. Parting Lines
    14. Lifters/Slides/Injectors
    15. Cooling/Warpage
    16. Review and Final Exam; Test #3

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2430 - Student Capstone Project

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 2100  

    (formerly PRDE 2420)

    The student will take this course at the conclusion of their program. This course is a multi‑disciplined program that is intended to challenge the student to work independently, but will encourage integrating a team environment. The student will be provided a topic to research, design, manufacture, and assemble within the semester.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to present ideas in a team environment and complete a group concept.

    Objectives:

    1. Create a team and assign tasks.
    2. Work in small groups and as an individual.
    3. Present to group clear and precise ideas.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize research techniques.

    Objectives:

    1. Use Internet documentation for Design Concepts.
    2. Reference periodical documents for design concepts.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize design skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Create CAD designs for concepts or production parts.
    2. Initiate FMEA concepts during project.
    3. Integrate DFM/DFA Techniques during Design.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to utilize manufacturing skills.

    Objectives:

    1. Operate the proper machines in the given time
    2. Utilize the correct options within the given time frame.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Project Introduction
    2. Creation of team or teams
    3. Assign tasks
    4. Research subject
    5. Design
    6. Manufacture

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2520 - NX Advanced

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1520  

    (replaces PRDE 2500 and PRDE 2510 together but does not equate to either course separately)

    This course is designed for the current user of NX. The student will develop parts using expressions, interpart relations, surfacing features, and develop assemblies using advanced techniques. No credit after PRDE 2510.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use the NX Expression interface.

    Objectives: Using the Interpart Relations tools in NX the learner will:

    1. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    2. Use selected options, modeling the part within the time allowed.
    3. Develop and use selected customized tool bars, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Interpart Relations tools in NX.

    Objectives: Using the NX Expression interface the learner will:

    1. Use the menus to maintain associative properties within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to hold properties within the part.
    3. Use the menus to substitute relations of a part.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use the Surfacing interface in NX.

    Objectives: Using the Surfacing interface in NX the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus within the time allowed to develop structured surfaces.
    2. Use the selected options within the time allowed to properly develop a part.
    3. Demonstrate the proper techniques to edit a part.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the ability to use analysis tools.

    Objectives: Using the analysis tools the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus to complete the project within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to modify a model within the time allowed.
    3. Create a part with the time allowed.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Advanced Expressions Interface
    2. Conditional Suppression
    3. Interpart Relations
    4. Analysis Features
    5. Advanced Assemblies
    6. Spline Creation
    7. Surface Development

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty
    Buhalis, Harry
    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2720 - Advanced Alias

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1820 

    This course emphasizes advanced modeling techniques using Alias Studio Tools. It provides a comprehensive study of workflows and techniques used to develop Class A surface. Students will gain knowledge of evaluation processes necessary in delivering high quality product designs.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will use scan data in Alias

    Objectives: Using the scan data interface in Alias the learner will:

    1. Demonstrate building a model in the time allowed.
    2. Identify selected menu options of a model build within the time allowed.
    3. Develop customized menu options during model build in the time allowed.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students prepare data for prototype build in Alias

    Objectives: Using the functions in Alias the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus to complete the project within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to modify the project within the time allowed.
    3. Develop a part in Alias with the time allowed for the project.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will use direct modeling in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the direct modeling functions in Alias the learner will:

    1. Develop curve geometry in the time allowed
    2. Modify curve geometry in the time allowed
    3. Use selected menus, modeling the part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will use the frame & fit functions in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the frame & fit functions in Alias the learner will:

    1. Use the menus to model within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to develop a part within the time allowed.
    3. Use the tool options to modify a part within the time allowed.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will use the parametric modeling functions in Alias.

    Objectives: Using the parametric modeling functions in Alias, the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus within the time allowed to model a part.
    2. Use the selected options within the time allowed to modify the model.
    3. Identify valid surface of a model in the time allowed.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will use part to part interface in Alias

    Objectives: Using the part to part interface in Alias the learner will:

    1. Use the selected menus to complete the project within the time allowed.
    2. Use the options to build the project within the time allowed.
    3. Develop a part with the time allowed for the project.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Pre - Test
    2. Classroom Procedures
    3. Surfacing Modeling Menus
    4. Manipulating Scan Data
    5. Prototype Build process
    6. Direct Modeling Menus
    7. Part to Part Interactions
    8. Final Project

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PRDE 2820 - 3DX-ICEM Shape Design

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PRDE 1920  

    3DX ICEM Shape Design is a three-dimensional CAD engineering tool that will introduce the student to methods and techniques of creating curves and surfaces for Class A surface development. The emphasis in this course is on 2D and 3D Curve creation, surface creation, and control point modification principles for both. Feature modeling, blend, analytical and navigational tools will also be covered. The 3DX interface as it pertains to ICEM will be explored and real-life Class A data files will be created.

    Billable Contact Hours: 6

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the navigation the use of the CATIA 3DX interface.

    Objectives:

    1. Set Roles within 3DX
    2. Navigate to the ICEM Shape Design app
    3. Navigate and Set model  preferences
    4. Locate the Importing and Exporting functionality
    5. Open and Save Data within the ENOVIA Database

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate basic modeling functionality within the 3DX ICEM Shape Design application

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate feature fundamentals
    2. Demonstrate 2d and 3D curve
    3. Demonstrate the various ICEM Shape Design functions and methods including Flange, Feature Model, Blend and Sweep including Command Tabs within the function
    4. Manipulate Control Point for curves and surfaces

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of the course, students will demonstrate the ICEM Shape Design app

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate the measuring functionality in 3DX
    2. Demonstrate Curve Analysis tools (Porcupine Analysis)
    3. Demonstrate Surface Curvature Analysis
    4. Apply and Interpret Connect Checker
    5. Demonstrate Cutting Planes Analysis
    6. Demonstrate Highlight Line Analysis
    7. Demonstrate setup and interpretation of the Draft Analysis

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will demonstrate the process of interrogating the history structure of the part

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate Model Management and Data Organization
    2. Demonstrate Quick Select
    3. Identify Parents and Children interpretation as well as the Historical Graph Navigation

    Outcome 5:  Upon Completion of this course, students will demonstrate the Automation Tools in 3DX

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate linking and creating formulas utilizing  Knowledgeware
    2. Create and apply User Defined Features
    3. Create and apply Power Copies

    Outcome 6: Upon Completion of this course, students will demonstrate model modification

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate modeling problem solving methods
    2. Demonstrate error diagnosis and resolution
    3. Identify error messages and the meaning

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. ICEM Shape Design User Interface
    2. 2D Curve Creation
    3. 3D Curve Creation
    4. Edit 2D & 3D Curve
    5. Shape Design Creation Features
    6. Control Point Manipulation
    7. Edit Shape Design
    8. Curve Analysis
    9. Surface Analysis
    10. Connect Checker
    11. Draft Analysis
    12. Model Management
    13. Knowledge Ware Modeling
    14. User-Defined Features
    15. Read Error Message

    Primary Faculty
    Carlson, James
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Thero, Laura
    Dean
    Hutchison, Donald



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Psychology

  
  • PSYC 1010 - Introductory Psychology

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    Nature, scope, and methods of psychology as behavioral science, emphasizing development, biological foundation of behavior, sensation, and perception, learning, emotion, motivation, and personality.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the historical and current perspectives, or schools of thought.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the psychoanalytic theory.
    2. Describe behaviorism.
    3. Describe the humanistic theory.
    4. Describe the cognitive theory.
    5. Describe eclecticism.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify the basic structure of the nervous and endocrine systems as they relate to behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Name components of the neuron (e.g. dendrite, cell body, axon, synapse, etc.).
    2. Describe neural communication.
    3. Describe how neurotransmitters work.
    4. Identify common hormones.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the overall development process from conception to death.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how and where fertilization occurs.
    2. Describe the three periods of prenatal development.
    3. Describe the development of language.
    4. Describe psychosocial development.
    5. Describe cognitive development.
    6. List factors involved in aging.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the basic principles of classical conditioning, operant conditioning, and social learning/observational learning and describe the role of memory as it relates to learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Define classical conditioning and its major components.
    2. Define operant conditioning and its major components.
    3. Define social learning/observational learning and its major components.
    4. Describe the three stores of memory (e.g. sensory, short-term, and long-term) and explain the processes of encoding, storage, and retrieval.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the forces that energize and direct behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the concept of the unconscious.
    2. Explain how the environment plays a role in behavior.
    3. Explain how culture plays a role in behavior.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe causes of and reaction to stress, including physical and psychological adaptations.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the fight-or-flight response.
    2. Explain Lazarus’ theory on the cognitive responses to stress.
    3. Explain how stress effects overall health.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to define the concept of personality and describe the major theoretical contributors.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify Freud’s concepts as they relate to personality development (e.g. structure of the personality, the unconscious, defense mechanisms, psychosexual stages).
    2. Name some individual contributors to the Trait Theory and their major concepts.
    3. Name some of the assessment measures used in studying personality.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to the Science of Psychology
      1. Research Methods
        1. Experimental Method
        2. Correlational Method
        3. Descriptive Research Techniques
      2. Schools of Thought/Theoretical Perspectives
        1. Psychoanalytic/Psychodynamic Theory
        2. Behaviorism
        3. Humanistic Theory
        4. Cognitive Theory
        5. Eclecticism
    2. Biology and Behavior
      1. Neurons and Neurotransmitters
      2. Central Nervous System
        1. Brainstem
        2. Midbrain
        3. Limbic System
        4. Cerebral Cortex
      3. Peripheral Nervous System
      4. Endocrine System
      5. Brain Research Techniques
    3. Sensation and Perception
      1. Sensation and Sensory Organs
      2. Transduction
      3. Perception
    4. States of Consciousness
      1. Circadian Rhythm
      2. Sleep
        1. Stages
        2. Dream Research
      3. Other Altered States of Consciousness
        1. Meditation
        2. Hypnosis
      4. Psychoactive Substances
        1. Substance Abuse
        2. Substance Dependence
        3. Types of Psychoactive Drugs and Their Effects
    5. Learning
      1. Classical Conditioning
      2. Operant Conditioning
      3. Social Learning Theory (Observational Learning)
      4. Cognitive Learning
    6. Memory
      1. Sensory Memory
      2. Short-Term Memory
      3. Long-Term Memory
      4. The Process of Memory
        1. Encoding
        2. Storage
        3. Retrieval
      5. Forgetting
    7. Cognition, Language, and Intelligence
      1. Problem Solving and Decision Making
      2. Language Development
        1. Structure/Essential Components of Language
        2. Bilingualism
      3. Measuring Intelligence
        1. Psychometric Approach
        2. Other Approaches (Multiple Intelligences, Triarchic Theory)
      4. Creativity
    8. Human Development
      1. Heredity and Prenatal Development
      2. Stage Theories of Development
        1. Cognitive Development
        2. Psychosocial Development
        3. Moral Development
      3. Other Development Issues
        1. Attachment
        2. Temperament
        3. Socialization
        4. Physical Changes
        5. Puberty
        6. Aging
    9. Motivation and Emotion
      1. Theories of Motivation
        1. Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs
        2. Arousal Theory
        3. Instinct Theory
      2. Hunger
        1. Eating Disorders
      3. Sexual Motives
      4. Social Motives
      5. Theories of Emotion
      6. Basic Emotions
    10. Personality
      1. Sigmund Freud and Psychoanalysis
        1. Id, Ego, Superego
        2. Defense Mechanisms
      2. Neo-Freudians
      3. Learning Theories and Personality
      4. Humanistic Theory and Personality
      5. Trait Theories
      6. Personality Assessment
    11. Health and Stress
      1. Sources of Stress
      2. Responding to Stress
        1. Physical Response
        2. Psychological Response
      3. Health and Illness
        1. Heart Disease
        2. Immune System
        3. Personality Factors
      4. Lifestyle and Health Behaviors
    12. Psychological Disorders
      1. Defining Abnormal Behavior
      2. Mood Disorders
        1. Depressive Disorders
        2. Bipolar Disorder
      3. Anxiety Disorders
        1. Generalized Anxiety Disorder
        2. Panic Disorder
        3. Phobias
        4. Obsessive-Compulsive Disorders
      4. Schizophrenia
      5. Personality Disorders
        1. Antisocial Personality Disorder
        2. Other Personality Disorders
      6. Other Psychological Disorders
        1. Somatic Symptom and Related Disorders
        2. Dissociative Disorders
        3. Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders
    13. Treatment
      1. Insight Therapies
        1. Psychodynamic
        2. Humanistic
      2. Relationship Therapies
        1. Group Therapy
        2. Couples Therapy
        3. Family Therapy
      3. Behavior Therapies
        1. Based on Classical Conditioning
        2. Based on Operant Conditioning
        3. Based on Social Learning/Observational Learning
      4. Cognitive Therapies
      5. Biological Therapies
        1. Antidepressants
        2. Antianxiety Medications
        3. Antipsychotic Medications
        4. Other Biologically Based Therapies
    14. Social Psychology
      1. Social Perception
      2. Attraction
      3. Social Influence
        1. Conformity
        2. Obedience
        3. Compliance
      4. Group Influences
      5. Attitudes
      6. Aggression
      7. Prosocial Behavior
      8. Prejudice and Discrimination

    Primary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Secondary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2170 - Psychological Statistics

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010  

    (formerly PSYC 2160)

    PSYC 2170 prepares students to apply descriptive and inferential statistics to psychological research. Topics include frequency distributions, measures of central tendency and variability, correlation and regression, hypothesis testing, z‑scores, t‑tests, analysis of variance, and chi‑square. The course covers computational procedures, applications and interpretations, and the use of statistical computer software for data analysis. Recommended for prepsychology majors.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply basic statistical terms and measures.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the difference between populations and samples, descriptive and inferential statistics, and continuous and discrete variables.
    2. Identify and describe the scientific method and the design of research studies.
    3. Identify the various scales of measurement.
    4. Recognize and recall various statistical notations.
    5. Explain and create frequency distribution tables and graphs.
    6. Explain and compute measures of central tendency.
    7. Explain the concept of variability and compute variance and standard deviation.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain, compute, and apply z-scores.

    Objectives:

    1. Locate z-scores in a distribution, and explain how to use them to standardize a distribution.
    2. Explain the concept of probability and apply it to z-scores and the distribution of sample means.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concepts and statistical procedures of hypothesis testing using z-scores and the t-statistic.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and conduct hypothesis tests using z-scores
    2. Explain the concept of t, and conduct hypothesis tests with single-samples, independent samples, and related samples.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and procedure of Analysis of Variance (ANOVA).

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and compute Analysis of Variance (ANOVA).
    2. Describe and explain the concepts and use of planned and unplanned comparisons, and post hoc tests (e.g., Tukey’s Honestly Significant Difference (HSD) test, and Scheffé test).

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and statistical procedures of correlation and regression.

    Objectives:

    1. Calculate and interpret correlations including Pearson and point-biserial correlations.
    2. Calculate and interpret regression equations.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept and statistical procedures of chi-square.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the difference between parametric and nonparametric tests.
    2. Calculate and interpret the chi-square test for goodness of fit, and the chi-square test for independence.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of the course students will be able to explain and apply the procedures involved with the use of SPSS.

    Objectives:

    1. Use SPSS to enter, analyze, and interpret data including: frequency distributions, means, measures of variance, z-scores, t-tests, correlation and regression, and ANOVA.
    2. Interpret SPSS output.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to statistics:
      1. Populations and samples
      2. The scientific method and the design of research studies
      3. Variables and measurement
      4. Statistical notation
    2. Frequency Distributions:
      1. Frequency distribution tables
      2. Frequency distribution graphs
      3. The shape of the frequency distribution
    3. Central Tendency:
      1. The mean
      2. The median
      3. The mode
      4. Selecting a measure of central tendency
    4. Variability:
      1. The range
      2. Standard deviation and variance for a population and samples
    5. Z-scores:
      1. Z-scores and location in a distribution
      2. Using z-scores to standardize a distribution
    6. Probability:
      1. Probability and the normal distribution
      2. Probabilities and proportions for scores from a normal distribution
    7. Probability and samples:
      1. Samples and sampling error
      2. The distribution of sample means
    8. Introduction to hypothesis testing:
      1. Uncertainty and errors in hypothesis testing (e.g., type I/II error)
      2. Conducting hypothesis tests
      3. Measuring effect size and power
    9. Introduction to the t-statistic:
      1. The t-statistic as an alternative to z
      2. Hypothesis tests with the t-statistic
    10. The t-test for two independent samples:
      1. The t-statistic for an independent-measures research design
      2. Assumptions
    11. The t-test for two related samples:
      1. The t-statistic for related samples
      2. Assumptions
    12. Estimation:
      1. Estimation with the t-statistic
    13. Introduction to analysis of variance (ANOVA):
      1. ANOVA notation and formulas
      2. The distribution of F-ratios
      3. Hypothesis testing and effect size with ANOVA
      4. Post hoc tests
    14. Repeated-measures and two-factor analysis of variance:
      1. Conducting repeated-measures ANOVA
      2. Conducting two-factor ANOVA
    15. Correlation and Regression:
      1. Using and interpreting the Pearson correlation
      2. Hypothesis tests with Pearson correlation
      3. The Point-biserial correlation
      4. Introduction to regression
    16. The chi-square statistic:
      1. Parametric and nonparametric statistical tests
      2. The chi-square test for goodness of fit
      3. The chi-square test for independence
      4. Measuring effect size
      5. Assumptions and restrictions
    17. SPSS Lab
      1. Entering data in SPSS
      2. Using SPSS to create frequency distribution graphs and tables
      3. Using SPSS to get mean, variance, standard deviation, and z-scores
      4. Using SPSS for t-tests, correlation, regression, and ANOVA
      5. Interpretation of SPSS output

    Primary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2210 - Child Growth & Development

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    Sequential development from conception to adolescence covering physical, intellectual, emotional, and social patterns of growth.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the major theories of child growth and development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major theories of prenatal and physical development.
    2. Describe the major theories of cognitive development as it relates to children.
    3. Describe language development from both the nativist and learning perspective.
    4. Describe social development as it relates to temperament, attachment, gender, and morality.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply research findings to child growth and development.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the method of research used to study child development.
    2. Identify strengths and weaknesses in research studies that pertain to child growth and development.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking skills as it relates to matters of child development.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the concept of teratogens and explain how it could affect the developing fetus.
    2. Describe the concept of attachment and explain how it plays a role in development.
    3. Describe the importance of environment and explain how schools, media, and culture can influence child development.
    4. Describe the different parenting styles and explain the role it plays in development.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate an understanding of contemporary issues in society and their impact upon children.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the different types of child abuse and explain how it affects all aspects of child growth and development.
    2. Explain the importance of standardized intelligence testing as it relates to children with special educational needs.
    3. Understand the psychological disorders that effect children as per the DSM 5 such as Intellectual Disability, ADHD and Autism Spectrum Disorder.
    4. Explain the effects of acceptance, neglect, and rejection by peers and how that may affect the course of child development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Child Growth and Development
      1. Theories About Development
        1. Psychoanalytic Theory
        2. Behavioral and Social Learning Theories
        3. Cognitive Theories
        4. Biological Theories
        5. Systems Theories
      2. Research Methods Used in Child Growth and Development
        1. Descriptive Research Methods
        2. Correlational Method
        3. Experiemental Method
        4. Other Methods for Assessing Development
        5. Ethics in Research With Children
    2. Genes and Heredity
      1. Genes, Chromosomes, and DNA
      2. Inheritance and Genetic Abnormalities
        1. Dominant-Recessive Traits
        2. Chromosomal Abnormalities
        3. Prenatal Screening and Genetic Testing
      3. Interaction of Genes and Environment
        1. Canalization
        2. Niche-Picking
      4. Heritability
    3. Prenatal Development and Birth
      1. Conception and Stages of Prenatal Development
      2. Teratogens
      3. Birth
      4. The Neonate
        1. Prematurity
        2. Low Birth Weight
        3. Infant Mortality
    4. Physical Development
      1. Reflexes
      2. Development of the Brain and Nervous System
        1. Neurons
        2. Brain/Neural Plasticity
      3. Physical Growth
        1. Cephalocaudal Trend
        2. Proximodistal Trend
        3. Sexual Maturation
      4. Perceptual Development
        1. Visual Preferences
        2. Habituation-Dishabituation Research
        3. Other Perceptual Development
    5. Cognitive Development
      1. Jean Piaget
      2. Lev Vygotsky
      3. Information Processing Theory
    6. Intelligence and Academic Skills
      1. History of Intelligence
      2. Psychometric Approaches
        1. Stanford Binet
        2. Wechsler Series
      3. Sternberg’s Triarchic Theory
      4. Gardner’s Multiple Intelligences Theory
      5. Creativity
      6. Development of Academic Skills
        1. Numbers and Mathematics
        2. Reading
        3. Writing
    7. Language Development
      1. Elements of Language
      2. Theories of Language Development
      3. Emergence of Language
        1. Infancy
        2. Early Childhood
        3. Middle Childhood and Adolescence
    8. Social Development
      1. Attachment
      2. Temperament
      3. Emotions
    9. Development of Self, Gender, and Morality
      1. Theories of Self
      2. Development of Gender
      3. Moral Development
    10. Peers, Play, Popularity
      1. Peer Relationships and Friendships
      2. Popular Children
      3. Rejected Children
      4. Neglected Children
    11. Families
      1. Parenting
      2. Discipline
      3. Changing Family Structures
      4. Child Care Issues
    12. Influences Outside the Family
      1. Schools
      2. Media
      3. Culture
    13. Children With Special Needs
      1. Emotional and Behavioral Problems
      2. Developmental and Learning Problems
      3. Child Maltreatment: Abuse and Neglect
      4. Children Who Thrive: Gifted, Talented, and Resilient

    Primary Faculty
    Groth, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2220 - Psychology of Adolescence

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    Physical, intellectual, emotional, and social development of the adolescent, including processes in personality stabilization.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate critical thinking re: biological and sociocultural matters impacting adolescents.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Explain how physical development and puberty influence adolescent development.
    2. Discuss the health implications of today’s adolescence.
    3. Discuss the changes that influence the American family and the effects these changes have on developing adolescents.
    4. Describe how media influences adolescent development.
    5. Discuss sexual development and sexuality during adolescence.
    6. Discuss biological and environmental factors associated with sexuality during adolescence.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain cognitive and behavioral aspects of adolescent development.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Understand the theories of cognitive development and how they can be applied in today’s society.
    2. Discuss the concept of moral development during adolescence.
    3. Understand the brain development that occurs during adolescence.
    4. Understand factors that contribute to adolescent risk taking.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply knowledge applicable to living and/or working with adolescent youth.

    Objectives: The student will:

    1. Discuss the role of the adolescent in the family system.
    2. Explain how parenting style affects the parent-adolescent relationship.
    3. Discuss the common view point held by adults related to adolescence and their impact in social interactions.
    4. Describe the impact of school and work on adolescent development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Physical Growth
    2. Cognitive growth
    3. Families
    4. Peers
    5. Schools
    6. Media
    7. Identity
    8. Love and Sex
    9. Morality and Religion
    10. Careers

    Primary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Secondary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2300 - Psychology of Adjustment

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    The process of personal adjustment including ways of coping with stress and learning constructive patterns of behavior.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe theories related to both effective and ineffective adjustment strategies.

    Objectives:

    1. Summarize appropriate research on the connection between daily events and stress.
    2. Identify ways to promote and maintain adjustment in daily life.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the impact of coping strategies on common sources of stress.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify two ways in which stress can impact both physiological and psychological health.
    2. Describe three effective coping strategies and explain how they minimize stress.
    3. Describe the role of gender, ethnicity, and socioeconomic factors in the reaction to and ability to cope with stress.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the factors necessary to create and maintain effective social relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe at least four social factors that influence communication in relationships.
    2. Identify three effective verbal and nonverbal communication skills that influence positive relations.
    3. Summarize the role of context in relationship communication.
    4. Summarize the research findings on same gender friendships, opposite gender friendships and romantic relationships (both heterosexual and homosexual).

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply the psychological principles of adjustment to daily living.

    Objectives:

    1. List three social and/or cultural factors that contribute to identity development.
    2. Describe three theories of identity development.
    3. Summarize the role of personality in identity development.
    4. Name common difficulties that may occur in the process of identity development.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. Stress
      1. Stressors
      2. Stress Management
    2. Physical Health
      1. Effects of Stress on Health
      2. Adjustment and Health
    3. Psychological Disorders
      1. Definitions
      2. Causes
      3. Theoretical perspectives
    4. Social Thinking
      1. Conformity
      2. Prejudice
      3. Group Influence
    5. Interpersonal Communications
      1. Cross‐cultural Perspectives
      2. Communication
    6. Friendship and Love
    7. Marriage and Committed Relationships
    8. Gender
      1. Gender Definitions
      2. Theories of Identification
      3. Impact of Gender Roles
    9. Sexuality
      1. Heterosexuality
      2. Homosexuality
      3. Scientific Evidence
    10. Careers

    Primary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Secondary Faculty
    Karlis, Lynda
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2310 - Educational Psychology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    This course is designed to integrate psychological principles with teaching and learning. Emphasis will focus on developmental theories, cognitive and behavioral learning theories, information processing, motivation, individual differences, instructional approaches, and assessment.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the developmental theories as related to learning and teaching.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the ways in which theories of cognitive development as related to learning and teaching.
    2. Summarize the influence of Erikson’s theory of psychosocial development influence on a student’s personality development.
    3. Identify the ways in which cognitive development influences moral thinking and behavior.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to apply the different views of learning and motivation to learning and teaching.

    Objectives:

    1. Relate behavioral and social cognitive approaches to learning and teaching.
    2. Apply the components of the informational processing theory to learning.
    3. Explain how thinking, problem solving, and social constructivism apply to learning and teaching.
    4. Illustrate how the theories of motivation apply to learning and teaching.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able analyze the impact of individual differences on learning.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret the research on differences in intelligence, learning styles and creativity to improve instruction and assessment.
    2. Identify group differences in socioeconomic status, ethnicity, gender and language as related to learning and instruction.
    3. Describe how to accommodate for student variability in the classroom including intellectual disabilities, learning disabilities, emotional disturbances and gifted and talented students.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to analyze different methods of teaching and assessing.

    Objectives:

    1. Differentiate between the different approaches to classroom management.
    2. Contrast the different approaches to classroom instruction.
    3. Compare the different classroom assessment, grading, and standardized testing techniques.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Educational Psychology
      1. Research Methods of Educational Psychology
      2. Developmental Theories Related to Learning
        1. Piaget’s Stages of Cognitive Development
        2. Vygotsky’s Sociocultural Theory
        3. Erikson’s Psychosocial Development
    2. Individual Variations in Learning
      1. Intelligence
      2. Learning Styles
      3. Students with Disabilities
      4. Gifted Students
    3. Group Differences in Learning
      1. Socioeconomic
      2. Culture and Ethnicity
      3. Gender
      4. Language
    4. Approaches to Learning
      1. Behavioral Approach
      2. Social Cognitive Approach
      3. Informational Processing Approach
      4. Thinking and Problem Solving
      5. Social Constructivist Approach
    5. Methods of Teaching and Learning
      1. Motivation and Achievement
      2. Classroom Management Techniques
      3. Lesson Planning
      4. Technology and Education
      5. Classroom Assessment and Grading
      6. Standardized Testing

    Primary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Secondary Faculty
    Chrustowski, Paul
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2400 - Industrial‑Organizational Psychology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    The purpose of this course is to apply psychological research and theory to issues in the workplace to provide a basis for understanding individual and group behavior at work. Topics include the psychological underpinnings of employee selection and training, performance appraisal, motivation and job satisfaction, group processes, and power and leadership in organizations.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the field of Industrial and Organizational (I/O) Psychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Define industrial and organizational psychology.
    2. Describe the various roles of I/O psychologists.
    3. Describe the major historical events in industrial and organizational psychology.
    4. Describe & distinguish among the research methods used in I/O psychology.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of job analysis and its uses in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the job analysis process.
    2. Describe the various methods used for job analysis.
    3. Using information obtained from a job analysis, write or critique a job description.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the employee selection process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the components of the employee selection process.
    2. Describe key legal issues in employee selection.
    3. Identify advantages and disadvantages of selection techniques.
    4. Describe methods used for selection decisions.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the employee performance appraisal process.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify components of the employee appraisal process.
    2. Describe and differentiate among performance appraisal methods.
    3. Identify the problems associated with performance ratings.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of employee training in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the components and purpose of training needs assessment.
    2. Describe various training methods and techniques.
    3. Describe training evaluation strategies.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast theories of motivation and how they relate to job performance.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the major theories of work motivation.
    2. Given a description of a situation, apply the appropriate motivation theory or theories.
    3. Describe and distinguish among individual differences and organizational contributions to work motivation.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of groups and group dynamics.

    Objectives:

    1. Define work groups.
    2. Describe conformity and group cohesiveness and their impact on satisfaction and performance.
    3. Describe causes of conflict.
    4. Describe conflict resolution strategies.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of leadership and the use of power in organizations.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify major topics in leadership research.
    2. Describe the theoretical approaches to leadership.
    3. Identify potential diversity issues in leadership.
    4. Identify the bases of power and their use in organizations.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to Industrial/Organizational Psychology
      1. Definitions
        1. What is industrial/organizational psychology?
        2. The science and practice of industrial/organizational psychology
      2. The roots and early history of industrial/organizational psychology
        1. The beginnings
        2. World War I and the 1920s
        3. The Great Depression years and World War II
        4. The postwar years and the modern era
        5. Industrial/organizational psychology today in the future
    2. Job Analysis
      1. Job analysis methods
        1. Observation, participation, existing data, interviews, survey, job diaries
      2. Specific job analysis techniques
        1. Job element method functional job analysis (FJA)
        2. Position analysis questionnaire (PAQ)
        3. Research using the PAQ
        4. Critical incidents technique (CIT)
        5. Comparing the different job analysis techniques
        6. Job analysis of ADA
        7. Job evaluation of comparable worth
    3. Employee Selection
      1. Steps in the employee selection process
      2. Employee recruitment
      3. Employee screening
        1. Evaluation of written materials
        2. References and letters of recommendation
        3. Employment testing
        4. Considerations of the development and use of personal screening and testing methods
        5. Types of employment screening tests
        6. The effectiveness of employee screening tests
        7. Assessments centers
        8. Hiring interviews
      4. Employee selection and placement
        1. Making employee selection decisions
        2. Employee placement equal employment opportunity and employee selection and placement
        3. Testing disable job applicants
    4. Evaluating Employee Performance
      1. Job performance and performance appraisals
      2. The measurement of job performance
        1. Objective versus subjective performance criteria
        2. Sources of performance ratings
      3. Methods of reading performance
        1. Comparative methods
        2. Individual methods
      4. The performance appraisal process
        1. Legal concerns and performance appraisals
        2. Team appraisals and the future of performance appraisals
    5. Employee Training and Development
      1. Areas of employment training
        1. New employee orientation and training
        2. Retraining and continuing education programs
        3. Team training.
      2. Fundamental issues in employee training
        1. Key issues in the success of training programs
        2. Transfer of training, trainee readiness, training program structure
        3. Common problems and employee training programs
      3. A model for successful training program
      4. Diversity and equal employment opportunity issues and employee training
    6. Motivation
      1. Defining Motivation
      2. Need theories of motivation
      3. Behavior based theories of motivation
      4. Job design theories of motivation
      5. Rational theories of motivation
      6. Comparing, contrasting, and combining the different motivation theories
      7. The relationship between motivation and performance
    7. Employee Attitudes and Behaviors
      1. Increasing job satisfaction and organizational commitment
      2. Positive employee attitudes and behaviors
      3. Negative employee attitudes and behaviors
      4. Sources of workers stress
        1. Stressful occupations
        2. Organizational and individual sources of work stress
    8. Group Processes in Work Organizations
      1. Defining teams and workgroups
      2. Group processes
      3. Group decision‐making processes
      4. Teams and teamwork
    9. Leadership
      1. Universalist theories of leadership
      2. Behavioral theories of leadership
      3. Contingency theory of leadership
      4. Additional leadership theories
      5. Comparing and contrasting theories of leadership

    Primary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Secondary Faculty
    Cobb, April
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2450 - Lifespan Development

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    (Effective Fall 2009: course description changed)

    This course traces biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social development across the life span, culminating in a synthesis of a multifaceted view of the individual as infant, child, adolescent, and adult.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss developmental themes central to a lifespan perspective on development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the lifespan perspective, using examples.
    2. Define the processes, periods, and issues of development, using examples.
    3. Describe the contrasting developmental issues of nature‐nurture, stability‐change, and continuity‐discontinuity.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the major theories of development through examples of research methodology used.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the focus, strengths, and weaknesses of psychoanalytic, cognitive, behavioral, and ethological theories of development.
    2. Using examples, compare and contrast the theories listed above
    3. Using examples, compare and contrast the cross‐sectional approach, the longitudinal approach, and the sequential approach to research.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to describe the age‐related tasks and basic milestones of biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the processes and milestones of biological development.
    2. Describe the processes and milestones of cognitive development, including information processing, language, and intelligence.
    3. Describe the processes and milestones of socioemotional development, including emotions, personality, identity, and morality.
    4. Describe the processes and milestones of social development, including relationships with family, peers, school, and coworkers.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to synthesize topical developmental information into a complete picture of the individual at each stage of development.

    Objectives: The student will

    1. Describe the infant in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    2. Describe the child in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    3. Describe the adolescent in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.
    4. Describe the adult in biological, cognitive, socioemotional, and social terms.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. The lifespan perspective
    2. Research in lifespan development
    3. Theories of development
    4. Physical processes and development
    5. Cognitive processes and development
    6. Socioemotional processes and development
    7. Social contexts of development
    8. Synthesis of the strands of development into a picture of the whole person
    9. Major issues and controversies in lifespan developmental psychology
    10. Major issues related to death and dying

    Primary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Secondary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2500 - Human Sexuality

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010  

    Sexuality of the total person concerned with the biological, psychological, and social factors that affect personality and interpersonal relationships.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the diversity of human sexuality.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how sexuality is a uniquely human trait.
    2. Explain and describe the evolution of human sexuality.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply theories about sexuality and basic scientific research methods.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and apply the various theoretical perspectives of human sexuality (e.g., psychological, biological, sociological, sociobiological, etc.).
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the research of pertinent investigators in the field of human sexuality.
    3. Describe the main concepts of the scientific method and basic research designs.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the concept involved with gender.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the process of gender development.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe gender roles.
    3. Identify, explain, and describe gender identity.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast the differences between the male and female reproductive systems.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and explain the sexual anatomy and physiology of males.
    2. Identify and explain the sexual anatomy and physiology of females.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and apply the components of communication in sexual behavior.

    Obectives:

    1. Identify and explain various aspects of successful communication.
    2. Identify and explain techniques of giving and receiving constructive criticism.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the role of love and intimacy in the development of sexual relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify and describe the different forms of love.
    2. Identify and describe the process involved in the development of intimacy.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain and describe the development of sexuality in childhood, adolescence, and adulthood.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during childhood.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during adolescence.
    3. Identify, explain, and describe the physical, cognitive, and psychosocial development of sexuality during adulthood.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe the components of sexual behaviors.

    Obectives:

    1. Identify, explain, and describe the process of sexual arousal and response.
    2. Identify and describe various forms of sexual expression.

    Outcome 9: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the concept of sexual orientation.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and describe the theoretical perspectives of what determines sexual orientation.
    2. Explain and describe the obstacles that individuals who identify as LGBTQ (Lesbian, Gay, Bi‐sexual and Transgendered) are faced with (e.g., societal attitudes, coming out, homophobia etc.).

    Outcome 10: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and explain the process of pregnancy and birth.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain and describe the aspects involved with fertility and infertility.
    2. Identify, explain, and describe the process of pregnancy.
    3. Identify and explain various problems during pregnancy.

    Outcome 11: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain the different forms of contraception and processes of abortion.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, describe, and explain the use and effectiveness of various forms of contraceptives (barrier, hormonal, chemical, IUDs, fertility awareness, and surgical).
    2. Identify, describe and explain the different types of abortion methods.

    Outcome 12: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and explain the various challenges to sexual functioning and treatments.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various sexual difficulties (desire, sexual arousal, orgasm, and pain disorders).
    2. Explain the origin of sexual difficulties.
    3. Describe and explain various treatment methods.

    Outcome 13: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain various STIs and HIV/AIDS.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various sexual difficulties (bacterial, viral, and ectoparasitic infections; and HIV/AIDS).
    2. Explain the origin of various STIs.
    3. Describe ways of preventing STIs and AIDS.

    Outcome 14: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify and describe various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the nature of various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.
    2. Explain the origin of various noncoercive and coercive paraphilias.
    3. Describe ways of treating pariahilias.

    Outcome 15: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with sexual victimization.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with rape and other forms of sexual assault.
    2. Identify, describe, and explain the factors associated with sexual harassment.

    Outcome 16: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe and explain the factors involved with sexual images and the selling of sex.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the impact of sexuality in the media.
    2. Describe and explain the impact of pornography.
    3. Describe and explain the impact of prostitution.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Perspectives on sexuality
    2. Theory and research
    3. Male and female sexual anatomy and physiology
    4. Communication
    5. Love and intimacy
    6. Sexuality across the lifespan
    7. Sexual arousal and response
    8. Gender & sexual orientation
    9. Contraception and abortion
    10. Sexual difficulties
    11. STIs
    12. Atypical sexual behaviors
    13. Sexual victimization
    14. Sexual images and selling sex

    Primary Faculty
    Groth, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2550 - Psychology of Gender

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010  

    PSYC 2550 explores psychological theories and research related to gender issues. Topics include the nature and meaning of gender, gender roles, sex similarities and differences, stereotypes, and gender issues in various aspects of the human experience including interpersonal relationships, mental and physical health, sexuality, and work.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of research approaches to the psychological study of gender.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe and distinguish between qualitative and quantitative research methods.
    2. Identify potential sources of bias at each step in the research process.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the contribution of various psychological perspectives and theories to our understanding of gender.

    1. Compare and contrast the psychodynamic, social learning, and cognitive approaches to gender.
    2. Describe the process of gender identity development.
    3. Identify the biological and social factors that contribute to gender development.
    4. Describe cultural variations in gender role definitions and attitudes.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of the development and impact of gender stereotypes.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the historical origins of gender stereotypes.
    2. Describe the formation and function of gender stereotypes.
    3. Describe cultural influences and variations in gender stereotypes.
    4. Describe the individual and social effects of gender stereotypes.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues with regard to cognitive ability.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast popular conceptions and key research findings comparing males and females in cognitive ability.
    2. Describe the practical significance and implications of differences and perceptions of differences.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in interpersonal relationships.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe similarities and differences in the ways interpersonal relationships are experienced by men and women.
    2. Describe the connection between gender and power in relationships.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in mental and physical health.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe gender similarities and differences in health and fitness.
    2. Describe gender issues in access and utilization of medical care.
    3. Describe similarities and differences in men’s and women’s sources of stress and coping resources and strategies.
    4. Identify gender issues in the diagnosis and treatment of psychological disorders.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in sexual attitudes and behavior.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the physiology of male and female sexual responses.
    2. Describe and critique methods for studying human sexual attitudes and behavior.
    3. Describe the development of sexual orientation.
    4. Identify issues and controversies in the concept of sexual orientation.
    5. Describe cultural variations in accepted sexual attitudes and behaviors.

    Outcome 8: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate knowledge of gender issues in the workplace.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe sex similarities and differences in career expectations and opportunities.
    2. Identify the factors that contribute to differences in men’s and women’s careers and rewards at work.
    3. Describe the relationships among sexuality, power, and sexual harassment in the workplace.
    4. Describe the impact of sexual harassment in the workplace.
    5. Identify barriers to workplace diversity.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Studying sex and gender in psychology
      1. History and issues in the study of sex and gender in psychology
      2. Approaches to research
        1. Qualitative and quantitative methods
      3. Sources of bias in gender research
    2. Gender stereotypes
      1. Origin of stereotypes
      2. Development and implications of stereotypes
    3. Theories of gender development
      1. Psychodynamic approach
      2. Social Learning theory
      3. Cognitive theories
        1. Cognitive developmental theory
        2. Gender schema theory
    4. Development of gender identity
      1. Influences on gender identity development
        1. Biological factors and gender development
        2. Family and peer influences on gender development
        3. Media and cultural influences on gender development
    5. Intelligence and cognitive abilities
      1. Sources of identified differences
      2. Implications of gender differences
    6. Interpersonal relationships
      1. Friendship
      2. Love relationships
    7. Sexuality
      1. The study of sexuality
      2. Heterosexuality
      3. Homosexuality
      4. Bisexuality
    8. Careers and work
      1. Career expectations and gender stereotypes
      2. Career opportunities
      3. Gender issues at work
        1. Gender segregation
        2. Communication and power
        3. Sexual harassment
    9. Health and fitness
      1. Mortality
      2. The health care system
      3. Gender, lifestyle, health and fitness
    10. Stress and coping
      1. Sources of stress for men and women
      2. Comparison of coping resources and strategies used by men and women
    11. Psychopathology
      1. Gender issues in the diagnosis of psychological disorders
      2. Gender comparisons in depression, substance abuse, anxiety, and other disorders.
      3. Gender issues in therapy
        1. Feminist therapy
        2. Therapy with men
        3. Gender‐sensitive therapies
    12. Cross‐cultural issues and gender
      1. Interaction between ethnic and gender stereotypes
      2. Cultural influences and variation in sex stereotypes
      3. Cultural variations in gender role definitions and attitudes
      4. Cultural variations in accepted sexual attitudes and behaviors.

    Primary Faculty
    Willard-Yakushev, Autumn
    Secondary Faculty
    Bajdo, Linda
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2600 - Social Psychology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    Social psychology is the scientific study of the effects of social and cognitive processes on the way individuals perceive, relate to, and influence others.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe social psychology’s research methods, with reference to key experiments in the field.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast correlational and experimental research methods.
    2. Discuss the design, results, and conclusions of major studies by major social psychologists (e.g., Asch, Milgram, Zimbardo, etc.).

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the fundamental principles of social cognition and social affect.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the sources and uses of social knowledge.
    2. Describe the ways in which emotions inform us about our social relationships.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the personal and situational factors that contribute to the individual’s perception of the self, other individuals, and groups.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast self‐concept, self‐esteem, social comparison, and social identity.
    2. Describe the basic principles of impression formation and attribution.
    3. Discuss the factors that influence social group process and performance.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the processes of social influence at work in attitude formation, persuasion, conformity, and obedience.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the variables that affect attitude strength, attitude‐behavior relationships, and attitude change.
    2. Outline the person and situation factors that determine the effectiveness of persuasion.
    3. Compare and contrast conformity and obedience with respect to the person and situation variables that influence each.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the personal and situational factors that play a role in social interaction, including attraction, prosocial behavior, aggression, and group performance and decision‐making.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss the personal and situational variables that influence the behavior of individuals in a given social interaction.
    2. Identify examples of the influence of gender and culture on social interaction.
    3. List two methods for developing a social‐responsibility norm.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to compare and contrast stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination.

    Objectives:

    1. Discuss stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination with regard to the relative influences of person and situation factors in each.
    2. Identify the impact of both social cognition and social affect in the development and prevention of stereotyping and prejudice.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Introduction to social psychology
    2. Research methods
    3. Social cognition
    4. Social affect
    5. The self
    6. Attitudes and behavior
    7. Persuasion
    8. Perceiving others
    9. Social influence
    10. Attraction
    11. Prosocial behavior
    12. Aggression
    13. Groups
    14. Stereotyping, prejudice, and discrimination

    Primary Faculty
    Wakevainen, Edythe
    Secondary Faculty
    Karlis, Lynda
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2700 - Psychology of Health: Mind & Body Interaction

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    A detailed overview of the psychological factors influencing health, illness, and the healing process including current scientific research, the impact of stress and coping, personality and health, the psychology of complementary medicine, living with chronic conditions, and closure, death and dying.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to describe the basics of the professional practice of health psychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the biopsychosocial model of health.
    2. List at least three situations in which a health psychologist would be consulted.
    3. Describe the research methodologies used in health psychology.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain the interplay between one’s physical well-being and biological, psychological, and social factors.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the impact of health disparities on the prevalence of disease in our society.
    2. Identify the factors that promote and create barriers to good health behaviors.
    3. Describe the basic guidelines for a healthy diet and exercise plan.
    4. Describe health-compromising behaviors and why people engage in them.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to explain how cognitive and socioemotional factors affect health.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify at least three ways in which stress affects health and disease.
    2. Describe the recommended strategies for coping with stress.
    3. Outline the sociocultural influences on well-being and resilience.
    4. Identify the ways by which behavioral and cognitive-behavioral interventions may promote changes in health behaviors.

     

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to distinguish between allopathy with complementary and alternative medicine.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe trends in the prevalence of complementary and alternative medicine in the United States.
    2. Identify the basic principles of naturopathy and discuss the pros and cons of herbal medicine.
    3. Describe at least three different forms of complementary and alternative medicine and their effects on health.
    4. Discuss the effectiveness of food supplement therapy and dietary medicine in treating disease and in promoting health.

     


    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. An Introduction to Health Psychology
      1. Defining Health Psychology
      2. Role of the Health Psychologist
      3. The Biopsychosocial Model
      4. Health Care in the United States
      5. Historical Views of Health
      6. Lifespan Development Perspective
      7. Research Methods in Health Psychology
      8. Ethics in Research
    2. Health Beliefs and Behaviors
      1. Health Promotion and Disease Prevention
      2. Practicing Healthful Behaviors
      3. Helping with Behavioral Change
    3. Health-Enhancing Behaviors
      1. Healthy Diet and Weight
      2. Physical Fitness and Exercise
      3. The Importance of Sleep
      4. Injury Prevention
    4. Health-Compromising Behaviors
      1. Understanding Health-Compromising Behavior
      2. Diet and Obesity
      3. Eating Disorders
      4. Substance Use
      5. Smoking and Nicotine
      6. Drinking and Alcohol
      7. Risky Sexual Behavior
    5. Understanding Stress
      1. Understanding Stress
      2. The Physiology of Stress
      3. The Psychosocial Aspects of Stress
      4. Measuring Stress
      5. Stress Effects on the Brain and Body
      6. Responses to Stress
      7. Coping with Stress
    6. Illness, Pain and Disease
      1. Psychoneuroimmunology
      2. The Immune System
      3. Recognizing Pain
      4. Physiology of Pain
      5. Treating Pain
      6. Chronic Illness
      7. Autoimmune Diseases
      8. Risk Factors for Illness and Disease
      9. Preventing and Treating Illness and Disease
      10. The Mind-Body Connection
      11. Emotional Responses to Chronic Illness
      12. Coping with Chronic Illness
      13. Terminal Illness
    7. Health Services and Providers
      1. Types of Health Care Services
      2. Health Insurance and Access to Care
      3. Seeking Treatment
      4. Compliance
      5. The Patient-Practitioner Relationship
    8. Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      1. Understanding Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      2. Effectiveness of Complementary and Alternative Medicine
      3. Acupuncture
      4. Biofeedback
      5. Chiropractic
      6. Nutrition
      7. Naturopathic Medicine

    Primary Faculty
    Groth, Karen
    Secondary Faculty
    Mikitch, Lisa
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2750 - Brain & Behavior

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010 

    This course explores the neural mechanisms that underlie people’s thoughts, feelings, and actions. Topics include the biological bases of sensation and perception, movement, brain plasticity, memory and amnesia, eating, sex, sleep, addiction, emotion, stress, language, and psychological disorders.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the structure and function of the nervous system, including its cells and structures.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe in detail the general layout of the nervous system.
    2. List the major structures found within each of the five divisions of the brain, and their functions.
    3. Compare and contrast the processes of communication within and between neurons.

    Outcome 2: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of sensation and perception.

    Objectives:

    1. Trace the pathway of a given sensory system from the periphery to the cortex.
    2. Explain the concept of “receptive field” with reference to the levels of the visual pathway.
    3. Discuss the three principles of sensory system organization with reference to a given sensory system.
    4. Describe two patients with perceptual difficulties, and discuss the relationship between their symptoms and underlying brain abnormalities.

    Outcome 3: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the structure and function of the motor systems of the body.

    Objectives:

    1. List the brain areas involved in movement.
    2. Compare and contrast the four descending motor pathways.
    3. Explain the concept of a “sensorimotor program” with reference to a case study of a patient with movement problems.

    Outcome 4: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to describe the causes, outcomes, and treatment of damage to the nervous system.

    Objectives:

    1. List six causes of brain damage.
    2. Compare and contrast the causes and symptoms of two of the major neuropsychological diseases.
    3. Identify the ways in which the nervous system responds to damage
    4. Describe the ways in which nervous system damage is treated in medical and rehabilitative settings.

    Outcome 5: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the brain mechanisms of learning, memory and amnesia.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the causes and symptoms of two of the major forms of amnesia.
    2. Identify the brain areas involved in storing memories.
    3. Describe changes at the synaptic level that could underlie memory formation.

    Outcome 6: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of motivated behaviors including eating, sex, and sleep.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the internal (physiological) and external factors involved in hunger and satiety, both normal and abnormal.
    2. Discuss the role of hormones and the nervous system in sexual behavior and sexual orientation.
    3. List the brain areas involved in sleep and sleep disorders.

    Outcome 7: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to discuss the role of the nervous system in addiction, emotion, stress, and language.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how the brain changes as a result of drug addiction.
    2. Identify the brain areas involved in emotion.
    3. Explain how the brain and the immune system are affected by stress.
    4. Describe the “split brain” operation and explain what it has revealed about the biological basis of language and language disorders.

    Outcome 8: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to explain the biological bases of psychiatric disorders, including schizophrenia, depression, bipolar disorder, and anxiety disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the causes, symptoms and treatment of schizophrenia with reference to the brain.
    2. Compare and contrast the biology of affective disorders and anxiety disorders, including brain mechanisms and treatment.
    3. Summarize the controversy around the use of psychotherapeutic medications.

    Outcome 9: Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to think critically about biopsychology.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain how the scientific method is used to study brain and behavior relationships.
    2. Discuss the connections between academic material in biopsychology and real world issues (e.g. ethics, personal health, etc.)
    3. Explain how an understanding of the diseased or damaged brain informs our understanding of the normal brain, with reference to clinical case studies.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Foundations of Biopsychology
      1. Introduction to the Study of Brain and Behavior
      2. Anatomy of the Nervous System
      3. Physiology of the Nervous System
    2. Sensory and Motor Systems
      1. Sample Sensory System: Vision
      2. Perceptual Mechanisms
      3. The Sensorimotor System
    3. Brain Plasticity
      1. Nervous System Development
      2. Brain Damage and Neuroplasticity
      3. Learning, Memory, and Amnesia
    4. Biopsychology of Motivation
      1. Hunger and Eating
      2. Sex
      3. Sleep and Circadian Rhythms
    5. Biopsychology of Health
      1. Addiction, Emotion, and Stress
      2. Lateralization, Language, and the Split Brain
      3. Psychological Disorders

    Primary Faculty
    Wakevainen, Edythe
    Secondary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2800 - Abnormal Psychology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010  

    Abnormal Psychology is designed to give the student an in‑depth understanding of mental illness and the forces that contribute to the development of psychopathology. PSYC 2800 will include the study of various psychological disorders found in our society; and it will address and examine probable causes. Current treatment strategies will also be discussed.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to understand the history of mental illness.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the insane asylums.
    2. Explain the reason for creating asylums.
    3. Explain the “moral treatment” movement.
    4. Explain various historical treatment practices used on those with mental illness.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Name the common depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. Name the common eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. Name the common psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. Name the common childhood disorders and neurocognitive disorders.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to name the symptoms of common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. Identify the most prevalent symptoms found in childhood and neurocognitive disorders.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to identify current treatment methods for common psychological disorders.

    Objectives:

    1. List current treatment strategies for the depressive, bipolar disorders, PTSD/OCD, and anxiety disorders.
    2. List current treatment strategies for the eating disorders, dissociative, and personality disorders.
    3. List current treatment strategies for the psychotic disorders, somatic disorders, and substance use disorders.
    4. List current treatment strategies for the neurocognitive disorders.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Historical Foundation
      1. Historical Conceptions of Abnormal Behavior
        1. The Supernatural Tradition
        2. The Biological Tradition
        3. The Psychological Tradition
    2. Integrative Perspectives
      1. Genetic Contributions to Psychopathology
      2. Neuroscience and Its Contributions to Psychopathology
      3. Behavioral and Cognitive Science
      4. Emotions
      5. Cultural, Social, and Interpersonal Factors
    3. Clinical Assessment, Diagnosis, and Treatment
      1. Assessing Psychological Disorders
      2. Classifying Psychological Disorders and Understanding Diagnoses
      3. Treating Psychological Disorders
        1. Medical Treatments
        2. Psychosocial Treatments
        3. Combined Treatments
        4. Preventing Relapse
    4. Research Methods
      1. Studying Individual Cases
      2. Research Via Correlation
      3. Research Via Experiment
      4. Studying Genetics
      5. Studying Behavior Over Time
      6. Studying Behavior Across Cultures
      7. Research Ethics
    5. Anxiety Disorders
      1. Phobias
      2. Generalized Anxiety Disorder
      3. Social Anxiety Disorder
      4. Panic Disorder
      5. Agoraphobia
    6. Dissociative and Somatic Disorder, Others
      1. Dissociative Disorders
        1. Depersonalization Disorder
        2. Dissociative Amnesia
        3. Dissociative Identity Disorder
      2. Somatic Disorders
        1. Illness Anxiety Disorder
        2. Somatic Symptom Disorder
        3. Conversion Disorder
        4. Pain Disorder
      3. Others
        1. Obsessive Compulsive Disorder
        2. Post Traumatic Stress Disorder
        3. Hoarding Disorder
        4. Body Dismorphic Disoder
    7. Depressive Disorders
      1. Depressive Disorders
      2. Bipolar Disorders
      3. Comorbidity With Anxiety
      4. Suicide
    8. Eating Disorders
      1. Bulimia Nervosa
      2. Anorexia Nervosa
      3. Binge‐Eating Disorder
      4. Other Eating Disorders
    9. Sleep Disorders
      1. Dyssomnias
        1. Insomnia
        2. Hypersomnia
        3. Narcolepsy
        4. Sleep Apnea
      2. Parasomnias
    10. Physical Disorders
      1. Immune System and Physical Disorders
        1. AIDS
        2. Cancer
      2. Chronic Pain
    11. Sexual and Gender Identity Disorders
      1. Gender Dysphoria
      2. Sexual Dysfunctions
      3. Paraphilias
        1. Fetishism
        2. Voyeurism, Exhibitionism, Frotteurism
        3. Sexual Masochism
        4. Sexual Sadism
        5. Pedophilia
    12. Substance‐Related Disorders
      1. Depressants
        1. Alcohol
        2. Sedatives
      2. Stimulants
        1. Amphetamines
        2. Cocaine
        3. Nicotine
        4. Caffeine
      3. Opioids
      4. Hallucinogens
        1. Marijuana
        2. LSD and Others
    13. Personality Disorders
      1. Cluster A
        1. Paranoid Personality Disorder
        2. Schizoid Personality Disorder
        3. Schizotypal Personality Disorder
      2. Cluster B
        1. Antisocial Personality Disorder
        2. Borderline Personality Disorder
        3. Histrionic Personality Disorder
        4. Narcissistic Personality Disorder
      3. Cluster C
        1. Avoidant Personality Disorder
        2. Dependent Personality Disorder
        3. Obsessive‐Compulsive Personality Disorder
      4. Personality Disorders Under Study
    14. Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
      1. Schizophrenia
      2. Other Psychotic Disorders
      3. Causes
    15. Disorders of Childhood
      1. Pervasive Developmental Disorders
        1. Autistic Spectrum Disorder
        2. Elimination Disorders
      2. Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder
      3. Learning Disorders
      4. Intellectual Disability Disorder
    16. Neurocognitive Disorders
      1. Delirium
      2. Dementia
      3. Amnesic Disorder
    17. Mental Health Services
      1. Legal Issues
      2. Ethical Issues
      3. Criminal Commitment
      4. Rights of those with Mental Illness

    Primary Faculty
    Multhaupt, Paulina
    Secondary Faculty
    Van Wormer, Sara
    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • PSYC 2850 - Forensic Psychology

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: PSYC 1010  

    This course will explore the application of psychological research and practice in relation to the criminal justice and legal systems. Topics include antisocial personality, mental illness and crime, substance abuse and crime, victimology, types of offenders, sexual crimes, white-collar crime, eye-witness testimony, insanity defense and competency to stand trial, capital murder and the death penalty, jury selection, sentencing and police interrogation. The varying ways in which the criminal justice system processes, treats, and interacts with the different types of offenders will also be discussed.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the psychological aspects of crime.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate an understanding of psychological principles as they relate to the legal system.
    2. Evaluate the various roles that psychologists play in the criminal justice system.
    3. Explore the applications of psychology to various criminal justice and correctional issues.
    4. Identify the various types of crimes most commonly related to mental health issues.
    5. Explore the challenges individuals with mental health issues face in the criminal justice system.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the legal aspects of crime.

    Objectives:

    1. Compare and contrast the various types of crimes and their impact on society.
    2. Analyze important case law that has shaped the relationship between psychology and the legal system.
    3. Evaluate how the courts and the legal system influence the practice of psychology at both the individual and systemic level.
    4. Evaluate how the field of psychology influences the legal field at both the individual and public policy level.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to evaluate the various components of the legal system.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate the investigation process, interrogation process, Miranda rights, and confessions.
    2. Analyze the effectiveness of punishment and rehabilitation models.
    3. Explore the treatment and needs of juvenile offenders.
    4. Describe the process of evaluating competency and insanity.
    5. Evaluate the options of those deemed incompetent or criminally insane.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
    Session and Topic:

    1. What Is Forensic Psychology?
      1. The origin of forensic psychology
      2. Major Areas of Forensic Psychology
      3. Structure of the legal system
      4. The Law and Psychology
      5. Conflict between psychology and law
      6. Careers in forensic psychology
    2. Psychology of crime
      1. Genetics and crime
      2. Neurotrasmitters and hormones and crime
      3. Brain development and crime
      4. Psychosocial theories of crime
    3. The Psychology of Police
      1. Police training and education
      2. Police selection
      3. Psychological assessment of police
      4. Role of police
      5. Police-community relations
      6. Police stress
    4. Forensic Assessment and Treatment
      1. Forensic assessment method and procedures
      2. Clinical, Actuarial, and Structured Risk Assessments
      3. Risk and Protective Factors
      4. Difficulties in risk assessment
      5. Types of treatment in Forensic settings
      6. Success of various treatment models
    5. Expert Testimony and the Role of an Expert
      1. History of the Expert Witness
      2. Admissibility of Expert Testimony
      3. Challenges to Expert Testimony
      4. Criticisms of Expert Testimony
    6. Psychology of Violence
      1. General violence and criminal behavior
      2. Sexual violence
      3. Domestic violence
      4. Special Groups (women, children adolescents, intellectually disabled)
      5. Psychopathy 
    7. Sexual Offenders
      1. What Is a Sexual Offender?
      2. Risk assessment and recidivism
      3. Treatment and Management of Sexual Offenders
      4. Juvenile sexual offenders
      5. Female sexual offenders
      6. Sexual Offender laws, registration and residency issues
    8. Criminal and Civil Competence
      1. Competency to Stand Trial
      2. Competency evaluations
      3. Restoration of Competence
    9. Insanity, Criminal Responsibility, and Diminished Capacity
      1. Insanity Defense‐historical and present views
      2. Historical cases related to insanity laws
      3. Guilty but mentally ill
      4. Evaluations of Insanity
      5. Criminal Responsibility and Diminished Capacity
    10. Juvenile Delinquency and Juvenile Justice
      1. History of the Juvenile Court
      2. Juvenile Delinquency and Juvenile Offenses
      3. Risk factors for juvenile delinquency
      4. Juveniles charged as adults
      5. Treatment for juvenile offenders
    11. Sentencing & Corrections
      1. Sentencing practices
      2. Sentencing disparities
      3. Types of outcomes
      4. Prison, jail and community corrections
      5. Recidivism 
    12. Psychology in the courtroom
      1. Jury selection
      2. Bench vs. Jury trial
      3. Role of judge and jury
      4. Eyewitness testimony
      5. Accuracy of memory
      6. Child witnesses

    Primary Faculty
    Groth, Karen
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Williams-Chehmani, Angie
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Reading

  
  • READ 0960 - Reading Strategies

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Placement

    (formerly READ 0950)

    READ 0960 provides students with additional preparation and a refresher in fundamental reading skills and strategies. This course is designed to improve vocabulary, reading comprehension, and study skills for greater success in courses throughout college.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply varied and appropriate active reading strategies in each phase of the reading process to understand what is read.

    Objectives:

    1. Examine the roles prior knowledge and personal experience play in helping readers make connections and understand topics.
    2. Identify and selectively apply a variety of before reading strategies to establish ones purpose and approach for reading a range of texts.
      1. Previewing
        1. Vocabulary
        2. Text Features
        3. Headings/Subheadings
        4. Book Resources
        5. Skimming/Scanning
      2. Textbook Inventory
    3. Develop and apply strategies for comprehending text during reading to construct meaning, draw conclusions, evaluate understanding, and monitor comprehension.
      1. Determine Main Ideas
      2. Generate Questions
      3. Draw Conclusions
      4. Annotate
      5. Infer
      6. Visualize
    4. Reflect on and respond to text after reading to synthesize understanding by sharing, acknowledging, and building on the ideas of others.
      1. Discussion Groups (small, whole, partners)
      2. Response Journals
      3. Study Guides
      4. Literacy (B)logs

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply knowledge of language and word systems to construct meaning and comprehend more fully when reading.

    Objectives:

    1. Use context (e.g., the overall meaning of a sentence, paragraph, or text; a word’s position or function in a sentence) as a clue to the meaning of a word or phrase.
    2. Recognize and use roots, affixes, and word origins to understand technical, scientific, or mathematic language.
    3. Identify and correctly use patterns of word changes that indicate different meanings or parts of speech (e.g., conceive, conception, conceivable).
    4. Consult general and specialized reference materials both print and digital, to find the pronunciation of a word, determine or clarify its precise meaning, part of speech, etymology, or standard usage.
    5. Study and memorize the meanings of words and phrases in alternative ways by creating graphic representations or restating in own words.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to engage in self-assessment as a reader by setting personal learning goals and taking responsibility for one’s academic growth.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate reading interests, strengths, and areas of improvement and apply assessment results to improve reading ability over time.
    2. Apply learning strategies and study skills to enhance learning.
      1. Annotating
      2. Note-Taking
        1. Highlighting

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Literacy Development
      1. Assessment and Evaluation
        1. Pre-Assessment: Nelson-Denny
        2. Other assessments
          1. Reading Interest Survey (self-assessment)
          2. Reading Goals (self-assessment)
          3. Writing Sample
          4. Academic Word List
      2. Literacy Learning Strategies
        1. What is Annotating?
        2. Note-Taking Tips
          1. Appropriate Ways to Highlight
      3. Use of Technological Resources
        1. My Reading Lab
        2. Library/Internet Resources
    2. Active Reading
      1. Before Reading
        1. The Importance of Background Knowledge
          1. What Do I Already Know?
        2. Reading Textbooks vs. Fiction
        3. Previewing the Text
          1. Vocabulary
          2. Using Context Clues
          3. Word Parts & Origins
          4. Word Forms
          5. Word Study
            1. Using the Dictionary/Thesaurus
            2. Making Concept Cards
        4. Text Features
          1. Textbook Inventory
        5. Headings/Subheadings
        6. Chapter Titles
        7. Book Resources
          1. Glossary, Index, Appendix, etc.
        8. Skimming/Scanning
        9. Anticipation Guides
    3. During Reading
      1. Being an Active Reader
        1. Annotating
        2. Literacy (B)logs
        3. Vocabulary Analysis
          1. Using Context Clues
          2. Word Parts & Origins
          3. Word Study
          4. Using the Dictionary/Thesaurus
        4. Determining Main Ideas
        5. Generating Questions
        6. Drawing Conclusions/Summarizing
    4. After Reading
      1. Review, Reflect, Respond (ideas listed below)
        1. Discussion Groups
          1. Small-whole-partner
        2. Reading Blogs (sharing)
        3. Response Journals
        4. Study Guides
        5. Quick Writes
        6. Sketch to Stretch
        7. Study Guides
    5. Reading Selections
      1. Apply the Active Reading Process
        1. Nonfiction Reading (textbooks, articles, etc.)
        2. Fiction (novel)
    6. Post-Assessment
      1. Administer Nelson-Denny
      2. Other assessments
        1. Reading Interest Survey
        2. Writing Sample
        3. Academic Word Lists

    Primary Faculty
    Mayernik, Heather
    Secondary Faculty

    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • READ 1200 - Reading in the Disciplines

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: None

    (formerly READ 1100)

    This course engages students in collaborative dialogue and the application of reading and writing strategies. This class will improve students’ comprehension of technical and discipline-specific texts while developing the ability to read and think critically needed to succeed in college level coursework.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to create a concept map to demonstrate relationships between and among ideas: cause/effect, comparison/contrast, sequence.

    Objectives:

    1. Interpret graphs and charts
    2. Look for patterns and trends
    3. Interpret patterns of organization within sentences and paragraphs and charts

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to test and verify hypotheses through the application of before, during and after reading/study strategies to develop comprehension.

    Objectives:

    1. Apply the Four Step Reading Process and record margin notes to annotate a text
    2. Actively create text to self, text to text, and text to world connections while reading
    3. Record predictions and questions
    4. Distinguish fact from opinion
    5. Draw inferences to identify the implied main idea
    6. Monitor comprehension by deploying fix-it strategies as needed. For example, rereading, citing evidence from the text to support reasoning

     
    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to reconstruct the rhetorical tools of an author or discipline specific text.

    Objectives:

    1. Use of connotative/denotative meaning, figurative language, and literal versus implied meaning and how they influence an interpretation of a text
    2. Evaluate an author’s: purpose, tone, claim, argument
    3. Probe and challenge underlying bias and assumptions
    4. Recognize pattern of organization within sentences and paragraphs of a text.
    5. Effectively paraphrase and summarize texts using journalistic style questions
    6. Identify discipline specific vocabulary and syntax

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course students will be able to evaluate multiple perspectives to find inter-textual links between related authors/topics.

    Objectives:

    1. Evaluate corroboration of sources
    2. Construct interpretations of a text by making judgments and connections with prior knowledge and experience
    3. Integrate primary and secondary sources using MLA and APA citation correctly
    4. Explore reactions and response to texts orally and in writing to reinforce the connection between reading and writing

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE
     

    1. The Four Part Reading Process
    2. Structure of Expository texts
    3. Patterns of Organization
    4. Examining the purpose and structure of an argument
    5. Interpretive Reading and Critical Thinking
    6. Effectively Retelling, paraphrasing, and summarizing
    7. Concepts Maps and Interpreting Graphs and Charts
    8. Using research techniques by citing information using MLA and APA format

    Primary Faculty
    Ferguson, Cheryl
    Secondary Faculty
    Mayernik, Heather
    Associate Dean
    Ternullo, Annette
    Dean
    Pritchett, Marie



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088


Respiratory Therapy

  
  • RSPT 1050 - Clinical Cardiorespiratory Physiologic Anatomy

    Credit Hours: 4.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy Program; BIOL 2710 , and BIOL 2730  or BIOL 2400  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: RSPT 1060  and RSPT 1085  

    RSPT 1050 teaches respiratory and cardiac anatomy and physiology with a focus on clinical application. Topics include anatomy and physiology, ventilation, pulmonary function measurements, gas diffusion, oxygen and carbon dioxide equilibration and transport, acid‑base regulation and ventilation/perfusion relationships.

    Billable Contact Hours: 4

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the anatomy of the cardiopulmonary system.

    Objectives:

    1. Given a model of the upper or lower airway, identify the key structures.
    2. Define the directional terms and abdominal quadrants and regions and use these terms to describe anatomical locations.
    3. Describe the major structures and functions of the upper and lower airways.
    4. Name the lobes and segments of the lungs.
    5. Identify the anatomic landmarks of the thorax.
    6. List the primary and accessory muscles of inspiration and expiration.
    7. Diagram the heart indicating the chambers, blood vessels that enter and leave the heart, cardiac valves, layers of heart muscle, pericardium and blood supply to the myocardial tissues.
    8. Diagram the electrical conduction system of the heart and state the normal rate associated with each intrinsic pacemaker.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how spontaneous ventilation occurs.

    Objectives:

    1. Diagram the lungs and thorax detailing the lung pressures and pressure gradients.
    2. Describe how the movement of the diaphragm affects lung pressures.
    3. Discuss the effects of surface tension on lung function.
    4. Given appropriate data, define compliance and resistance and calculate each.
    5. Define and describe the importance of deadspace ventilation.
    6. Given a graph of a ventilatory pattern, identify the ventilation pattern present.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, students will list the steps of how a gas moves from the atmosphere to the bloodstream, and ultimately to the tissues.

    Objectives:

    1. List the major gases present in the atmosphere and demonstrate how to determine the partial pressure of each gas and the total gas present.
    2. Given the appropriate information, calculate the PAO2.
    3. Diagram the pathway of gas diffusion across the alveolar capillary (AC) membrane and describe how each can affect gas diffusion.
    4. Explain how the DLCO test is performed to determine diffusion defects in the lung.
    5. Differentiate between hypoxia and hypoxemia and state how each are determined.
    6. List the indices that are used to assess oxygenation and describe how each affect the total amount of oxygen carried in the blood.
    7. Given appropriate known values, calculate the oxygen content, oxygen content difference, and oxygen delivery.
    8. List the factors that shift the oxyhemoglobin curve to the right and to the left.
    9. State the causes of hypoxemia and how each is treated.
    10. List the types of hypoxia and give an example of each.
    11. Explain how the V/Q ratio is derived and state the normal value.
    12. Given appropriate data, identify the types of V/Q ratios, and state a condition associated with this ratio.
    13. Given appropriate data, calculate the V/Q and deadspace fraction.
    14. List the types of deadspace and state how each are calculated.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how carbon dioxide is removed from the body and interpret laboratory values associated with blood-gas and acid-base values.

    Objectives:

    1. List the three ways CO2 is transported in the plasma and the three ways it is transported in the RBC.
    2. Given the appropriate data, calculate the carbon dioxide content and state the normal values for each parameter.
    3. Describe the relationship between PaCO2, H ions, and pH.
    4. Describe the ratio of HCO3ions to H2CO3 (PaCO2).
    5. Given appropriate acid-base data, describe the acid-base status including level of compensation, oxygenation status, and state a possible cause of for the disorder.
    6. Differentiate between acute and chronic respiratory/ventilatory failure and identify acid-base disturbances that requires mechanical ventilation.
    7. Given an ABG, identify an acute exacerbation of COPD.

    Outcome 5: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how ventilation is regulated.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the function of the respiratory centers in the medulla oblongata, apneustic, and pneumotaxic centers.
    2. Describe the function of the central and peripheral chemoreceptors.
    3. List and describe the various reflexes associated with ventilation.

    Outcome 6: Upon completion of this course, students will describe the function of the cardiovascular system.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe the function of the various components of blood.
    2. Given appropriate data, calculate cardiac output, stroke volume, blood pressure, and vascular resistance and identify if each is out of range.
    3. List the factors that regulate stroke volume.
    4. Explain how the baroreceptors function to affect blood pressure.
    5. Describe the function of a pulmonary artery catheter and state how pulmonary capillary wedge pressure can be used to determine the type of heart failure present.

    Outcome 7: Upon completion of this course, students will describe how pulmonary function is assessed and used in the diagnosis of pulmonary disease.

    Objectives:

    1. List and describe the technique for determining the volumes and capacities of the lung and state their normal values.
    2. Using graph paper, diagram and calculate the key volumes and flowrates associated with a pulmonary function study.
    3. Given pulmonary function data, identify the process as obstructive, restrictive, mixed, or normal.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Anatomy Review
      1. Directional Terms
      2. Planes of the Body
    2. Anatomy of the Respiratory System
      1. Tissue Epithelium
      2. Upper Airway
      3. Lower Airway
      4. Site of Gas Exchange
      5. Pulmonary Vascular System
      6. Neural Control
      7. Lungs
      8. Mediastinum
      9. Thorax
      10. Muscles of Ventilation
    3. Ventilation
      1. Pressure Differences
      2. Mechanics of Ventilation
      3. Static Characteristics of the Lung
        1. Elastic
        2. Surface Tension
      4. Dynamic Characteristics of the Lung
      5. Ventilatory Patterns
    4. Diffusion
      1. Dalton’s Law
      2. AlveolarCapillary structure
      3. Alveolar Gas Equation
      4. Gas Diffusion across the AC membrane
    5. Pulmonary Function
      1. Lung Volumes
      2. Lung Capacities
      3. Pulmonary Function Studies
    6. Circulatory System
      1. Blood Composition
      2. Heart Anatomy
      3. Systemic and Pulmonary Vascular Resistance
      4. Conduction System
      5. Electrocardiography
      6. Blood Pressure
      7. Heart Failure
      8. Baroreceptors
      9. Blood Volume
    7. Oxygen Transport
      1. Oxygen Transport
      2. Oxygen Dissociation Curve
      3. Tissue Hypoxia
      4. Cyanosis
      5. Polycythemia
      6. Pulse Oximetry
    8. Carbon Dioxide Transport
      1. Carbon Dioxide Transport
      2. Carbon Dioxide Elimination
      3. Carbon Dioxide Dissociation Curve
      4. Acid-Base Balance
      5. Base Excess/Deficit
    9. Ventilation Perfusion Relationships
    10. Control of Breathing

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

  
  • RSPT 1060 - Physiochemical Basis of Respiratory Therapy

    Credit Hours: 3.00


    Prerequisites: Admission into the Respiratory Therapy Program; BIOL 2710 , and BIOL 2730  or BIOL 2400  all with grade C or better

    Corequisites: RSPT 1050  and RSPT 1085  

    RSPT 1060 teaches basic mathematics, physics and chemistry as it applies to respiratory therapy. Topics include measurement systems, mechanics, energy and matter, properties of fluids, gas laws, gas movement, solutions and drug calculations, elements and compounds, acid‑base and fluid balance, and nutrition and metabolism.

    Billable Contact Hours: 3

    When Offered: Fall semester only

    Search for Sections
    OUTCOMES AND OBJECTIVES
    Outcome 1: Upon completion of this course, students will be able to demonstrate the use of basic math principles and concepts to solve problems in Respiratory Care.

    Objectives:

    1. Solve problems involving positive and negative numbers.
    2. Follow the rounding rules.
    3. Solve problems involving decimals.
    4. Solve problems involving order of operation.
    5. Solve problems involving fractions.
    6. Solve problems involving ratios and proportions.
    7. Set up a formula and convert between the measurement systems and within the metric system.
    8. Rearrange formulas.

    Outcome 2: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to apply the laws of gas behavior to equipment and clinical situations in Respiratory Care.

    Objectives:

    1. Demonstrate an understanding of the divisions of matter.
    2. Demonstrate an understanding of basic inorganic chemistry.
    3. Explain and apply Dalton’s Law to respiratory therapy.
    4. Define the following laws, explain the relationship between volume, pressure, mass, and temperature, and use the mathematical formula to solve for an unknown.
      1. Boyle’s Law
      2. Charles’s Law
      3. Gay Lussac’s Law
      4. Combined gas law
      5. Universal (Ideal) Gas Law
    5. Explain the relationship between temperature, pressure, and volume and convert between the temperature scales.
    6. Explain the relationship between the things that affect humidity and describe the different forms of humidity.
    7. Explain how properties of gases may change under extreme temperatures and pressures.
    8. Explain what a critical point is and how it is used in gas therapy.

    Outcome 3: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to explain how changes in surface tension, compliance and resistance will affect gas flow in the respiratory system.

    Objectives:

    1. Describe the processes of internal and external respiration.
    2. Use following laws to explain the factors that affect diffusion of a gas into a liquid, dissolving of a gas in a liquid and gas movement into solution.
      1. Graham’s Law
      2. Henry’s Law
      3. Fick’s Law
    3. Explain the relationship between ventilation and perfusion.
    4. Calculate and apply clinically the respiratory quotient, PAO2, AaDO2, a/A ratio and PaO2/FIO2, oxygen delivery to the tissues, utilization and extraction using cardiac output and oxygen content.
    5. Define and list the causes of hypoxemia and hypoxia.
    6. Draw and explain the equation of motion.
    7. Explain the relationship between pressure, surface tension, surfactant and radius if one if the variables is held constant.
    8. Define, compare, list the formulas for, the normal values for and apply clinically the following:
      1. Lung compliance
      2. Thoracic compliance
      3. Total compliance
      4. Static compliance
      5. Dynamic compliance
      6. Airway resistance
    9. Explain the significance Poiseuille’s law and the Reynolds number as they relate to frictional resistance and ventilation.

    Outcome 4: Upon completion of this course, the student will be able to describe the processes of internal and external respiration, oxygenation, and acid-base balance in the human body.

    Objectives:

    1. Explain the relationship between matter, mixtures and solutions.
    2. Explain the role of the following pressures and their effects on the blood and tracheobronchial tree:
      1. Osmotic
      2. Oncotic
      3. Tonicity
    3. Perform drug calculations.
      1. Given %weight/volume solutions (%)
      2. Given ratio solutions (1:100)
      3. Using the Universal Formula for solving w/v solutions
      4. Drug dilution problems
      5. Given an adult dose of medication, use an infant’s age in months, child’s age in years, weight or body surface area to determine the correct dosage.
    4. Draw and label the pH scale and explain how pH is regulated.
    5. Differentiate between an acid, base and salt.
    6. Given an ABG, indicate the primary Acid-Base disturbance, oxygenation abnormality, possible causes, symptoms, compensation and treatments:
      1. Respiratory acidosis and alkalosis
      2. Metabolic acidosis and alkalosis
    7. Briefly define the following ventilatory acid-base abnormalities and give a blood gas example of each:
      1. Acute alveolar hyperventilation with hypoxemia (respiratory alkalosis or respiratory insufficiency)
      2. Acute ventilatory failure with hypoxemia (uncompensated respiratory acidosis)
      3. Chronic ventilatory failure with hypoxemia (compensated respiratory acidosis)
      4. Acute alveolar hyperventilation superimposed on chronic ventilatory failure
      5. Acute ventilatory failure superimposed on chronic ventilatory failure
    8. Explain the role of electrolytes in acid base balance and identify the macronutrients and micronutrients found in the human body.
    9. Explain the role of body fluid balance, how body fluid is controlled, what causes disorders in body fluids and what symptoms can be caused by imbalance in body fluid volume.

    COMMON DEGREE OUTCOMES (CDO)
    • Communication: The graduate can communicate effectively for the intended purpose and audience.
    • Critical Thinking: The graduate can make informed decisions after analyzing information or evidence related to the issue.
    • Global Literacy: The graduate can analyze human behavior or experiences through cultural, social, political, or economic perspectives.
    • Information Literacy: The graduate can responsibly use information gathered from a variety of formats in order to complete a task.
    • Quantitative Reasoning: The graduate can apply quantitative methods or evidence to solve problems or make judgments.
    • Scientific Literacy: The graduate can produce or interpret scientific information presented in a variety of formats.

    CDO marked YES apply to this course:
    Communication: YES
    Critical Thinking: YES
    Global Literacy: YES
    Information Literacy: YES
    Quantitative Reasoning: YES
    Scientific Literacy: YES

    COURSE CONTENT OUTLINE

    1. Mathematics
      1. Positive and Negative Numbers and rounding
      2. Decimals and order of operation
      3. Proportions, ratios, and fractions
      4. Measurement systems and scientific notation
      5. Conversion and canceling
      6. Rearranging
    2. Basic Chemistry
      1. Atoms and molecules and elements and compounds
      2. Periodic table
      3. Bonding and reaction
      4. Nomenclature
    3. Applied Physics
      1. Mechanics
      2. States of matter
      3. Properties of gases and gas mixtures
      4. Gas laws
      5. Gas in solution, oxygenation and respiration
      6. Gas movement
      7. Solutions and concentrations
      8. Thermodynamics
    4. Inorganic Chemistry
      1. Acid Base balance, fluid and electrolytes
      2. Inorganic Chemistry Acid Base balance, fluid and electrolyte

    Primary Faculty
    Niemer, Laurie
    Secondary Faculty
    Zahodnic, Richard
    Associate Dean
    Shaw, Andrea
    Dean
    Mirijanian, Narine



    Official Course Syllabus - Macomb Community College, 14500 E 12 Mile Road, Warren, MI 48088

 

Page: 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10